Home

FactoryLink 6.5.0 Fundamentals

1. Table 109 1 Tagname Domain Type Description rpt_begin1 SHARED DIGITAL Report generator begin trigger rpt_donel SHARED DIGITAL Report generator complete trigger rpt_end1 SHARED DIGITAL Report generator end trigger rpt_operator SHARED MESSAGE Report generator operator tag rpt_repeat1 SHARED DIGITAL Report generator repeat trigger secl SHARED DIGITAL one second timer trigger spc_cause USER MESSAGE SPC chart cursor cause code spc chart cursor USER ANALOG SPC graphics chart cursor tag spc charttype USER MESSAGE SPC chart type tag spc_cur_value USER FLOAT SPC cursor calculated chart value spc_cursor USER ANALOG SPC chart cursor value spc_datetime USER MESSAGE SPC cursor value date and time spc freeze USER DIGITAL SPC chart freeze tag spc lowcontrol USER FLOAT SPC cursor lower control spc lowspec USER FLOAT SPC cursor lower spec spc mode USER DIGITAL SPC chart mode tag Spc pan USER ANALOG SPC pan value spc range 3sig SHARED DIGITAL SPC range run rule violation spc_range_lowspec SHARED FLOAT SPC range lower spec limit spc_range_upspec SHARED FLOAT SPC range upper spec limit spc_sigma_3sig SHARED DIGITAL SPC standard deviation 3 sigma violation spc_sigma_lowspec SHARED FLOAT SPC sigma lower spec limit spc_sigma_upspec SHARED FLOAT SPC sigma upper spec limit spc_upcenter USER FLOAT SPC cursor upper center line 376 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals
2. T im Flame Vn Cem CT mcm cug un Mm MEI mmn E dC ACDONT Sur Hamer AC USER mi PHI lc PTEMT USER AC PREHT MAA usrn HEFER AD nah ark o emi PT USER 5 m aree ay ew ee Q 5 uem genus vce 6 3 3 Checkthis list to be surethe tag you are deleting is not used anywhere elsein the application If it is you will not be ableto delete the definition from the elements list until each reference is deleted FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 233 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Tags 4 Choose Object List from the View pulldown menu once all references to the tag are removed 5 Position the cursor on the line representing the tag you want to delete 6 Choose File from the configuration panel menu bar The following pulldown menu is displayed Insert Delete Ctl Ins Cut Shift Del Paste Shift Ins 7 Choose Delete from this pulldown menu The tag is deleted from the application 234 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Tags Changing a Tag Definition Once a tag has been defined perform the following steps to change its definition 1 Position the cursor in a configuration panel field c
3. Table 109 1 10 Tagname Domain Type Description lan_recv_flp SHARED FLOAT LAN receive float tags M lan recv lana SHARED LONGANA receive long analog tags lan_recv_msg SHARED MESSAGE _ LAN receive message tags lan_remote_file SHARED DIGITAL LAN remote file creation complete from rpt x lan remotename SHARED MESSAGE remote name lan_send_ana SHARED ANALOG LAN send analog tags z lan send dig SHARED DIGITAL LAN send digital tags v lan send flp SHARED FLOAT LAN send float tags lan send lana SHARED LONGANA LAN send long analog tags lan send msg SHARED MESSAGE LAN send message tags lan test SHARED DIGITAL LAN trigger for math logtrig SHARED DIGITAL Logger timer trigger persist_trig SHARED DIGITAL Trigger for saving Persistence information printscr USER DIGITAL Print screen trigger for Rainbow screen rcp_data SHARED FLOAT Recipe data array rcp_datetime SHARED MESSAGE Recipe date and time rcp_name SHARED MESSAGE Recdipe name rcp_number SHARED ANALOG Recipe number also file number rcp_test SHARED DIGITAL IML recipe procedure trigger rcpdone SHARED DIGITAL Recipe completion trigger rcpfile SHARED ANALOG Recipe file number rcpread SHARED DIGITAL Recipe read trigger rcpstat SHARED ANALOG Recipe status rcpwrite SHARED DIGITAL Recipe write trigger FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 375 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW
4. FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 2 Tagname Domain Type Description NDTL_EXCEPTION_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley NetDTL exception write disable NDTL_EXCEPTION_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley NetDTL exception write trigger NDTL LPORTO MSG SHARED MESSAGE Allen Bradley NetDTL logical port error message NDTL READ COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley NetDTL block read complete NDTL_READ_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley NetDTL block read disable NDTL_READ_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley NetDTL block read state NDTL_READ_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley NetDTL block read trigger NDTL STATIONO STATUS SHARED LONGANA Allen Bradley NetDTL logical station 0 status NDTL_WRITE_COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley NetDTL block write complete NDTL_WRITE_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley NetDTL block write disable NDTL_WRITE_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley NetDTL block write state NDTL_WRITE_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley N amp DTL block write trigger OMRN_EXCEPTION_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Omron exception write disable OMRN_EXCEPTION_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Omron exception write trigger OMRN_READ_COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Omron block read complete OMRN READ DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Omron block read disable OMRN_READ_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Omron block read state OMRN_READ_TRI
5. qp uc ROGO RA 126 pho PA A AL I I 127 MAXSESS 127 io Gp aie eS 127 ST Send 5e aenean SO EP NP QUE 128 SD Send oe DA e 128 Ordering Tag Names 129 Math amp Logic Task Definition 131 Bic PD rr pL 132 Procedures I eet Pees tea eee A re ita e eters 132 Creating Programs 133 Configuration Tables 133 Modes asmara SR eo Ree a 135 Interpreted Mode 135 Switching toCML 136 Complled Mode usse mmm awa ad 136 CML 137 Triggering Calling 139 lY 139 da eh eked a od ede do 139 OLE Automation Server Task Definition 141 Principles of Operation 142 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 7 Table of Contents Fundamentals 14 Persistence Task Definition 143 Persistence Over
6. 93 Logging Methods al nee oe een eas EU E RE EE 94 Logging Based on a Changein the Tag Value Exception Logging 94 Logging Based on Fixed Timelnterval 95 Logging Based a Trigger 95 Logging Data tee ee aie Beda ALP Gees 95 Logging Data During Configuration 96 Logging Data 96 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 5 Table of Contents Fundamentals 7 Dynamic Data Exchange DDE Task Definition 97 Principles of 98 DDE Gonversations ROV NEA er e RUE M Rina a s RP 99 DUE 55 965 ee eee a MER RE 101 Setting Up DDE Server 102 Establishinga DDE Link ea eh 103 Usinga DDE Formula 104 Using a CreateLink Option 104 Modifying a Linked Element 105 DDE Client Functions rn 106 Read Operations 106 Write 5 107 Setting Wp DDE ee Oe RO Ga ee KOREA 108 8
7. Parent Alarm Alarms Displayed parent 1 10 00 parent 1 Child Alarm child 1 Delay Child Alarm a Q 10 17 o child 1 2 E Figure 84 6 Child Alarm Delay Child Alarm Parent Alarm Alarms Displayed parent 1 nO child 1 alarm Child Alarm Delay 115 Child Alarm 10 15 child 1 Distributed Alarm Logging allows you to determine the maximum length of time between the generation of a parent alarm and the time you feel that relationship is no longer involved in the alarm process You can define this if you feel the child is always a result of the parent regardless of when it is generated as long as the parent is in the alarm state wiely Child Recovery Delay Following the same assumption that the parent alarm caused the child alarm the next assumption is clearing the parent alarm clears the child alarm In the previous example the main valve parent was shut off This generated the four pipeline alarms but they are disregarded because they are not important If the main valve is now turned on the flow should return to all four pipelines If one of those lines remains in an alarm state it is now important to know The child recovery delay allows the child alarm to activate in this event After the child has returned to normal the parent child relationship is reestablished Distributed Alarm Logging allows you to determine the maximum length of time between the return of the pare
8. e 5 o lt o e 3 USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Archiving Error Messages Thelog files continue to grow at run time as messages logged to them until the operator shuts down and restarts each task Then FactoryLink creates new log files However actoryLink creates only log file per task per day no matter how many times each task is shut down and re started in one day Delete old log files periodically to prevent log files from using too much disk space You can configure the File Manager task to delete files for you For example File Manager can delete them each day at midnight or when the files specified reach a specified size Caution Do not delete the current log file if the task is still running This causes errors When you are finished debugging your application you can remove the Program Arguments from the System Configuration Information panel to eliminate the creation of extra files 288 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Resizing and Moving Screen Components RESIZING AND MOVING SCREEN COMPONENTS 106 You can modify and move the following F actoryLink screen components e Task panels e Configuration Manager the screen the Main Menu and the Domain Selection box e Application Editor windows The size and position of the screen components will return to their original default values when you exit oi
9. oh ga ae ee irt 186 Database Logging Schemas 186 Trending Task Definition 189 Trending Methodology 190 Real time Only Trending 190 Historical Trending 191 Chart TYPES ovata RENE A wad ena Pe OL ENEREREGEUREU Gu eee US 193 Time based Chart 193 ENentiChart uses E etes de eh aCe RR ede 194 Switching Between Real time and Historical 197 Zooming and Panning 197 Pen types oos Soest toi aiu e ea due 197 Malue Cursor gv an rea eee eat 198 Configuring Program Arguments 199 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 9 Table of Contents Fundamentals 22 Dating TAGS 2 4 QU 201 Tag Naming Guidelines 202 Defining Tags Whilein the Configuration Manage 203 Defining Tags Whilein the Application Editor 205 206 Defining Element Arrays 207 Defining Onedimensional Arrays 207 Defining Multi dimensional Arrays 208 Maxi
10. 56 RIE 5 gt FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 211 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Opening the Configuration Manager OPENING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER How you open the Configuration Manager depends on your operating system platform Once opened the Configuration Manager acts the same for all platforms Windows NT or Windows 95 Platform From the Program Manager 1 Click the FactoryLink icon from the Program M anager window to display the FactoryLink I V program group double click here to open the Configuration Manager Ekina Rppheabnre iaerbebns owwgaas B MXN bend adl _ Jippin san S Sana n Wedel IET If you have more than one FactoryLink application you may have more than one FactoryLink IV program group Be sure to open the program group for the desired application 2 double click on the FactoryLink Configuration icon From the Command Line 1 Set the FactoryLink application environment variable by entering the following command at the system prompt Set FLAPP c flapp 2 Enter the following command to open the Configuration M anager flcm 212 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Opening the Configuration Manager OS 2 Platform Open the Configuration Manager in one of two ways either from the Desktop Manager or from the command line if you are running FactoryLink on a
11. Format file Get pump temperature BEGIN Get pump temperature Temp 10 End triggered End text is written to report REPEAT Pia Temperature temp Report is sent to destination Temperature 14 all done reporting END all done reporting a ue et pump 174 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals REPORT GENERATOR TASK DEFINITION Trigger Actions This example generates a report using the following format file which includes all three sections 100 Figure 100 4 Comment section Format file _ BEGIN Get pump temperature Begin section REPEAT Repeat section _J Temperature temp End section lt all done reporting This sample report format is used to generate an historical data log A temporary working file is opened when the report is triggered This file remains open until the end section is triggered The report header is written to the file when the begin section is triggered In this example Get pump temperature is written at the top of the report When the repeat section is triggered the values of the data elements mapped to the object names included in this section are read from the real time database and written to the file In this example the value of the real time element containing the pump temperature is mapped to the object name temp and is written to the report Any literal text included in this section is al
12. Shutdown All Exit 2 Choose Shutdown All from the Options pulldown menu 346 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Exiting RTMON EXITING RTMON 1 Choose Options from the Run Time Monitor panel FactoryLink Run Time Monitor iof x ptions H E Poll Rate 1 000 The following pulldown menu is displayed Watch Process Tag Input Command Input Global Info Shutdown All Exit 2 Choose Exit from the Options pulldown menu 108 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 347 JOVIUOW USING RUN TIME MONITOR Run time Manager Messages RUN TIME MANAGER MESSAGES If errors occur while using Run time M anager error messages are displayed on screen This section lists these messages describes their cause and provides suggested actions Messages are described in two ways e Text message Refer to Text Messages on page 348 for text messages e Error numbers Refer to Messages with Error Numbers on page 354 for error number messages Text Messages Bad command number Cause An invalid command was written to the global element COMMAND Action Verify the external process compatibility with actoryLink Bad file size for filename Cause TheFLAPP CT TYPE CT file has been damaged Action Delete the file and re start the application to rebuild the file Bad index in file filename Cause Unable to read the index of the
13. Windshields Produced Group data is data that logically belongs together For example a soup manufacturer that makes two flavors of soup may want to track different batches of both flavors Using an event chart with groups soup flavors this manufacturer can graphically represent the differences in sodium content for each group by batch At the end of the batch cyde a trigger initiates the sampling of the sodium content for the batch This sampleis written to the database and the sequence number increments to prepare for the sampling of the next batch The differences can be shown as separate trend charts for each soup flavor cream of chicken or chicken noodle Refer tothe following example for representative trend charts FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 195 TRENDING TASK DEFINITION Chart Types Figure 103 6 Sodium Content Cream of Chicken Soup 5 4 3 2 Soup Batch Sodium Content Chicken Noodle Soup 100 3 50 3 Soup Batch 196 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals TRENDING TASK DEFINITION Switching Between Real time and Historical Mode SWITCHING BETWEEN REAL TIME AND HISTORICAL MODE Switching modes allows you to switch between viewing real time and historical data When in real time mode a trend chart shows data as it is being logged to the database When in historical mode a trend chart shows only data stored in the database If you change screens while in histor
14. e T o lt r 2 S FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 1 Tagname Domain Type Description trn_leg_max USER ANALOG Trend chart legend max trn_leg_tics USER ANALOG Trend chart legend tics trn_mode USER DIGITAL Trend mode toggle trn_pan USER ANALOG Trend Pan value trn_pen USER DIGITAL Trend chart pen source toggle trn penl USER ANALOG Trend cursor output value trn pen column USER MESSAGE Trend pen database column source trn starttime USER LONGANA Trend Start time oldest data trn_zoom USER ANALOG Trend zoom factor If you restore the FactoryLink blank application FLBLANK the following pre configured tags are available 378 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 2 Tagname Domain Type Description AB_EXCEPTION_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley exception write disable AB_EXCEPTION_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley exception write trigger AB_LPORTO_MSG SHARED MESSAGE Allen Bradley logical port 0 error message AB_READ_COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley block read complete AB_READ_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley block read disable AB_READ_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley block read state AB_READ_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley block read trigger AB STATIONO STATUS SHARED ANALOG Allen Bradley logi
15. 0 000 ee 307 Run time Manager lt lt 308 Text MESSAGES n 308 Messages with Error Numbers 314 Correcting Internal Errors 320 26 Using Run Time Monitor 321 Accessing the Run Time 322 Viewing the Current Value of Elements 324 Adding Elements toa Watch List 325 Ddeting Elements from a Watch List 326 Finding Elements a Watch List 326 Storing Watch List 327 Retrieving Watch List 328 Reading and Writing a Real Time Database Element 329 Monitoring FactoryLink Processes 331 Using Run Time Monitor Commands 335 Terminatinga Task ee 336 Exiting Commands Window 336 AccesingHelp 336 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 12 Fundamentals Reding an Element 337 Writing to an 339 Working with Batch 341
16. At 6 00 A M Shift 1is created and data is logged to Shift_1 until 2 00 P M At 2 00 P M Shift 2is created and data is logged to Shift 2 until 10 00 At 10 00 P M Shift 3 is created and data is logged to Shift 3 until 6 00 A M At 6 00 A M subgroup rollover occurs creating a new Shift 1 and deleting the data for Shift 1from the previous day This eliminates the need to manually delete data no longer required 84 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DATABASE LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Deletion Methods Deleting Group Data If you are logging grouped data or nongrouped sequenced data delete all the records for a group in a single operation using a group delete trigger The following figure illustrates when group data for Dallas is deleted the group data for Atlanta remains Group Gals Used Dallas 45 Group Gals Used lt Group Dallas Dallas 16 deletion is Atlanta 12 Dallas 27 triggered Atlanta 25 Atlanta 12 Atlanta 25 The following figure illustrates when a group delete is triggered creation of new subgroups begins counting at one Group Gals Used Dallas 1 45 Group Gals Used Group Dallas Dallas_1 16 deletion is Atlanta 1 12 Dallas 2 27 triggered Atlanta 2 25 Atlanta_1 12 Atlanta_2 25 If you specify the null group or leave the group name blank for the delete group operation
17. CDBLIST Useto view the binary CDB files in ASCII representation CTLIST Useto view the binary CT files in ASCII representation e DBCHK Fixes FactoryLink database index files e KEYINST Installs FactoryLink license with specified options e FLKEYVAL Enables FactoryLink software subsequent to installation FLSHM A memory display utility that lists existing FactoryLink real time database memory areas You can usethis information to dean up memory if FactoryLink aborts e UKEY Displays license options BH SQL Refer toFactoryLink Configuration Guide for details for using this utility to maintain FactoryLink dBASE IV database files T i 9 lt 7 This chapter describes how to use these utilities Command line formats and case may vary from one platform to the next Open help using the question mark at the command line prompt to get details for your specific platform FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 361 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW FLNEW After installing F actoryLink for the first time you must create a new application using FLNEW to serve as the base upon which to build FactoryLink application This utility creates the necessary subdirectories FLNEW overwrites any FactoryLink application already existing in the destination directory To preserve an existing application back it up by performing an FLSAVE before executing the FLNEW utility or ensure
18. o lt ubi 3 Resizing a Screen Complete the following steps to resize a screen component 1 Position the cursor anywhere on the bounding borders The cursor changes to a double arrow 2 Movethe pointing device in either direction as indicated by the arrow to stretch or shrink the size Moving a Screen Complete the following steps to move a screen component 1 Position the cursor on the title bar Press and hold the left button If the file was inactive it is now active 2 Movethe pointing device to the new location and release the left button FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 289 USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Calculating the Number of FactoryLink Processes CALCULATING THE NUMBER OF FACTORYLINK PROCESSES Use the following chart to calculate the processes required by FactoryLink The total number of processes used by FactoryLink is the number of USER domain processes multiplied by the number of users plus the number of SHARED domain processes Table 106 2 FactoryLink Processes of Processes of Processes for FactoryLink IV Task for the USER the SHARED Domain Domain meme D p pa ho o ranse fe Statistical Process Control SPCVIEW SPR SPCLOG File Manager CLIENT 2 NA SERVER NA 2 290 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Calculating the Number of FactoryLink Processes Table
19. 356 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Run time Manager Messages 28 FLE_QSIZE_TOOBIG Cause Internal error a task attempted to attach a queue to an element but there was not enough memory Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section 29 FLE QSIZE CHANGED Cause Internal error a task attempted to attach a queue to an element but a queue of a different size was already attached Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section 30 FLE NO TAG LIST Cause This error only occurs on custom tasks written using the FactoryLink PAK If the custom task was set up to access elements by name instead of by ID number this error can occur if the element list has not been defined Action Usethe API function FL SET TAG LIST todefinethe element list Then re start FactoryLink Refer to the Programmer s Access Kit PAK manual for information about L SET TAG LIST 31 FLE TAG LIST CHANGED Cause This message can be displayed only if an application has been set up so one task monitors another task s element list f one task modifies the other task s element list the task that modified the list will return this message thus informing the task that it s list has been modified Action Noaction required 108 32 FLE WAKEUP FAILED Cause Internal error The real time database tried unsuccessfully to wake a task waiting for the value of a particular element to cha
20. Write Writes the value in the Value field to the element Force Force writes the value in the Value field to the element 330 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Monitoring FactoryLink Processes MONITORING FACTORYLINK PROCESSES You can use RTMON to monitor the activity of all FactoryLink tasks in an application This is useful for detecting and diagnosing problems during application development For example if you detect most FactoryLink tasks have little or no status changes except Math amp Logic this could indicate one of the following At least one Math amp Logic procedure is using up all CPU resources e Math amp Logicis caught in a loop This can happen if a procedure tests for condition that never occurs Perform the following steps to monitor FactoryLink tasks 1 Choose Options from the Run Time Monitor panel FactoryLink Run Time Monitor Di x Options H D Poll Rate 1 000 The following pulldown menu is displayed Watch Process Tag Input Command Input Global Info Shutdown All Exit 108 2 Choose Process from the Options pulldown menu The Monitor Process List window is displayed FactoryLink Monitor Process List Options 5 Task 99 Run Time Manager FS o FL Name RUNMGR PID 331645 3 J Active YES Terminate OFF 11 35 Waits 11 o el Read Calls 29 Elem Read 29 ur Vrite Calls 141 Elem Written 141 Lock Calls 189 Lock Time
21. 3 Providethe following information Source Enter the full path name of the application source directory If you are restoring FLTEST enter c flink mps fltest mps If you are restoring FLDEMO enter c flink mps fldemo mps Destination Enter the full path name of the application destination directory 398 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLTEST and FLDEMO 4 Choose Local Multiplatform Save File as the type of save file you want to restore eo co 5 ChooseOK FLREST begins restoring the files 6 Create a program group for the FLTEST application using Additional Install Functions from the Windows Program Manager These application are configured to usethe dBASE IV Historian If you do not use this Historian configure the application to use the desired Historian before you run any activities opening a relational database This application uses most of the FactoryLink tasks you have purchased Some Screens may do nothing if you have not purchased or installed the task that provides the information to that screen T o i lt o FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 399 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES On UNIX Operating Systems ON UNIX OPERATING SYSTEMS This section describes how to restore the FLDEMO or FLTEST and applications on a UNIX operating system Restoring FLDEMO 1 Create a target directory for the test application by entering the following command a
22. Data Point and Database Both tasks read data from the Real Time Database and send it to the disk based relational database via a FactoryLink Historian e Data Point Logging was developed to simplify the task of logging data by providing preconfigured tables Multiple shared numeric value tags can be stored in the same database and sorted later if necessary It also allows you to add or remove tags from the list of tags being logged during run time Data Point Logging builds a database that will capture for the specified tag Date ti me Tag name Tag value Data Point Logging is best suited for situations in which the tags that areto be logged do not need to be grouped together Refer to Data Point Logging Task Definition on page 91 for more information on Data Point Logging FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 27 OVERVIEW Data Logging Overview Database Logging task allows you to create a table and specify which tags to capture in that table When the value of any tag changes the value of all tags in the table is logged Database Logging provides the ability to group tags in a database table n addition event based data can be logged using a sequence key rather than a time key Refer to Database Logging Task Definition on page 73 for more information on Database Logging Data Point vs Database Logging Prior to configuring the logging function you should determine which logging task you will be using for a particular situ
23. FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 1 Tagname Domain Type Description spc_upcontrol USER FLOAT SPC cursor upper control spc_upspec USER FLOAT SPC cursor upper spec spc_xbar_3sig SHARED DIGITAL SPC xbar 3 sigma run rule violation spc_xbar_lowspec SHARED FLOAT SPC xbar lower spec limit spc_xbar_upspec SHARED FLOAT SPC xbar upper spec limit spctrig SHARED DIGITAL SPC sample trigger spool_msg SHARED MESSAGE Spooler message for device 1 spr_center SHARED FLOAT SPR center line spr_histtrig USER DIGITAL SPR histgram trigger spr_lowcontrol SHARED FLOAT SPR lower control limit spr_recalc SHARED DIGITAL SPR recalculation trigge spr_recalc2 SHARED DIGITAL SPR recalculation trigger for XBARS spr_scenter SHARED FLOAT SPR sigma center line spr_slowcontrol SHARED FLOAT SPR sigma lower control line spr_supcontrol SHARED FLOAT SPR sigma upper control limit spr_upcontrol SHARED FLOAT SPR upper control spr_xcenter SHARED FLOAT SPR xbar center line spr_xlowcontrol SHARED FLOAT SPR xbar lower control spr_xupcontrol SHARED FLOAT SPR xbar upper control trendrepmbx USER MAILBOX Historian reply mailbox trn cursor USER ANALOG Trend cursor position trn endtime USER LONGANA Trend end time most recent trn grid USER DIGITAL Trending grid on off trn leg divs USER ANALOG Trend chart legend divisions FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 377
24. 430 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals AB CD EF GHI JK LM N OP QRS TUVWXYZ GLOSSARY bell shaped curve curve or distribution showing a central peak and tapering off smoothly and symmetrically to tails on either side The following example is a normal curve AE MEAN d 50 01 Bell Shaped Curve binary number Numeric system used in computers with a base of 2 two digits 0 system 1 represent numerical quantities bit Abbreviation for binary digit The smallest unit of information consisting of only two possible states which may be 1 or 0 ON or OFF TRUE or FALSE or YES or NO depending on the context block key Hardware component plugged into a FactoryLink key ring that contains information used by FactoryLink to enable licensed software options See button key ring protection device block read Triggered read operation in which the EDI task directs the triggered protocol module to read the values of all external device addresses specified in a single table and write them tothe real time database Block Read Digital element with a value force written to 1 ON by the EDI Complete task whenever any block read operation for the read table is completed If this element is defined when the EDI task initializes its valueis force written to 1 ON Block Read Digital element of 1 ON that disables the block read of the Disable elements specified in a read table Block Read Priority Priority that influences
25. Cause Thetask is already running Action Nothing the task will continue to run 314 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MANAGER Run time Manager Messages Cause The indicated task is not enabled on the F actoryLink key Action Contact your FactoryLink sales representative to obtain the proper key and or option 7 FLE_BAD_ARGUMENT Cause Internal error a task tried to pass an invalid argument to the real time database Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section 9 FLE BAD TAG Cause The CTs need to be rebuilt Action Rebuild the CTs by running CTGEN 10 FLE NULL POINTER 107 Cause Internal error a task gave out a null pointer Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section 12 FLE_PROC_TABLE_FULL Cause 31 tasks arerunning in the chosen domain Only 31 tasks can run in each domain at once Action Noaction required do not try torun morethan 31 tasks per domain at a time Cc e 5 2 JJ ftc ml 3 13 FLE BAD PROC Cause Oneofthefollowing conditions caused this error The CTs need to be rebuilt Action Perform the corresponding action Run CTGEN to rebuild the CTs If this does not solve the problem proceed to step 2 Cause A task name used in the application has not been entered in the Task Name field of the System Configuration Table Action Open the System Configuration Table from the Configuration
26. Domain Type Description Task Value Seg Offs Size Flags Dimension Msg LEN Persistence Change Bits Logical name assigned to reference the real time database element Domain in which the element is configured This can be either shared or user Data type of the element Refer to Defining Tags in the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for a complete list of data types Description of the purpose of the element You can modify the entry in this field Unused Start up value for the tag You can modify the entry in this field Segment number where element is stored in the real time database FactoryLink uses the entry in this field in combination with the entry in the Offs field to determine the location of the element Offset number assigned to the element by FactoryLink FactoryLink uses the entry in this field in combination with the entry in the Seg field to determine the location of the element Unused This field is currently not used Array dimension size if this entry is part of an array Sizes are 1 based and are separated by commas If the element is not an array this field is blank Used only for message elements indicates maximum number of characters permitted in the message You can modify the entry in this field Type of persistence assigned to this element You can modify the entry in this field Refer to the Core Task Section of the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for more
27. FUNACK function IJK L MN OP QRS TUVW X YZZ See floating point Data type supported by FactoryLink each floating point value occupies 10 bytes of storage in the real time database and holds numeric values in the range 47 1E 308 to 47 1 308 with a precision of 15 decimal digits all figures approximate Abbreviated F LOAT Mathematical expression consisting of an optional minus sign followed by consecutive digits 0 9 a decimal point and another group of consecutive digits Floating point constants may be used interchangeably with exponential constants FactoryLink environment variable that points to the location of the license information directory FLINK OPT The directory contains the files FL DEV key type and FL KEY options and license information If you use FLOPT in the pathname with its the system uses the default environment variable FactoryLink application utility that restores and creates application files into a platform dependent application FactoryLink application utility that backs up graphics files symbols configuration tables recipes logs and other files and creates a backup of the specified application FactoryLink environment variable specified during installation as the name of the domain instance There is no default for this variable Complete set of type of one size and style Write operation that writes a new value even if it is the same as the old value to a
28. K ppr Poorer SS 01 E SLB x rows ONE Br ren rk TAE ETAT Fir hdurespri Firma Geert TAIT Lera H Leva fama H cmc tor o and ipethonding ber reni and Ever Timer Inir rami rd Malls mel Leni Urea eani d AREE Lined i n dm Frripr and uud Enar besin Ledin Teki riene Ered k Hiit Gas fiai MEHR Fani Pagar VAN tate TAG E Ta ET TAZEETRHT TAZEXIRHY X 9 TAREETAIE TAZEITAHT X ETP LACT X FAWEXIRHEI x Vau S TAHY 6 Specify the following information Flags Process to be performed by the system A task can have multiple flags with flag values entered in any order The entries and descriptions are as follows S Session flag Provides the process with its own 274 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals window Any output to that process or task is directed to this window rather than to the Run Time Manager window The RUNMGR RTMON and GRAPHICS processes require their own windows Run flag Activates this task at F actoryLink startup To allow a task to be started manually by an operator do not enter the R flag Foreground flag Puts this task in the foreground at startup Use the F flag if the task has neither the S nor the R flags Task Name Description The next six elements contain information about the t
29. STRUCTURE OF FUNDAMENTALS Fundamentals is part of the Complete and Basic sets of manuals in the overall FactoryLink Documentation Set This manual is divided into twenty eight chapters plus a Glossary Chapters 1 21 General overview of the FactoryLink product and overviews of each individual task used to configure a F actoryLink application Chapter 22 Working with Tags in the Configuration Manager Chapter 23 Using the Configuration Manager Chapter 24 U sing System Configuration Chapter 25 Using Run Time Manager Chapter 26 Using Run Time Monitor Chapter 27 F actoryL ink Utilities Chapter 28 F actoryLink Lite Glossary How To USE THIS MANUAL The material in this manual is presented in a learning order We recommend you read the entire manual to familiarize yourself with all the information before you proceed to develop your application 16 FactoryLink ECS 6 5 0 PREFACE Conventions CONVENTIONS The material in the Documentation Set adheres to the guidelines published in The Digital Technical Documentation Handbook by Schultz Darrow Kavanagh and Morse Developing I nternational User Information by J ones Kennelly Mueller Sweezy Thomas and Velez and corporate style guidelines This manual uses the following conventions Horizontal ellipsis points indicate the omission of material from an example The information is omitted because it is not important to the topic being discussed
30. e Configure a tag to be a dynamic pen on a trend chart e Dynamically change the list of tags being logged during run time o gt D For example if you have a tank you are monitoring the process temperature in with a single probe the tank you would use Data Point Logging to track the tag value If you have six probes in the same tank and you want to see the value returned from each probe at a given point in time you would use the Database Logging task Refer to FactoryLink ECS Fundamentals Guide Chapter 87 Database Logging Task Definition and Chapter 88 Data Point Logging Task Definition to determine which logging method to use for your application before configuring a table FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 185 SCHEMA TASK DEFINITION Trending The referenced database table must be configured in the Trend Database Tables panel and either the Database Logging function or the Data Point Logging function if you are using the Trend database The Data Point and Database Trend tables are mutually exclusive therefore a single table cannot be configured in both functions Database Logging Schemas When you log data to F actoryLink Database Logging in addition to logging the data you may find it useful to e Group certain data together grouping e Seethe order the data was logged or the actual time a data event occurred sequencing or ordering e Sort the records into a particular order such
31. element I JK LE MN OP QR STU VW X Y Z Conventional base 10 numbering system Choice made by a program in the absence of a specific selection Person who designs and configures a F actoryLink application Name of an external device FactoryLink uses to communicate through a particular logical port Numeric data type supported by FactoryLink each digital element holds one bit of information of two values 1 ON TRUE or OFF FALSE List of files found in a particular area of the operating system Consisting of unconnected distinct parts Graphically displayed output field using the Application Editor that provides an area on a screen where the F actoryLink real time database displays information output See animation object Characteristics of elements in the real time database in either the USER or SHARED domain See shared domain user domain Characterized by continuous change activity or progress Layered communication interface that supports communication links with COMM ports terminal servers and coprocessors An EDI architectural layer that insulates the application from the device and monitors and controls external processes FactoryLink task that allows information from an external device such as a programmable logic controller PLC RTU loop controller distributed I O data collection terminal or bar code scanner to be transferred to and from the F actoryLink real time database Computer program th
32. point 42 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Valid Types Description For example 96 7ld specifies a left justified long decimal value with a minimum field width of 7 digits Thevalueis padded to the right with spaces For example 9605ld specifies a right justified long decimal value with a minimum field width of 5 A 0 before the width specifies the value is padded with zeros For example 6 2f specifies a right justified floating point value with a minimum total field width of 6 digits The decimal point counts as 1 digit This means two digits are displayed after the decimal point and at least three digits are displayed before the decimal point The value is padded with spaces For example 5s specifies a right justified messagestring with a minimum field width of 5 characters The valueis padded with spaces For example 5s is the same as the example above except the hyphen before the width specifies the value is left justified Sample Output 5 15 2400 20000 1000000 00005 00015 02400 20000 1000000 5 51 150 08 24000 65 Chapter 84 Alarm Logging Task Definition Data collected by FactoryL ink is stored as a data element in a real time database Each time data is collected the value stored in the real time database for an element is overwritten by the new data Using Distributed Alarm Logging you can establish criteria that generates an alarm for any defined d
33. specified M DX database file does not exist The user does not have sufficient privilege to access the file Thefileis corrupted Action Verify the following 1 The existence of the index file 2 The user has proper privilege to access the file 3 Theintegrity of theindex file using the DBCHK utility Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur 260 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages Error selecting index Cause Thespecified index name does not exist The file is corrupted Action Verify the following 1 The existence of the index file 2 The integrity of the index file using the DBCHK utility Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur Expected xxxxx Cause The AC parser did not find what it expected Acion Fixthe AC and try again Expected expected record length Found actual record length Cause Therecord read was longer than expected The file being imported may not have come from an export of the same database The wrong file may have entered Action Ensurethe correct fileis being used External command line too long Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware Setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Action Verify the following 1 The o
34. 323 108 fe USING RUN TIME MONITOR Viewing the Current Value of Elements VIEWING THE CURRENT VALUE OF ELEMENTS You can view the current value of elements using the watch list display This display is real time and updates at the selected poll rate 1 Choose Watch from the Options pulldown menu to open the watch list The Monitor Watch List panel is displayed TTE loj x piri You can display multiple watch lists at the same time Each time you choose Watch from the Options pulldown menu a new watch list panel is created The watch list panel has one item on its menu bar 2 Choose Options from the watch list menu bar to display the following pulldown menu Load TAGS Save TAGS Load Data Save Data Add Watch Delete Watch Find Watch Exit The actions you can perform on the watch list are described in the following pages The order they are discussed is the order you would use them to build and save a watch list rather than the order they are presented in the pulldown menu 324 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Viewing the Current Value of Elements Adding Elements to a Watch List 1 Choose Add Watch from the watch list Options pulldown menu The following dialog is displayed Enter iha iag name 2 Enter the name of the tag you want to monitor and choose the Enter button Its name and current
35. An attempt was made to start a USER domain when the SHARED domain did not exist Action Start the SHARED domain Run time Manager errno error number Cause TheRun time Manager was awakened when there was nothing for it to do Internal error Action No action required 352 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Run time Manager Messages Run time Manager CT processing failed Cause Oneor more of the elements ARGUMENT COMMAND PASSWORD SHUTDOWN or STARTUP is not defined in the GLOBAL CDB file The file has been damaged or installed incorrectly Action Contact Customer Support Run time Manager failed to start Cause TheRun time Manager must be the first task started The Start Order number for RUNMGR must be 0 no other task may have a zero for a Start Order number Action Check the System Configuration Table to verify the Start Order Run time Manager failed to stop Cause The process may already have stopped Action Attempt to stop the process manually if it has not stopped Run time Manager is already running Cause A copy of the Run time Manager is already running for the DOMAIN and USER name specified Action Change the DOMAIN or USER name Software has not been enabled Cause An error has occurred with the f1 key file in the opt directory Action 1 Run KEYINST and if an invalid or archaic agreement is 108 found re enter the configuration information 2 FLKEYVAL
36. Define only as many unique structures as you use because schema definitions are shared For example assume you log the last name first name and start date of your employees to two different tables One table contains information about employees in the Dallas facility and the other contains information about employees in the Atlanta facility Only one schema is defined because both table structures are the same Dallas table Atlanta table Lastname Firstname Start_date Smith Charlie 12 14 93 J ohnson J immy 2 14 95 Same Table 102 2 schema Lastname Firstname Start_date J ones Susan 11 6 95 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 187 102 lt lt 25 SCHEMA TASK DEFINITION 188 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 103 Trending Task Definition As data is collected or computed by F actoryLink it is stored as a data elementina real time database Each time data is collected or computed the new data overwrites the value stored in the real time database for an element lt lt Using the Trend application you can create animated graphs called trend charts that graphically show this numeric data To show the data as it occurs you create real time trend charts using the real time database To show the data after it occurred you create historical trend charts using a relational database Trend charts resemble strip charts The illu
37. FLDOMAIN domain export FLDOMAIN FLNAME app_name 107 export FLNAME FLUSER user_name export FLUSER S where a flink_dir defines the full path to the directory containing the F actoryLink 3 z program files 5 flapp_dir defines the full path to the directory containing your application files 3 domain defines the domain you are starting This should shared for the window where you are starting the shared domain app name defines the full path to the directory containing your application files user name defines the log on name of the user starting the application Enter the following command at the system prompt flrun options where options is one or more of the options specified in the table on page 293 The system starts the Run Time Manager in the shared domain but the Run Time Manager screen is not yet visible FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 301 USING RUN TIME MANAGER Accessing Run Time Manager 4 Ensure the FLAPP FLINK FLDOMAIN FLNAME AND FLUSER environment variables are set for the user domain If not set them How you do this depends on whether you are using a C shell or a Korn or Bourne shell If you areusing a C shell enter the following commands at the system prompt of the shell where you are starting the user domain setenv FLINK link dir setenv FLAPP flapp dir setenv FLDOMAIN domain setenv FLNAME app name setenv FLUSER user name If you are using a Korn or Bourne shell ent
38. FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 191 TRENDING TASK DEFINITION Trending Methodology 5 Trend requests the data from the relational database via Historian so it can be displayed on a trend chart 6 Trend sends the data to the run time Graphics task 7 Graphics displays the trend chart Figure 103 3 P Trending sends the data to the Graphics mailbox i Trending requests data from Historian via the Historian mailbox Data is received by Logger and arranged by record then sent to the Historian mailbox 192 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals f Graphics takes the data from its mailbox and plots it Historian sends the requested data to the Trend mailbox TRENDING TASK DEFINITION Chart Types CHART TYPES Within trending there are two types of charts e time based e event The chart type to use depends on how the data was indexed This can be one of the following Time stamping If the data is indexed on time stamping you must trend the data on a time based chart e Integer If the data is indexed on an integer you must trend the data on an event chart e Integer plus a group D If the data is indexed on an integer plus a group identifier you must trend the data on an event chart lt lt Refer to Logging the F actoryLink Configuration Guide for additional information on indexing Time based Chart Data indexed on a time stamping can b
39. GE Normal Normal TAG Time Time NE lt gt Active Normal Time Time Message Elements Message tags can detect a change in the value and be checked on equal or not equal toa limit based on the first 12 characters of the message If TGL condition is established the alarm vanishes as soon as it is detected because it always immediately returns to normal If the alarm is marked for an operator to acknowledge it the alarm is visible until it is acknowledged and then clears from the display If Distributed Alarm Logging is configured for logging the data to a relational database it logs as an alarm whether it is set to be acknowledged or not An example of the use of this option is for logging changed operator names 48 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals ALARM LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Alarm States ALARM STATES Every time the value of an alarm element is changed the new value is evaluated on the alarm criteria If thecriteria are not met for an alarm the value is considered to bein a normal condition fthecriteria met a new alarm is added to the active alarm list and the value is in an active condition Distributed Alarm Logging maintains a running count of the number of alarms in the active queue in a data element represented by the tag name ALC_ACTCNT If thealarm is already active and the value no longer meets the criteria it re
40. KTDTL_READ_COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley KTDTL block read complete KTDTL_READ_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley KTDTL block read disable KTDTL_READ_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley KTDTL block read state KTDTL_READ_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley KTDTL block read trigger KTDTL STATIONO STATUS SHARED LONGANA Allen Bradley KTDTL logical station 0 status KTDTL WRITE COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley KTDTL block write complete KTDTL_WRITE_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley KTDTL block write disable KTDTL_WRITE_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley KTDTL block write state KTDTL_WRITE_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley KTDTL block write trigger MBUS EXCEPTION DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus exception write disable MBUS EXCEPTION TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus exception write trigger 384 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 2 Tagname Domain Type Description MBUS LPORTO MSG SHARED MESSAGE Modicon Modbus logical port 0 error message MBUS READ COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus block read complete MBUS READ DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus block read disable MBUS READ STATE SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus block read state MBUS READ TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus block read trigger MBUS STATIONO STATUS SHARED ANALOG Modicon Modbus logical statio
41. Manager Main Menu and ensurethe names of all tasks in the application are present in the Task Name field FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 315 USING RUN TIME MANAGER Run time Manager Messages Cause Therequested task is not running Action Ensure you started all tasks needed to run the application 14 FLE BAD USER NAME Cause TheFLUSER environment variable is not set Action Set the environment variables re start FactoryLink 22 FLE_ALREADY_ACTIVE Cause Thetask is already running Action Nonedo not start a task already running 23 FLE_NOT_LOCKED Cause Internal error a task tried to unlock the real time database without having locked it first Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section 24 FLE_LOCK_FAILED Cause Internal error a task used an invalid Task ID to lock the real time database Therefore the task did not successfully lock the real time database or perform its function Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section 25 FLE LOCK EXPIRED Cause Atask has kept the real time database locked longer than the kernel allows Action None currently the kernel allows tasks to lock the real time database for as long as necessary Therefore the lock time will not expire 26 FLE_WAIT_FAILED Cause Internal error while trying to do a change wait on an element a task sent an invalid Task I D to the real time database Action See Correcting Inter
42. Run time Manager Messages Correcting Internal Errors Internal errors are generally caused by one of the tasks in the system in use and not by your application For this reason we recommend you use the following guidelines to correct an internal error 1 Try to determine which task is sending the error by shutting down FactoryLink restarting it and starting each task one at a time 2 Write down any error messages displayed on the Run time Manager screen and their corresponding tasks Thetask having the problem may generate a seemingly unrelated error message 3 Contact the supplier of thetask in error if thetask in error is an external task 4 Contact Customer Support if thetask in error is a FactoryLink task 5 Contact Customer Support if the task cannot be identified 320 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 108 Using Run Time Monitor Run Time Monitor RTMON allows you to monitor how the real time application is functioning in order totest your application before using it or to debug problems that arise during processing after it is developed Using RTMON you can e Simulate input to real time database elements e Monitor how the values of data elements in the real time database change e Start stop or monitor FactoryLink tasks In general any development testing or debugging operation that can be aided by directly accessing the FactoryL ink real time database either by reading from or writing to
43. Sleep Indicates whether or not the task is waiting for the kernel to wake it up to inform of an element s change in status Green indicates waiting Red indicates not waiting Wait Lock Indicates whether or not a task is waiting to lock the real time database When a task is reading from or writing tothe real time database it locks all other tasks out of the database Green indicates it is waiting Red indicates it is not waiting 108 Wait Acc Indicates whether or not a task is waiting for access to the real time database Green indicates it is waiting Red indicates it is not waiting Wait Read Indicates whether or not a task is waiting to perform a read operation Green indicates it is waiting Red indicates it is not waiting Wait Write Indicates whether or not a task is waiting to perform a write operation Green indicates it is waiting Red indicates it is not waiting 3 w L uny FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 345 USING RUN TIME MONITOR Terminating All FactoryLink Tasks TERMINATING ALL FACTORYLINK TASKS Perform the following steps to terminate all FactoryLink tasks in the current domain Terminate all user domain tasks before terminating shared domain tasks 1 Choose Options from the Run Time Monitor panel FactoryLink Run Time Monitor of x Options E E Poll Rate 1 000 The following pulldown menu is displayed Watch Process Tag Input Command Input Global Info
44. The following pulldown menu is displayed 3 Choose Export from the pulldown menu The database files are exported Importing an Application Importing converts ASCII text files created using the export function to database files in a new application If a file with the same name already exists in the application when you import a file the contents of the imported file are placed at the end of the existing file Use care when doing this as no merging occurs Duplicate records may be inserted Perform the following steps to import database files to an application 1 Export the database files for the application you want to import to a new application Refer to Exporting an Application on page 222 for details on how to do this 2 Openthe application where you want to import the exported application data Refer to Opening a New Development Application on page 221 for details on 105 opening an application y JE 5 mc 5 o im FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 223 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Multiple Development Applications 3 Choose Utilities from the Main M enu or configuration panel menu bar If you choose it from the Main Menu the entire application is imported If you choose it from a configuration panel only that panel s information is imported 1 Configuration Manager Application View Utilities Exit Help F1 The following pulldown menu is displayed Rep
45. Vertical ellipsis points indicate the omission of information from an example or command format The information is omitted because it is not important to the topic being discussed italic type Italic type is used to denote user supplied variables in command examples Italic type also sets off references to specific documents monospace type Monospace type is used to denote command names and code examples or example output bold monospace type Bold monospace type is used in command examples to indicate words that must be typed literally sans serif type Sans Serif type is used to set off field names button names and keys on the keyboard blue type Blue type is used for headings and to call attention to information within the text press nnnnn Press is used to denote a key on the keyboard The key name will appear in a sans serif type dick on nnnnn Click on is used to denote a button on the screen The button name will appear in a sans serif type FactoryLink ECS 6 5 0 17 PREFACE Conventions Shift F 1 The indicates the keys must be pressed simultaneously Shift F1 indicates you hold down the Shift key while you press another key or mouse button indicated here by F 1 Other key combinations are presented in the same manner F1 F2F3 The space between the key callouts indicates press and release The key sequence F1 F2 F3 indicates you press and release F 1 then
46. eseqeieq it Consists Displays Stores Stores of 25 5 20 remaining rows rows rows 5 rows In this example as the operator scrolls through the result table the rows of the result table flow into the internal buffer to be stored in memory Because in this case the result table consists of 25 rows and the internal buffer can store only 20 rows when the internal buffer is full the excess rows in the internal buffer flow into the external buffer to be stored on disk FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 67 DATABASE BROWSER TASK DEFINITION Use of Logical Expressions USE OF LOGICAL EXPRESSIONS You use logical expressions to specify the data in a relational database to view or modify For the purposes of Browser a logical expression is a command containing a standard Structured Query Language SQL WHERE clause To make a logical expression flexible at run time use the name of an element whose value is a WHERE clause If viewing all data from a column in a relational database table you do not need to specify a logical expression You must know how to write a standard SQL statement to configure Browser See any SQL guide such as Quick Reference Guideto SQL and or the user manual for the relational database in use for information about writing SQL statements To select data from a database table a logical expression works in conjunction with the table s column name and logical operators to form an SQL WHERE clause The WHERE c
47. export FLAPP where flapp dir is the full path of the directory containing the application F or example FLAPP usr newapp export FLAPP 2 Enter the following command at the system prompt to open the Configuration M anager flcm 214 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Display CONFIGURATION MANAGER DISPLAY When you open the Configuration Manager the following screen is displayed ULL La m Mi Menu Bar Aphis Wee pisa Hek r Bian Meee Gophice Sealing and Ester Domaio USER Domain e Tues Selection Pra Main Menu deren Toumier Lagg Aarm erna Seng ond Logic Miah lagie Triggers Math arri Logit recedes _ This screen has three major components Menu bar The menu bar provides access to a group of tools you can use to manipulate or review application data Main Menu The Main Menu provides access to configuration tables for each FactoryLink module installed on your system double click the name to choose a module Refer to FactoryLink Modules on page 29 for a list of possible modules Domain selection The domain selection menu controls which domain you are opening when you choose a module from the Main Menu This ca
48. flfm_remote_file USER MESSAGE FLFM remote file name flfm remote mess USER MESSAGE FLFM remote command message flfm remote stat USER ANALOG FLFM remote command status value flfm rtext USER MESSAGE FLFM remote command output text flfm_rtype USER DIGITAL FLFM remote TY PE command trigger flfm_text USER MESSAGE File Manager text array for D T typel USER DIGITAL File manager type trigger flfm type USER ANALOG FLFM remote TYPE scroll value type scrl1 USER ANALOG File manager type scroll tag float change USER ANALOG Float screen value change request value float value USER FLOAT Float screen test value help file USER MESSAGE FLFM help file name help scroll USER ANALOG FLFM help screen scroll tag help text USER MESSAGE FLFM help file type text tags help_trig USER ANALOG FLFM help file type command trigger help_wanted USER DIGITAL Help wanted for the current screen trigger hist_spc SHARED MAILBOX SPC tohistorian mailbox histmbx SHARED MAILBOX Historian mailbox for logging trend info iml call SHARED DIGITAL IML procedure call test trigger iml const SHARED DIGITAL IML constant trigger iml ctrl trig SHARED DIGITAL I ml control procedure trigger FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 373 e o O mp lt o FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 1 Tagname Domain Type Description iml
49. on page 207 for more details If using PowerNet use the model 32 characters less 7 characters 25 characters If using Scaling and Deadbanding use the model 32 characters less 7 characters less 9 characters Refer to the Application Editor Guide for details on the added extensions e Valid characters are A Z 0 9 e Donot start with a number No embedded spaces System Added Extensions When defining tag attributes in the Tag Definition dialog new tags are created automatically from the originally defined tag name if you are using PowerNet or Scaling and Deadbanding PowerNet When a new tag is created an extension of up to 6 characters plus a dot 7 characters maximum is added These additional characters reduce the maximum length of the original tag name therefore the maxi mum effective length of the original tag name is 32 less 7 or 25 If theoriginal tag name plus extension exceeds 32 characters a warning is issued Scaling and Deadbanding When a new tag is created an extension of up to 8 characters plus a colon 9 characters maximum is added These additional characters reduce the maximum length of the original tag name therefore the maxi mum effective length of the original tag name is 32 less 7 less 9 or 16 If you not sure if you will be using PowerNet or Scaling and Deadbanding you may choose to define tag names using only 16 characters Also remember if shortening tag names do not reduce the
50. opens help for the 1 command If you do not specify cmd help is provided for all commands 336 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Using Run Time Monitor Commands Reading an Element You can use several commands to read an element These include Reading a Single Element Use the r command to display the value for a single element The syntax is r tag where tag identifies the element you want to read This can either be the element name or element number The element number is displayed in output when you read the element Output is displayed on the screen unless you redirect it toa file using the command For example enter the following command to read the contents of analog element TEST r TEST This generates the following output a 1 103 4108 x100C where is the data type of tag In this case the data type is analog 1 isthe segment where tag is located in memory 103 isthe number assigned to tag This number can be used in command syntax in place of the tag name 4108 isthe decimal representation of the tag s value x100c isthehexadecimal representation of the tag s value 108 Reading One or More Elements Use the d command to display the values for multiple elements of array tag with a single command The syntax is o 9m d tag count 5 a where 3 tag identifies the element to start with This can either be the element name or element number The e
51. y E 56 as 5 o im FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 217 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Structured Configuration Panels There are two ways to update information entered on this panel to the configuration table Press the ENTER key on the keyboard All line entries are updated to the configuration table Press the TAB key at the end of each line rather than ENTER if you want to fill out the entire table before adding the data to the configuration table Choose the Enter command button All line entries are updated to the configuration table Command buttons Buttons that execute commands when you choose them Cancel Cancels any data entered that has not already been updated to the configuration table E nter U pdates the configuration table with any data entered sincethe last update Exit Returns you tothe Main Menu If you have not saved changes FactoryLink asks you if you want to save or discard Next Displays the next panel in a sequence of panels If the current panel displayed is the last panel in the sequence the first panel is displayed Prev Displays the previous panel in a sequence of panels If the current panel displayed is the first panel in the sequence the last panel is displayed 218 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Scrolling a Window or Panel SCROLLING A WINDOW OR PANEL If a window or panel contains
52. 0 Fundamentals 25 OVERVIEW Reading Data from the Real time Database READING DATA FROM THE REAL TIME DATABASE A task gets the value of an element in the Real Time Database using a read operation Once the task has this value it can perform functions on it such as displaying on a graphical user interface transmitting to an external device or sending it toa relational database for archiving Read operations can be triggered by an event such as when a product passes an electronic eye or can occur only if the data element changes A read operation that occurs only when the data changes is referred to as exception processing Because large blocks of data can be transferred between tasks and because only the changed values are processed exception processing significantly optimizes performance Exception processing is possible because of the structure of the F actoryLink Real Time Database elements A Real Time Database element consists of a number of bits one or more of which contain the element s value Thirty one of these bits are reserved to function as change status flags Each FactoryLink task is assigned one of these bits which it uses to determine the element s change status The change status flag is either set to 1 ON or O OFF One 1 indicates to the task the value of the element has changed sincethe last time the task read the element Zero 0 indicates to the task the value of the element has not changed When an elem
53. 106 3 FactoryLink Processes of Processes of Processes for FactoryLink IV Task for the USER the SHARED Domain Domain Run Time M onitor 1 NA Report Generator NA 1 Batch Recipe NA 1 Local Area Networking NA FLLANRCV 1 FLLANSND 1 External Device Interface NA 1 1 per protocol module Unless you are using INGRES SYBASE or dBASE only one process is used If you are using ORACLE one of the processes counts as an ORACLE user license NA indicates the USER or SHARED F actoryLink task does not need a process FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 291 106 o 5 o lt o e 3 USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Calculating the Number of FactoryLink Processes 292 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 107 Using Run Time Manager Run Time Manager is the user interface to the run time environment You run the application using the Run Time Manager which allows you to start monitor and stop individual FactoryLink tasks This chapter describes how to open and use the Run Time M anager SETTING UP PROGRAM ARGUMENTS Tuning Kernel Memory 107 FactoryLink mailbox messages enable tasks to communicate between themselves via a queue as opposed to the standard FactoryLink single value change notification system The queue removes the chance of the receiving task missing data should changes occur rapidly Since all writes to a mailbox are stored in the kernel until read however k
54. 127 3 Sleep Calls Sleep Time FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 331 USING RUN TIME MONITOR Monitoring FactoryLink Processes The following information is provided about each FactoryLink task Task FL Name Active TTF Calls Read Calls Write Calls Lock Calls Sleep Calls PID Terminate Waits Elem Read Elem Written Lock Time Sleep Time Number and descriptive name of a FactoryLink task Short name used to reference the FactoryLink task Indicator of whether or not the specified task is active Number of times the task has checked its terminate flag since startup The terminate flag is a bit in the kernel The task reads the value of its terminate flag periodically to determine whether it should shut down or keep running If the terminate flag is set to 1 ON the FactoryLink task sets its start trigger to 0 OFF When the start trigger is set to 0 OFF the Run Time Manager shuts the task down Each task has its own terminate flag and start trigger Number of read operations the task has performed since startup Number of write operations the task has performed since startup Number of times the task has locked the real time database since startup When a task reads from or writes to the real time database it locks all other tasks out of the database When the task has completed its operations it unlocks the real time database so another task can open it Number of times the task has slept while wa
55. 239776 277978 Digitale zi Hb Wigan n Lick Hd Wat Locked Aether Bleep Wait Lock Bie Hemd o 3 se JJ oF 3 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 343 USING RUN TIME MONITOR Monitoring the Status of the Real Time Database The following information is displayed in the window Segments Number of segments in use the real time database A segment is a finite block of space in the real time database that contains elements of one data type Elements for each data type are stored in separate segments When a segment is full the next time you define an element of that data type the real time database creates a new segment to contain the element Digitals Total number of digital elements defined Floats Total number of floating point elements defined Message Total number of message elements defined Lock Id Indicator of whether or not the real time database is locked and if so which task has locked it When a task wakes up to read from or write to the real time database it locks all other tasks out of the database When the task has completed its operations it unlocks the real time database so another task can access it Each task has its own lock ID number If the real time database is locked this field displays the lock ID number of thetask that locked it If the real time database is not locked this field displays either 1 or 65 535
56. 30 Modules for Logging and Retrieving Data 30 Modules for Communicating Across the Network 30 TWO DOMAINS kde rn bd Shaded we Sean 31 Domain Structure eens 32 Domains for Run time TaskS 33 Multiple user Environments 34 Multiple Shared 5 34 Multiple Separate Applications 34 FactoryLink Directory Organization 35 FactoryLink Application Directory Subdirecories 35 FactoryLink Application Directory 36 FactoryLink System Directory Subdirectories 36 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 3 Table of Contents Fundamentals Environment Variables 38 Using Format 5 5 39 2 Alarm Logging Task 43 Alarm Logging Methodology 44 Establishing the Alarm Criteria 45 Alarm States evista eva Sees ae S eee ars eet Be UE Me 49 Alar Grou pinGi ola a Re ia EG 50 Parent Child Relationship 51 Child Alarm
57. 4 Change its properties by a Clicking File gt Properties b Clicking in the command line Pressing the End key to get to the end of the command line d Adding w to the end of the command line preceded by a space 5 Click File gt Rename and change the icon label to Warm Start FactoryLink Press the Enter key Create a new Run Time Manager icon following the steps below 1 Right click once on the Run Time Manager icon to select it 2 Click Copy a Enter Warm Start for the icon new name b Click Copy 3 Right click once on the Warm Start icon to select it 4 Click Settings Optional Parameters type w 5 Close window Edit the command line as flrun w d nshared ret or add the w to the script file using the syntax above 146 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals PERSISTENCE TASK DEFINITION Resolving Configuration Changes The FLRUN command executes the RESOLVE program before starting the Run Time Manager to check the persistence save file for any configuration changes you made The need to check for configuration changes is discussed in Resolving Configuration Changes on page 147 RESOLVING CONFIGURATION CHANGES After you shut down a FactoryLink application you might reconfigure part of the application using the Main Menu or the Application Editor This means the elements and their values stored in the persistence save file either may not exist or might not have the same data ty
58. 82 H help Configuration Manager 243 Run Time Monitor 336 AB CD EF GHI JK LM N OP QRS TUVWXYZ hide alarms 55 Global Hide tag 55 Group Hide tags 55 Individual Hide tags 56 Hide tags 55 56 Histogram 443 Historian methodology 115 overview 27 115 supported relational databases 116 historical trending 191 197 horizontal scroll bar 220 icon 444 IML 135 importing an application 223 indexing for trending event charts 81 grouped data 82 time based charts 81 Individual Hide tags 56 initialize 444 input object 444 inserting blank line 240 Instability of a process 444 integer constant 444 integer order 79 interpreted mode 135 K K 445 KEYINST 409 L LAN 445 LCL Lower Control Limit 445 licensed options 411 links DDE Windows 103 Local Area Network LAN 446 local area networking seeFLLAN 117 local station default values ACK 127 BUFSIZE 127 CALL 125 INIT 125 MAXLEN 126 MAXSESS 127 RX Receive Timeout 124 SD Send Delay 128 ST Send Timeout 128 TX Transmit Timeout 124 local stations 121 124 log 446 logbook 60 Logger logging methods 86 overview 27 logging alarms 58 Logging Data 95 Logging Data Dynamically 96 Logging Method change in a trigger tag 94 change in the tag 94 fixed time interval 94 Logging M ethods 94 logical expressions 68 logical operator 446 Index 1 465 A B C D EF GHI JK LM N OP QRS TUVWXYZ LOGTIME 93 long analog 446 LONGANA 446 LSL Lower Specification Limit 445 M
59. ASCII and sends it to the specified disk file Or choose Cancel to return tothe Configuration Manager without generating a report 5 View or print the report using any text editor The report has a title page a table of contents and a section for each task configured in your application A portion of a sample report is shown below The sample shows the information provided for each task System Configuration Information Domain Name SHARED Flags FSR Task Name RUNMGR Description Run Time Manager Start Trigger TASKSTART_5 0 Task Status TASKSTATUS S 0 Task Message TASKMESSAGE S 0 Display Status TASEKDSTATUS S 0 Display Name TASENAME 5 0 Display Description TASKDESC S 0 Start Order 0 Priority 201 Executable File bin runmgr Application Directory Program Directory Program Arquments 105 y Buisn 3 o 3 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 247 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages CONFIGURATION MANAGER MESSAGES If errors occur while you are configuring a table the Configuration Manager Main Menu error messages are displayed on the screen This section lists these messages describes their cause and provides suggested actions AC file doesn t exist for domain file Cause TheFLINK AC DOMAIN AC does not exist or cannot be opened If it does not exist FactoryLink installation may have not completed normally If the f
60. Configuring Program Arguments CONFIGURING PROGRAM ARGUMENTS You can configure the following system configuration program arguments to affect Database Logging functions E or e This program switch causes Database Logging to set the completion trigger when the Historian task processes the logging operation By default the completion is set when Database Logging sends the request to the Historian mailbox With this switch the completion trigger for all log operations means the Historian task has processed the logging transaction Setting the completion trigger does not guarantee the log transaction is successful it only means the log transaction has completed L or 1 This program switch enables error logging to the log file By default Database Logging does not log errors Q or q This program switch sets the maximum number of outstanding 100 2000 asynchronous logging transactions the Historian task has not completed Once this limit is reached Database Logging operates synchronously until the number of uncompleted logging transactions is reduced By default Database L ogging allows for 100 outstanding logging transactions before operating in a synchronous mode SIHHE or siHHE This program switch sets the maximum number of SQL statements Database Logging has active at one time The default is 30 Valid values are one to whatever the database server the Historian is connected to allows W or w 5 300 This program switch sets
61. DEFINITION Alarm Persistence Individual Hide Tags In some systems individual alarms may need to be hidden to silence an alarm because of a malfunctioning sensor When the sensor is repaired the alarm needs to be monitored again Remote Groups Noalarm hiding is done on alarms received from remote groups Alarms should be hidden at the server node If you do not want to see the alarms create a filter so the alarms do not show Locally Redefined Unique Alarm IDs For networked systems if a local Unique Alarm ID definition is created and it matches a remote Unique alarm I D the masking functions as if the alarm is a local alarm This applies to global group and local alarms ALARM PERSISTENCE Alarm persistence stores the current information about the state of active alarms with the logbook information and the child alarms at user defined intervals At startup the information is read preserving important information such as initial time acknowledgment and logbook information Activating Alarm Persistence Alarm persistence is activated by placing a w on the program arguments field of Distributed Alarm Logger task linein the SHARED domain This causes the system to save the alarm logger information to the files FLAPP FLNAME shared al_log prs FLAPP FLNAME shared al_log bak If the prs fileis not readable at startup the bak file is read Theal log prs file is updated at thetimethe Distributed Alarm Logg
62. Delay tttm RR we UR 52 Child Recovery Dday 53 Hide Alarms esee Boor ots Sabie ted eee bee GER ME GS a 55 Global Hide Tag ooreen ee aca he EE Big Gia ead 55 Group lt 55 Individual HideTags 56 RemoteGroups 56 Locally Redefined UniqueAlarm 105 56 Alarm lt lt 56 Activating Alarm Persistence 56 Alarm Distribution s xcvi xeu ex DI Rea o eee has A eee en oe eed 57 Alarmi z ud ade Sted edt e rr Be ee x sapie edi eA 58 Logbook sot dae tate ela Suwa 60 3 Batch RecipeTask Definition 61 Principles of 62 Creating and Animating a Graphics Display 64 4 Database Browser Task Definition 65 Principles of 66 Use of Logical 510 5 68 Configuring Program Arguments 71 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 4 Fundamentals Database Logging Task Definition 73 Database L
63. EEG ECE eee ee 408 KEVINSE eee n 409 flkeyval sisine eee seed mE P mn wae SRG ee 409 FESHM 2 at pat ee Sak ea SE AAS Lees 410 UKEY Pee ge Rx Pee Sed t RM eed 411 Utility Messages coL ie eed Sia Fee CE a 412 EXPLODE eie ta A ie 414 oso emen ee s a E wa ws 415 FEEREST OUR ne tn men a 416 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 1 Table of Contents Fundamentals 28 F actocyb Imi ET ay uo s tee 419 Defining Tags eseina aa 420 Tag Naming Guidelines 421 System Added 510 5 421 Developer Defined Tag Element Maximum 422 I O Element Maximum 422 Configuration lt 424 FactoryLink Lite Error Messages 426 29 S oc r ar aA 429 By eee III 459 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 14 Preface PURPOSE FactoryLink Fundamentals presents basic concepts necessary to understand how FactoryLink works This guideis prepared to present the technical information programmers of
64. Enter ther Eng 2 ten 3 Enter the name of the fileto receive the tags 4 Choose Cancel from the dialog to dose it when you have completed saving all watch lists Enter tag name FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 327 108 w L uny USING RUN TIME MONITOR Viewing the Current Value of Elements Retrieving Watch List Perform the following steps to retrieve the elements in a watch list saved with the Save TAGS or Save Data option 1 Choose one of the following options from the watch list Options pulldown menu Load TAGS Retrieves the tag names of elements saved in a file using the Save TAGS option and writes them to the watch list The values of these elements display as they currently exist in the real time database Load Data Retrieves the tag names of elements saved in a file using the Save Data option and writes them to the watch list The values of these elements display as they existed in the real time database when the save was made f you choose Load TAGS the following dialog is displayed requesting the name of the file containing the watch list elements If you choose Load Data a similar dialog is displayed requesting the data filename Ender fie Ing same e x Cancel Enter tag name 2 Enter the name of the file containing the tags you want to retrieve 3 Choose Cancel from the dialog to close it
65. Event and Interval Timer Task Definition 109 Principles of Operations ive xXx Drev Y SIX Ys 110 Changing the Operating System Date Time 112 9 FileManager Task Definition 113 10 Historian Task Definition 115 Historian Methodology 115 Supported Rdational Databases 116 11 Local Area Networking Task Definition 117 FLLAN Methodology 0 0 cece RR rn 118 Sending and Receiving Data 119 Sending Values to Remote 5 lt 119 Receiving Values from Remote Stations 120 Local and Remote Stations 121 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 6 Fundamentals Network GEOUpS sd debct eee GE eee 122 Using Multiple Platforms on a Network 122 Supported Protocols 0 0 ees 122 Supported Network Operating Systems 122 Monitoring the Network 123 Local Station s Default Values 124 TX Transmit Timeout uuum em ec X dW awh 124 RX Receive 124 125 e 125
66. F actoryLink real time database can display and modify spreadsheet data word processing files and other Windows application data The DDE Server also allows client applications to request modify advise and receive notification of updates to elements in the F actoryLink real time database DDE Client Although the DDE Server is the preferred method for communicating with external DDE applications you can also use DDE Client to configure bidirectional communication between the real time database and one or more Windows DDE servers You can configure a single F actoryLink system for multiple external DDE servers simultaneously You setup the FactoryLink DDE Client in the Configuration Manager Main Menu and initiate communication from a FactoryLink application DDE CONVERSATIONS DDE data exchanges occur via DDE conversations These DDE conversations consist of a DDE server and a DDE dient DDE servers supply information for dient applications thus the FactoryLink DDE Server acts as an information source for client applications such as E xcel and Lotus Client applications control the DDE conversation and initiate all data requests You can set up DDE links in external client applications to retrieve data from the real time database via the FactoryLink DDE Server Also a FactoryLink application can usethe FactoryLink DDE Client task set up through the Main Menu to initiate communication and retrieve data from external servers
67. FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by F actoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for actoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardware is compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur Couldn t start text editor Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware Setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up torun FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by F actoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for F actoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardware is compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur Database error Cause CDB or CDX fileis corrupt Action Run the utility DBCHK to locate and repair corrupt CDB and CDX files For information about DBCHK see Chapter 109 FactoryLink Utilities in this manual 258 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages Cause The operating system third party software or hardware setup o
68. FactoryLink Configuration Guide for more information on determining a unique element The dient must include the following string in its DDE message to obtain information from the F actoryL ink real time database FLNAME FLUSER RTDB tag name Note If you are creating an application in a language other than E nglish check your country s system settings to verify the number format is set up properly In addition the DDE Item name can be country dependent For example the English version of a DDE Item name called R1C1 becomes Z1S1 in German te 2 lt 5 23 Jg Os m 2 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 103 DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE DDE TASK DEFINITION Establishing a DDE Link Using a DDE Formula Although DDE is implemented in different ways the actual DDE commands are very similar The following example is specific to Microsoft Excel however the basic concepts can be applied to any product that supports DDE 1 Open a spreadsheet in Excel 2 Highlight the destination area It must match the size and shape of the source information 3 Type an equal sign A Type the source application name Usethe values of the FactoryLink environmental variables FLNAME FLUSER separated by a period delimiter Type a vertical bar Type the source topic name RTDB Type an exclamation point on Oo GC Type the address of the source information which is any standard FactoryLink tag name enclos
69. FactoryLink ECS Languages x Switch to French francais Switch to English Switch to German Deutsch Specify the language you want and click on OK A confirmation box displays if the language has been set to your selection If you are using multiple languages in development be aware that language specific characters will not translate after performing a language switch For example a change in the security password in one language will not work in another if you are using language specific characters accent mark If it is necessary to have unique national characters working enter the 1252 code page compatible ASCII code via the ALT keyboard numbers FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 395 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLTEST and FLDEMO FLTEST AND FLDEMO After installing F actoryLink the test and demo applications FLTEST and FLDEMO totest the F actoryLink installation e FLTEST is a test application for testing the installation of FactoryLink It also provides examples of common tasks e FLDEMO provides you with application development ideas You can watch its execution by starting the FactoryLink Run Time Manager only if restored FLAPP is set This section describes how to restore the FLTEST or FLDEMO application on each operating system supported by F actoryLink The process varies for each operating system On Windows NT and Windows 95 Operating Systems Perform the following steps to restore FLTEST or FLDEMO
70. FactoryLink LAN FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 57 ALARM LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Alarm Logging Figure 84 9 UNIQUE ALARM ID 1234 UNIQUE ALARM ID 1234 TAG tank _level TAG lt blank gt AL_LOG AL_LOG Node 43 Node 176 FLLAN The MAXLEN parameters in the LAN Local Names panel must be configured Set the MAXLEN parameter on all nodes to a value of 64000 Refer to Communications of the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for details on how to enter this information ALARM LOGGING If you want to preserve the time of alarm alarm data the operator or node that acknowledged the alarm and logbook entries for historical purposes you can configure Distributed Alarm Logging to read data from Distributed Alarm Logging s own elements in the real time database and send the data to a disk based relational database or to a text file Data logged to a relational database is then available for browsing through the F actoryLink Browser If a remote group has logging turned but no database information is defined on the client node the information is not logged and no error occurs If a remote node shuts down and restarts or reconnects after a communication failure and the same alarm is still active the logger tries to insert the alarm into the database twice generating a Duplicate Entry error 58 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals ALARM LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Alarm Logging Distributed Alarm Logging logs data t
71. Fundamentals 167 REPORT GENERATOR TASK DEFINITION Reporting Methodology REPORTING METHODOLOGY This section describes and illustrates how memory resident real time data is logged to a report file for generating a report This task completes the following steps to generate a report 1 The real time database receives and stores data from various sources such as a remote device user input or computation results from a FactoryLink task When data is collected and stored in this database other tasks can access and manipulate it 2 When a report is triggered Report Generator reads the values of real time database elements included on the report and maps them to object names Object names are used in defining the report format or template file 3 Report Generator checks the report format file to determine placement of text and objects in the report file The format file contains keywords that trigger when the report starts ends and writes data Each keyword represents a section When the trigger executes the associated section of the format file is processed and written to a temporary working file 4 Report Generator uses the information in the report format file to create temporary disk based working file This working file is a temporary file that remains open until the report completes and exists only until the report is completed The temporary file resides on disk not in memory to protect against loss of data For exa
72. LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Grouping Data One of the following specifies the group associated with a data row groupname where groupname Isa unique alphanumeric name you assign that does not typically change For example if you want to group data by company where location which does not typically change you group data by groupname S e groupname subgroupnum lt groupname sauniquealphanumeric you assign subgroupnum is number Database Logging assigns subgroupnum is a suffix of groupname preceded by an underscore as in Shift_1 Database Logging creates new subgroups during run time based on a defined cycle Use this method if you want to subgroup data by group For example if you want to group data by company location and employment year use groupname subgroupnum to group data G Location Lastname Firstname Start_date e o o rm o Q 2 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 77 DATABASE LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Grouping Data e subgroupnum where subgroupnum 15 a number Database Logging assigns Logging creates new subgroups during run time based on a cyde you define Usethis method if you want group assignments to periodically increment by number F or example if you want to group data by employment year you can group data by subgroup number Group Location Lastname Firstname Start_date column 3 Subgroups without an associate
73. Monitoring the Status of the Real Time Database 343 Terminating All FactoryLink Tasks 346 Exitirig RTMON leet Ie nere QUE UR nd Ae 347 Run time Manager Messages 348 Text Messages aoa a a ae a a 348 Messages with Error Numbers 354 Correcting Internal Errors 360 Factory nk e Cs oes aste rotos a GaC ts S 361 E dau u n A t dA AE 362 EERESET set uet tene ehe gas hear v S etw i tede ox ete fete an 392 EESETENG vsu xe dey a PEN A pated Wes d E 395 FLTEST FLDEMO sssssee e enn 396 On Windows NT and Windows 95 Operating Systems 396 On OS 2 Operating Systems 398 On UNIX Operating Systems 400 Restoring FLDEMO 400 Restoring FETESTI aes 400 Module lt 401 FECONVM uu tt Sch BA Gh acon hale de em UR enw a e ce eee d 402 EDSAVE euet PR RN hae Wy Ka re aM gate ENE 403 CIGEN ater ered b ee PNEU LA 406 ed eR E cR E AES ae ER RASEN S 406 CREST ELE 406 DB GK ers aatis Rate re Sonn Wass dei er n 407 EXPLODE Perea Ux RE RA
74. Open Contents of C WINNT Profiles All Users Start Menu Programs FactoryLink ECS Edit aj RRRRERRAMEEBRMESEESTURESTOEOOUENTA Print he Application Editor 1KB Shor 8 7 97 2 2 Add to Zip r Convert Application 1KB Shor 8 7 97 2 2 a DXF Translation 1KB Shor 8 7 97 2 2 107 e EF FactoryLink Configura 1KB Shor 9 4 97 4 0 New _ estator 8E FactoryLink Install 1 Shor 9 3 97 2 4 BD New Application 1 Shor 8 7 97 2 2 Delete Start Menu 2 Restore Application 1KB Shor 8 7 97 2 2 a Rename 38 Programs MP Save Application 1KB Shor 8 7 97 2 2 Properties Accessoies Ba Security Tool 1KB Shor 8 7 97 2 2 mme Administrative Tools 1 Shor 8 7 97 2 2 J Close S Adobe S Adobe Acrobat 5 Documents de base 3 FactoryLink ECS M gt 4 Creates shortcuts to the selected items A copy of FactoryLink 6 5 0 displays in the Name list 4 Drag this copy tothe Desktop Manager 5 Right click on the new shortcut icon and select Properties from the pop up menu FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 297 e USING RUN TIME MANAGER Setting Command Line Options 6 Select the Shortcut tab to display the property sheet 7 Add the desired options at the end of the Target field 8 Click OK to close the property sheet A Start FactoryLink icon displays on the Desktop Manager You can now access the Run Time Manager by double cli
75. Print Spooler FileManager FileManager Timer nterpreted nterpreted Trending Math amp Logic Math amp Logic Batch Recipe Counter FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 401 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLCONV FLCONV After restoring a FactoryLink application on a new platform or a new FactoryLink version you must convert it using the FL CONV utility Once you convert the application it will not run with theold FactoryLink Do not abort the convert after it has started as this can corrupt the application Perform the following steps to convert an application 1 Back up the application using a platform specific F LSAVE if you have not already done so Refer to FLSAVE in this section for more information 2 Start the FLCONV utility A dialog is displayed containing the drive and path of the application to convert Verify the drive and path are correct 3 Choose one of the following OK Converts the application Cancel Cancels the conversion The application files are converted 402 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLSAVE FLSAVE Usethe FLSAVE utility to save F actoryLink application files FLSAVE overwrites existing files Never save to the root directory the FLINK directory or any other directory that contains working files The safest option is to have an independent directory for saves preferably on a separate disk or partition eo co FLSAVE saves FactoryLink applications by
76. Subgrouping 453 raw value tag 180 R Chart 451 read operations DDE Client Windows 106 reading element Run Time M onitor 337 real time database elements 329 real time 452 real time database 24 452 generating data 25 monitoring status 343 reading data 26 reading elements 329 viewing elements list 227 writing elements 329 Real Time Graphics 453 real time mode 197 real time only trending 190 reboot 452 Recipe 452 record rollover 83 relational operator 452 remote station communications receiving values 120 remote stations 121 remote TAG object reference 151 1 468 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Report Generator complete triggers 177 components of a format file 170 escape sequences 178 format specifiers 172 format variations 176 keywords 170 location of object names 172 methodology 168 overview 167 placement of reported data 172 sections of format file 170 trigger actions 173 reports Configuration Manager 246 resizing screen components 289 RESOLVE 145 147 restoring FLDEMO OS 2 398 FLDEMO Unix 400 FLDEMO Windows 396 FLTEST OS 2 398 FLTEST Unix 400 FLTEST Windows 396 result table 453 retrieving watch list 328 rollover record 83 subgroup 84 run time 453 run time environment 23 Run Time Graphics Windows 284 Run Time Manager accessing OS 2 299 accessing U nix 300 AB CD EF GHI accessing Windows 299 application controls 306 command line options 295 correcting internal errors 320 display
77. This switch is configured through the Configuration M anager in the System Configuration Information panel Without the m switch the system uses the existing defaults of 200 total segments 50 segments available to mailboxes and no per mailbox byte usage limit In addition to system wide limits a memory usage ceiling can be set per mailbox tag The message length field of the Object table currently supported for message tags can be set with a maximum memory usage for its associated mailbox tag This is specified in K bytes The per mailbox limit supersedes the system wide mailbox limit Once a mailbox tag ceiling is reached all subsequent writes to that tag are dropped A new error code FLE MBXLIM EXCEED is returned for this case The per mailbox K byte limit can also be set or obtained through the Programmer s Access Kit PAK task Additional Program Argument Options Other program argument options include e fl e b e d e t e l See the following table for details of these arguments 294 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MANAGER Setting Command Line Options SETTING COMMAND LINE OPTIONS There are several run time options you can use to control how the tasks running in Run Time Manager execute These options are listed in the following table Option Action Turns on debug mode Any errors encountered are logged to the log file If you specify this option you can use Ctrl c to shutdown Run Ti
78. Type Description DYNLOGFILEREAD SHARED DIGITAL Read trigger to load a data point save file for Data Point Logger DYNLOGFILEWRITE SHARED DIGITAL Write trigger to generate a Data Point Save File for Data Point Logger DYNLOGSTATUS SHARED ANALOG Dynamic Logging status tag for Data Point Logger FLAPP_S SHARED MESSAGE Application directory FLAPP_U USER MESSAGE Application directory FLDOMAIN_S SHARED MESSAGE Domain name FLDOMAIN_U USER MESSAGE Domain name FLINK S SHARED MESSAGE Directory for application programs FLINK U USER MESSAGE Directory for application programs FLLANSIG SHARED DIGITAL FLLANSND system interval trigger FLLANSNDMBX SHARED MAILBOX Mailbox for FLLANSND process FLNAME S SHARED MESSAGE Application name FLNAME U USER MESSAGE Application name FLOPERATOR S SHARED MESSAGE Application operator FLOPERATOR U USER MESSAGE Application operator FLSECEVENTUSER S SHARED MESSAGE User namefor application security event FLSECEVENTUSER U USER MESSAGE User name for application security event FLSECEVENT S SHARED MESSAGE Application security event FLSECEVENT U USER MESSAGE Application security event FLUSER S SHARED MESSAGE Application user FLUSER U USER MESSAGE Application user GENE EXCEPTION DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL General Electric exception write disable GENE_EXCEPTION_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL General Electric exception write trigger 382 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamental
79. a blank persistence save file for each domain the first time it is executed During its initialization the Persistence task loads the persistence save file to determine which elements in the application are persistent and when the values of those elements are to be saved It also loads the PERSIST CT file to get specific information about the configuration of the Persistence task itself When you perform a warm start the current domain s Run Time M anager restores the domain instance s real time database from the persistence save file It restores the values of the persistent elements to the last values saved by Persistence U D D D 5 Use the warm start argument w to perform warm start of FactoryLink In Windows and OS 2 add the w to the command line for the icon used to start FactoryLink in UNIX either pass the w tothe FLRUN command or add it to the linein the script file used to start FactoryLink FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 145 PERSISTENCE TASK DEFINITION Principles of Operation See the following table for details Table 96 1 Warm Starts Using W Starting FactoryLink using the w warm start Windows Create a new Start FactoryLink icon following the steps below 1 Click once on the Start FactoryLink icon to select it 2 Click Edit gt Copy 3 Click Edit gt Paste A copy of the Start FactoryLink icon is pasted into the FactoryLink Program Group It is labelled Copy of Start FactoryLink
80. a frequency distribution plotted by ranges of variables divided into equal intervals along with the number of observations accumulated in each o o f 5 lt Histogram Historian FactoryLink task that provides a common interface with one or more database managers FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 443 A DE F GH GLOSSARY icon Individual information message information panel input object input text fields instability of a process instance integer constant interval timer I JK LE MN OP QR STU VW X Y Z Graphical symbol representing a function that can be performed Type of real time and historical control chart found in FactoryLink SPC See X Bar EWMA Onscreen display of ASCII text or numeric codes that describe normal system status usually during system startup or shutdown that requires no user or operator action Also called status message See panel initialize Set up a system for use Graphically displayed input field created using the FactoryLink Application Editor See animation object input text field pushbuttons Area on a graphics display defined in the Application Editor to accept operator input in the form of text or numeric values See input object A process that exhibits variations larger than its control limits or a systematic pattern of variation A copy of a FactoryLink application that can be executed at run time The number of instances al
81. active panel 105 3 Choose the module you want to open This displays the panels comprising the configuration table for the selected module y JE 5 mc 5 o FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 225 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Tags WORKING WITH TAGS This section describes how to manipulate tags defined in the application Viewing the Number of Tags Defined 1 Choose Application from the Main Menu menu bar Al Configuration Manager leaf x Application View Utilities Exit Help F1 The following pulldown menu is displayed Open Ctil 0 Close Ctrl C Size 2 Choose Size to display information about the number of tags defined in the FactoryLink application The following screen is displayed Application Size Total Number of Tags Total configured tags 996 User defined tags 75 RTDB memory efficiency 100 Number of Tags 2 Defined by User Efficiency of Memory Used by the Real time Database 3 Choose to cancel this screen As the memory used by the real time database becomes less efficient the efficiency percentage drops indicating wasted space You can improve this by running the following command ctgen r c 226 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Tags Viewing a List of Real time Database Elements When a tag referencing a real time database eleme
82. amp Logic executes procedures containing logically grouped and organized statements that have a single continuous thread of execution or control flow between the decision points branches Typically you analyze the actions needed in the application and organize the operations needed for each action into one or more procedures At run time procedures can be either e Triggered in response to changes in the real time database e Executed directly from within another Math amp Logic procedure One or more procedures are contained within an editable plain text program file A program PRG file can contain several separate procedures that may call or refer to one another 132 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals MATH amp LOGIC TASK DEFINITION Creating Programs CREATING PROGRAMS You must create a program by configuring tables to use Math amp Logic Configuration Tables Use the Math amp Logic configuration tables to e Define variables used by a task e Identify the type of program either interpreted or compiled e Identify where the programs are stored e Identify when a program should be invoked The number of elements triggers and programs that can be defined is limited only by the amount of available memory operating system and or compiler in compiled mode only Refer to the documentation supplied for compiler information You must configure the following three tables to create a program e Math and Logic Var
83. an alarm Distributed Alarm Logging removes it from the active alarm list and the Alarm Viewer clears 6 If the alarms are being logged to a relational database Distributed Alarm Logging sends the alarm data to the relational database via a Historian 44 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals ALARM LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Establishing the Alarm Criteria ESTABLISHING THE ALARM CRITERIA The criteria you establish for an alarm generates an alarm message on the Alarm Viewer screen for the FactoryLink operator An example of this is the alarming of the pressure in a fuel tank A safe pressure is established as a reading of 0 1000 If the pressure exceeds 900 a HI alarm flags you of the pending danger The situation may be critical if the pressure exceeds 950 which would generate a alarm addition you may wish to configure the system so you can prevent the pressure from ever reaching 900 by setting an alarm for 2850 all three cases the condition for the tag is greater than but each alarm is differentiated from the other As the pressure changes the display is updated to reflect the new readings and messages When the pressure drops to 800 the danger passes and the alarms are no longer active Three components that the data element value must be checked against establish this alarm Limit Thelimit is the valuethe condition is checked on The example establishes the limit as 900 e Condition The condition is
84. an element s change status flags are set 105 to 1 ON or 0 OFF during a warm start This column is blank if NONE is present in the Persistence field You can modify the entry in this field 3 Choose Exit to exit this panel y Buisn 56 RIE 5 m FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 237 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Viewing Miscellaneous Information Viewing the Current Version of FactoryLink 1 Choose Help from the main menu bar or configuration panel menu bar Configuration Manager lel x Application View Utilities Exit Help F1 The following pulldown menu is displayed Menu Bar Functions About 2 Choose About to display the current version of FactoryLink The following screen is displayed Fecha iniit Interna Feekegrae 5 ai indes KT C 1964 1595 Urined Exates Data Cerparatus Righe Flesererd a 3 Choose Enter to cancel this screen 238 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Viewing Miscellaneous Information Viewing Field Choices When you are filling out a field on the configuration panel that has a predetermined set of valid entries you can view those entries using the following procedure 1 Position the cursor in a configuration panel field that has a predefined set of valid entries 2 Choose View from the Configuration Manager menu bar Hj Configuration Manager a x Application View
85. and follow the instructions for registration Write error on log file filename Cause Thedisk may be full Action Delete unnecessary files w L uny FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 353 USING RUN TIME MONITOR Run time Manager Messages Messages with Error Numbers Two Run time Manager error messages display error numbers within the message Can t create appl filename error error number Run time Manager errno error number The error numbers in these messages are generated by the F actoryLink real time database E ach error number has a corresponding error keyword Even though this keyword is not displayed in the error message knowing the error keyword helps Customer Support engineers identify the cause of the problem 1 FLE INTERNAL Cause Internal Error Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section 2FLE OUT OF MEMORY Cause Thereis not enough RAM available Action Add RAM tothe system 4 FLE NO FLINK INIT Cause Thereal time database has not been created or cannot finish initializing Action Shut down FactoryLink and restart it 5 FLE NO PROC INIT Cause of the following conditions caused this error The task name of the specified task has not been entered in the System Configuration Table Action Perform the corresponding action Enter the task the Task Name field of the System Configuration Table Cause Thetask is alre
86. and organization by category Examples of data categories are factory location and data collection times The following figure illustrates relational database o organization using the category employee start date 9 Field S ov Lastname Firstname Start_date Charlie 12 14 93 Record Rows Susan 11 6 95 Record J immy 2 14 95 Record SS Columns Figure 102 1 Relational Database Organization FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 183 SCHEMA TASK DEFINITION The data in a single row is related Each entry in the row forms a single record The example table contains three records The data in a table column represents a record field For example the example table has three fields e One contains employee last name Lastname One contains employee first name Firstname e contains employee start date Start date Thefields in a databasetable and their attributes such as data types and field lengths define its structure Relational databases contain one or moretables Each tablein dBASE IV equates toa file and each table or file has a unique name Each unique table structure used to log data is assigned a name in the Schema Control panel for Database Logging The columns and attributes in each table are specified in the Schema Information panel for each schema Create a table index if you want to retrieve the records in an order other than the order they were added to the table Specify the desired column na
87. any TCP IP package that is WINSOCK compliant WINSOCK provides a unified front end to 93 protocols Refer to the TCP IP vendor s documentation for details Table 93 2 FactoryLink for Windows NT or Windows 95 Network Products Network Protocol NOS Product TCP IP The TCP IP provided with the Windows NT operating system software This is WINSOCK compliant Table 93 3 FactoryLink for UNIX Network Products lt lt Network Protocol NOS Product TCP IP Any TCP IP made by the same manufacturer as the UNIX operating system software MONITORING THE NETWORK You can monitor the status of remote stations on the network such as the number of transmissions the remote station sent and received and whether these transmissions were successful You can view the status at run time and other FactoryLink modules can use this information for other activities For example Math amp Logic and Alarm Supervisor can monitor these elements and trigger an alarm whenever a remote station disconnects You can monitor any FactoryLink station on the network running FLLAN HulyJOMJON aJy 2907 FactoryLink 6 5 0 6 5 0 123 LOCAL AREA NETWORKING TASK DEFINITION Local Station s Default Values LOCAL STATION S DEFAULT VALUES The local station name and the default values FLLAN uses to transmit data is stored in the local name file FLAPP net local on each F actoryLink station The following list includes
88. applied to a tag associated with scaling rather than a specific alpha numeric range deadbanding is specified by a percentage of a range rather than as an absolute value If the deadband variance for a scaled tag is specified as an absolute value then no deadbanding is applied to the associated raw tag 180 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals SCALING AND DEADBANDING TASK DEFINITION Defining Tags For this example assume the temperature of the liquid in a tank is being monitored The tank temperature probe records raw incoming data on a Celsius 101 scale The operators monitoring the temperature are more familiar with the Fahrenheit scale and wish to have the data displayed on that scale The temperature never falls below freezing or above the boiling point Oo DEFINING TAGS 5 lt Data stored in the real time database is an element Each element is assigned logical name called tag This tag is used to reference the element in the real time database Tag Names Logically represents an element in database Once an element is defined you can make unlimited references to this element Any FactoryLink task containing a reference to an element can read and write data to and from the element at run time During development F actoryLink stores tag names in the FLAPP directory in the object database table This information is updated to the CT files when the run time application is started Some tags are already def
89. child alarm delay e child recovery delay These delays specify the time allowed between the generation or clearing of a parent alarm and the activation of a child alarm as its own alarm Child Alarm Delay Some relationships are based on the assumption that when the parent alarm is generated the child is also generated Other relationships are based on the assumption that when the parent alarm is generated the child is only a result of that alarm if the child is generated within a specified amount of time If the child does not generate an alarm within this timeframe the parent child relationship is disregarded for this alarm invocation This timeframe is the child alarm delay If the alarm defined as a child generates an alarm after the allotted timeframe that alarm is displayed separate from the parent and is counted as an active alarm Each alarm parent and child has to return to normal to clear the alarm states When both havereturned to normal the parent child relationship is reestablished and at the next invocation of the parent the timer is started again for the child to display or not Figure 84 4 Child Alarm Delay Child Suppressed Parent Alarm Alarms Displayed parent 1 10 00 parent 1 Child Alarm Delay Child Alarm child 1 10 10 52 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals ALARM LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Parent Child Relationship Figure 84 5 Child Alarm Delay Child Not Suppressed
90. choosethis button you open the user domain Return to Choose this button to return to the application interface screen Application You must animate this button to dothis when you are configuring your application c o 5 2 JJ fc 5 zu 3 Note If you are running a demonstration system the words DEMO SYSTEM appear in thetitle bar of theRun TimeM anager console window A demo system shuts down after running for one hour To view the licensing options for your F actoryLink system usetheukey utility The demo system is option 89 refer to UKEY on page 411 for more information about ukey FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 307 USING RUN TIME MANAGER Run time Manager Messages RUN TIME MANAGER MESSAGES Error messages are displayed on the screen if errors occur while using Run time Manager This section lists these messages describes their cause and provides suggested actions Messages are described in two ways e Text message Refer to the Text Messages on page 308 for text messages e Error numbers Refer to the Messages with Error Numbers on page 314 for error number messages Text Messages Bad command number Cause An invalid command was written to the global element COMMAND Action Verify the external process compatibility with FactoryLink Bad file size for filename Cause TheFLAPP CT TYPE CT file has been damaged Action Deletethe file and re start the application to rebuild
91. contents of the screen without disrupting them message Data type of string or binary data having a total length of 64K supported by F actoryLink monochrome Type of monitor that displays information in only one color mouse cursor Small arrow or shape in the Application Editor representing selected option that indicates the point on the screen wherethe next keyboard input or mouse dick is displayed A pointing device moves the mouse cursor moving Sameas X Bar and range calculation except that a circular buffer average moving of Moving Sizeis used instead of Subgroup Size range moving A chart used in FactoryLink SPC having points which are average moving averages or ranges of previous data carried forward with the range chart current data Used to dampen the effects of a single reading when only one reading is made per time period or when a process is strongly linked to a previous data output See range X Bar NETBIOS Software standard used for local area networks or optional FactoryLink task used for communicating between F actoryLink Systems over a local area network network Group of terminals and one or more computers connected for moving information from place to place 9 o o lt node Station or general junction point on a Local Area Network LAN See Local Area Network node name Unique name for a node a specific Local Area Network LAN See Local Area Network FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamen
92. controls 307 screen 301 303 task controls 305 user interface screen 304 using 293 Run Time M ode 453 Run Time Monitor accessing 322 adding elements to watch list 325 correcting internal errors 360 deleting elements from a watch list 326 exiting 347 exiting commands window 336 finding elements in a watch list 326 help 336 monitoring real time database status 343 reading an element 337 retrieving watch list 328 storing watch list 327 terminating a task 336 terminating all FactoryLink tasks 346 using commands 335 viewing element current values 324 working with batch files 341 writing to an element 339 S Sample Statistics 453 Sample Size 453 Sampling 453 Sampling Variation 453 saving JK L MN OP QRS TUV WX YZ application FLSAVE 403 saving file contents 244 Scaling and Deadbanding overview 179 principles of operation 180 raw value tag 180 scaled value tag 180 Schema overview 27 schema assigning names 187 Schema Overview 183 searching tags 231 text string 242 select object 453 server application 151 server to client data transfer 155 Shared domain 32 shared numeric value tags 91 sharing information between applications 222 Sigma 454 Sigma Limits 454 Single Logging Request 96 single threaded task 139 solicited data 151 Stability of a process 454 Standard Deviation 454 start trigger 454 statement 454 storing watch list 327 string constant 455 structure of tag names 202 structured configuration
93. counter is a group of elements with components that work together to perform a count Each programmable counter is made up of some or all of the following elements and analog and digital values Elements e Enable triggers counting activity Up Clock initiates the count upward Down Clock initiates the count downward e Clear resets the counted value to the starting point e Positive Output contains the value 1 on when the counting limit has been reached Negative Output contains the value 0 off when the counting limit has been reached Current Value indicates the current value of the count Digital and Analog Values e Preset Value analog value that specifies the starting value e Increment Value analog value that specifies the amount by which the count is toincrease or decrease each time Terminal Value analog value that specifies the counting limit e AutoClear digital value that resets the count to the starting point whenever the terminal valueis reached Counting begins when another FactoryLink task such as Math amp Logic or EDI writes a 1 ON tothe Up Clock element This triggers the Programmable Counters task to move the Current Value toward the Terminal Value by the Increment Value If the Preset Valueisless than the Terminal Value the Increment is added to the Current Value If the Preset Valueis more than the Terminal Value the ncrement is subtracted from the Current Value 164 F
94. elements is made easier with RTMON While developing an application periodically run and monitor it using RTMON to ensure the application is functioning as you intended FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 321 108 fe USING RUN TIME MONITOR Accessing the Run Time Monitor ACCESSING THE RUN TIME MONITOR Perform the following steps to open RTMON Start up the FactoryLink application How you do this depends on your operating system platform Refer to Using Run Time Manager on page 293 for more details on this operation The following screen is displayed when you start the application Shared Task Last Message RUHMGR Running PERSIST V Timer Running IML AL Running 7 RPT Running ___ RECIPE LL COUNTER LL FLFM SERVER __ EDI ___ POWERHET ___ FLLANSHD LL FLLANRCY A uisT Running nBLoc Running LL SPCDATA _ stop Application flapp1 Qu Alarm Viewer Bl Next Page _B stop UserName shareusr User Processes Ej Return to Application FactoryLink Directory C FLH HT Application Directory 2 Choose User Processes from the Display Control area if want to monitor the user domain The best domain in which to run RTMON depends on the type of information you are monitoring Use the following guidelines to decide on the best domain f you are monitoring elements run RTMON in t
95. file has been reached The syntax is If no more files are specified for execution or if the command is executed from the keyboard the Commands window exits Executing a Batch File Once Usethe i command to execute a batch file if you want to execute the batch file only once Use the 1 command if you want to execute the same batch file multiple times The syntax is i filename where filename is the name of the batch file to execute For example enter the following command to take input from the file TESTOUT i TESTOUT Executing a Batch File Multiple Times Usethe command to execute the same batch file multiple times The syntax is 1 count filename where count isthe number of times to execute the file filename isthe name of the file to execute For example enter the following command to read the commands from the file TESTOUT five times 1 5 testout 342 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Monitoring the Status of the Real Time Database MONITORING THE STATUS OF THE REAL TIME DATABASE Perform the following steps to monitor the status of the real time database 1 Choose Options from the Run Time Monitor panel ptions H E El Poll Rate 1 000 The following pulldown menu is displayed Watch Process Tag Input Command Input Global Info Shutdown All Exit 2 Choose Global Info from the Options pulldown menu The Global Values window is displayed Segments a
96. file when the alarms are logged and are also distributed along the network if the alarms are being distributed The logbook allows you to add notes to the alarm to document why an alarm occurred how it was corrected or what is being done to correct it If the alarms are being distributed all operators on the network can add logbook entries to the alarm 60 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 85 Batch Recipe Task Definition TheFactoryLink Batch Recipe task transfers sets of predefined values sometimes called recipes between binary disk files and selected elements and between the real time database and an external device the real time database a batch recipe is a collection of elements grouped together for some purpose These elements can contain internally generated or operator entered values lt lt Perform the following steps to configure a typical Batch Recipe application 1 Create and animate a graphics display 2 Complete a Recipe Table 3 Complete the protocol module Read Write Table for that external device if you want operator input to change the settings in an external device 4 Reference the names of these elements in the Read Write Tablefor the FactoryLink task communicating with the external device if the task writes element values to registers in an external device This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure Batch Recipe operations Refer to Config
97. files 244 AB CD EF GHI merging files 244 multiple configuration tables 225 multiple development applications 221 overview 211 pasting a line entry 242 predefined elements 210 reporting 246 saving file contents 244 scrolling a window or panel 219 search for tags 231 searching for a text string 242 sharing information between applica tions 222 structured configuration panels 217 tags 201 text entry panels 216 using tags as triggers 210 viewing current FactoryLink version 238 viewing field choices 239 working with tags 226 configuration mode 436 configuration panels command buttons 218 editing 240 scrolling 219 structured panels 217 text entry panels 216 configuration tables definition 436 Math and Logic 133 multiple 225 configuring OLE 2 0 Automation Server 142 program arguments 199 System See System configuration 273 constant 436 JK L MN OP QRS TUV WX YZ Continuous Data 436 Control of process manufacturing 437 Control of process statistical 437 Control Limits 437 control statement 437 conversations DDE Windows 99 converting application FLCONV 402 Math and Logic versions 134 tagnames 406 copying line entry in configuration panel 241 correcting internal errors Run Time Manager 320 internal errors Run Time Monitor 360 Counters see Programmable Counters 164 CP 434 CPK 434 Create Link option DDE Windows 104 creating demo F LDE MO 396 Math and Logic programs 133 new application FL NEW 362 3
98. following system configuration program arguments to affect Database Browser functionality Lor I Enables logging of errors to the log file By default the Database Browser does not log errors Nor n Notifies on the completion of a SELECT trigger that the query resulted in an End of Fetch condition if the rows returned from the query do not equal the rows defined in the View Size By default the Database Browser task does not report an End of Fetch condition for a SELECT until a move operation advances the current row past the last row of the query S 4 160 or Sets the maximum number of SQL statements that the Database s 4 160 Browser has active at one time The default is 160 For very large applications this program switch may haveto be adjusted if the database server is unable to allocate a resource to open a new SQL cursor V1or v1 Writes the SQL statements generated by the Database Browser to the log file The Database Browser must have logging enabled for this program switch to work The default is to not write the SQL statements to the log file W 5 300 or Sets the maximum timeout in seconds for the Database Browser w 5 300 to wait for a response from the Historian task The default is 30 seconds For values less than 30 seconds this switch will only work correctly when the Historian initially achieved a successful connection with the database server If the Historian failed to successfully connect with the database
99. indicating the system is ready to accept a command protection device A button in Windows NT Windows 95 or OS 2 FactoryLink systems plugged into a button holder or one or more electronic block keys that are plugged into a key ring The button holder and key ring plug into the parallel port of the printer The protection devices contain information FactoryL ink uses to enable icensed software options protocol module An EDI architectural layer that insulates the EDI base module from the type of external device you are using and provides the flexibility to support many different types of external devices pushbuttons Input objects used with a pointing device or function key that performs an operation such as shutting down a task quality Particular aspect of a product that relates toits ability to perform characteristic its intended function R Chart A control chart of the range of variation among the individual elements of a sample or the difference between the largest and smallest elements as a function of time lot number or similar chronological variable 9 o o E lt FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 451 A DE F GH GLOSSARY range read call read complete read disable read priority read state read trigger real time real time database Real Time Database Debugger real time database element reboot Recipe record relational operator I JK LE MN OP QR STU VW X Y Z 1 The diff
100. keywords in the format file are ignored because no triggering event is specified The end event causes all information in the format file to be sent instantly to the printer The following figure illustrates this type of report Figure 100 5 Starting format file Triggering action Results in temporary working file Format file Recording end of shift stat BEGIN Recording end of shift stat 3t of parts 50 End triggered End text is written to report Report is sent to destination all done reporting REPEAT of parts no_parts END all done reporting Recording end of shift Se ee 176 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals REPORT GENERATOR TASK DEFINITION Complete Triggers COMPLETE TRIGGERS 100 FactoryLink returns a complete status for each of the triggered events once the operation has completed The operation is considered completed for begin and repeat sections when the information is written into the temporary file The operation is considered completed for the end section when the temporary file is sent to the specified device printer communication port or disk file The complete status allows you to effectively coordinate report generator operations with other FactoryLink tasks and to display the status tothe operator Typically the data reported on in the repeat section is generated from an external device EDI task In order to maintain data integrity it may b
101. length of the extensions 158 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals POWERNET TASK DEFINITION Tag Type Conversion TAG TYPE CONVERSION Tags that reference data in a remote application can be of a different data type from the tag definition in the remote application The following chart identifies the supported data type conversions Table 97 1 Data Type Conversions Q Local Application Remote Application 2 Digital Digital analog longana float message 2 Analog Digital analog longana float message Longana Digital analog longana float message Float Digital analog longana float message Message Digital analog longana float message Mailbox Mailbox Precision loss should be considered in mixing data source types In mixed data type assignments the precision of the element with the least number of significant digits is the assumed precision This should also be considered in transferring data between platforms that have different precision for like tag types Use caution when implementing tag type conversion F or instance a message tag on the server application referenced as an analog tag in the client application must contain only numeric characters or the conversion will be to a value of zero Additionally an analog tag the server application referenced as a digital in the client application will be assigned a value of 1 when the analog value is non zero and 0 when the analog value is ze
102. mailbox for alarm communications DATASRVMBX USER MAILBOX Data server receive mailbox DATE SHARED MESSAGE Date day MM DD YYY Y DATEO SHARED MESSAGE Date day MM DD YYY Y DATETIME SHARED MESSAGE Dateand Time day MM DD YY YYY HH MM SS DBLOGHISTMBX SHARED MAILBOX DBLOG Receive mailbox for Historian communications DBLOGHISTMBX_U USER MAILBOX DBLOG Receive mailbox for Historian communication DPLOGHISTMBX SHARED MAILBOX Data Point Logger Receive mailbox for Historian communications FLAPP_S SHARED MESSAGE Application directory FLAPP_U USER MESSAGE Application directory FLDOMAIN_S SHARED MESSAGE Domain Name FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 365 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 1 Tagname Domain Type Description FLDOMAIN_U USER MESSAGE Domain Name FLINK_S SHARED MESSAGE Directory for application programs FLINK_U USER MESSAGE Directory for application programs FLLANSIG SHARED DIGITAL FLLANSND system interval trigger FLLANSNDMBX SHARED MAILBOX Mailbox for FLLANSND process FLNAME_S SHARED MESSAGE Application Name FLNAME_U USER MESSAGE Application Name FLOPERATOR_S SHARED MESSAGE Application Operator FLOPERATOR_U USER MESSAGE Application Operator LSECEVENTUSER_S SHARED MESSAGE User Name for Application Security Event LSECEVENTUSER_U USER MESSAGE User Name for Application Security Event FLSECEVENT_S S
103. menu is displayed Watch Process Tag Input Command Input Global Info Shutdown All Exit 2 Choose Command Input from the Options pulldown menu The Monitor Commands panel is displayed FactoryLink Monitor Commands AE x ptions FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 335 108 JOJIUOW USING RUN TIME MONITOR Using Run Time Monitor Commands The appearance of this window varies depending on the operating system When entering commands in the Commands window use the following guidelines To recall previous commands use the and J keys To scroll through the output use the scroll bar To execute a command in real time mode press Enter To exit the Commands window choose Exit from the Monitor Commands Options pulldown menu This returns you to the Run Time Monitor panel The information in the following pages describes how to use the commands available with the Monitor Commands window Terminating a Task Usethe t command to terminate a FactoryLink task The syntax is t name where nameis the name of the task to terminate as specified in the Task Name field of the System Configuration Information panel Exiting Commands Window Usethe q command to quit the session and exit the commands window The syntax is q Accessing Help Usethe or h command to open help The syntax is cmd or h cmd where cmd is the command you want help for For example 71
104. ml 3 Client processes failed to start Cause more processes could not be started Action Seethe error messages for the particular process Client processes failed to stop Cause The process may already have stopped Action Attempt to stop the process manually if it has not stopped Directory directory name does not exist Cause Can t the find FLAPP directory specified by the environment variable Action Set FLAPP toa valid application directory FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 309 USING RUN TIME MANAGER Run time Manager Messages Directory directory name is not a valid FactoryLink directory Cause FLAPP does not have a valid subdirectory structure Action 1 Check the FLAPP directory Add the missing subdirectories 2 Set FLAPP to a valid application directory Domain domain name can only have one instance Cause A parent domain has been configured as having more than one instance Action A parent domain may only have one instance Open the Domain Element List and changethe entry in the 4NST field tol Domain domain name isn t in the domain CT Cause Thespecified domain does not exists in the domain CT Action Thedomain name may have been entered incorrectly or may not exist in the Domain Element List Verify the domain exists in the Domain Element List and has been entered correctly Environment Tag element name has an invalid type Cause The wrong data type was specified for the fiel
105. more rows or columns than can be displayed in the available area it contains a scroll bar which indicates more data is available for viewing A window or panel can contain both or either a vertical and horizontal scroll bar uu Database Logging Control ioj x Edit View Utilities Exit Help Vertical Scroll Bar Slider Bar Cancel Enter Exit Push Horizontal E mum Button Scroll Bar Scroll bars end in small buttons with arrows called push buttons Use these buttons to movethe data in the window up and down one lineat a time or left and right one column at a time A scroll bar also contains a rectangle called a slider box The slider box indicates the area of data to display You can drag the slider anywhere along the horizontal scroll bar 105 Vertical Scroll Bar Use the vertical scroll bar to move the window s contents up and down in two ways e Point tothe pushbutton at either end of the scroll bar and dick the left button to move up or down one line e Position the pointer above or below the slider box and click the left button to move up or down one page y 5 as 5 o im FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 219 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Scrolling Window Panel This scroll bar does not reflect the relative position in a panel and its slider box remains in a fixed position Do not attempt to select this slider box and move it wit
106. name or element number The element number is displayed in output when you read the element count identifies the number of elements in the array to display starting with the element identified by tag value identifies the valueto write to each tag You can enter numerical values as hexadecimal numbers by preceding the value with Ox For example to set the values of three elements to 100 beginning with TEMPSET enter the following command s TEMPSET 0 3 100 Force Writing a Value to One or More Elements Usethe S command toforce write the same value to multiple elements of an array tag with a single command A force write sets the Change status flag to 1 on The syntax is S tag count value where tag identifies the element to start with This can either bethe element name or element number The element number is displayed in output when you read the element count identifies the number of elements in the array to display starting with the element identified by tag value identifies the valueto write to each tag You can enter numerical values as hexadecimal numbers by preceding the value with Ox For example enter the following command to set the values of three elements beginning with TEMPSET to 100 S TEMPSET 0 3 100 340 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Using Run Time Monitor Commands Working with Batch Files This section discusses the commands used for creating and executing batch
107. obj extension OS 2 Platform The OS 2 platform contains the following subdirectories under the application directory BIN FactoryLink command files cmd extension and executable program files for each FactoryLink task exe extension INSTALL Files used during FactoryLink installation LIB Object files obj extension library files lib extension and dynamic link library files dll extension FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 37 OVERVIEW Environment Variables UNIX Platforms The UNIX platform contains the following subdirectories under the application directory BIN FactoryLink command files and executable program files Some protocol module executable files have an exe extension LIB Object o extension and library a extension files ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES Because multiple copies of F actoryLink be running concurrently the system uniquely identifies an application by a combination of its application name domain name and user name These names are defined as environment variables You can set these environment variables either in a system configuration file so they are automatically supplied when you start the application or at the system prompt before starting the application The environment variables you can set are listed in the following table Table 83 2 Environmental Variables Variable Description FLINK flink dir FLAPP flapp dir FLDOMAIN domain FLNAME app name 38 Fa
108. on a Windows NT or Windows 95 operating system 1 Choosethe Restore Application icon from the FactoryLink group window fes FactoryLink ECS loj x File Edit View Help Convert DXF FactoryLink Application Translation Configurat Double click here to restore FactosyLink FactoryLink Restore Install System Tool Application HS Save Start Application FactoryLink 10 obiect s 4 52KB Ui 396 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLTEST and FLDEMO 2 The Application Restore dialog is displayed 109 2 Desin etian csi TEST Q Savaa Pile Laca i scia p 5 Locs beltipliiam Seve File 2 Multi Maten Zane Filz md E Cancel Factanylink 6 00 lor Copptigt 1 9084 19906 ahed States Dats 3 Provide the following information Source Enter the full path name of the application s source directory If you are restoring FLTEST enter c flink mps fltest mps If you are restoring FLDEMO enter c flink mps fldemo mps Destination Enter the full path name of the application s destination directory 4 Choose Local Multiplattorm Save File as the type of save file you want to restore 5 Choose OK FLREST begins restoring the files 6 Create a program group for the FLTEST application using Additional Install Functions from the Windows Pr
109. one of two methods e Platform specific e Multi platform Platform specific save T o lt 7 The platform specific method creates a copy of an application that can berestored to other computers running on the same operating system Use the platform specific save to save platform specific files e back up applications This creates a complete archive of the entire application Multiplatform save The multiplatform method transfers an application from a FactoryLink system running on one operating system to a FactoryLink system running on a different operating system The multiplatform method condenses a F actoryL ink application into a single image file of the application Use the multiplatform save when transporting applications across platforms If you are converting an application built under a FactoryLink version prior to 4 3 your operating system platform may have allowed file names directory names and graphic screens to be longer than 8 characters not including the file name extension Starting with 4 3 file names directory names and graphic screens cannot exceed 8 characters If they do the application will not restore on FactoryLink 4 3 or higher Never restore a multiplatform saveto a FactoryLink version other than the version with which it was saved because configuration data may be lost FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 408 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLSAVE
110. only tothe loading of EDI PowerNet FLLAN DDE and other 1 0 tasks At run time FactoryLink Lite checks the O tasks to determine whether any exceed the maxium number of licensed elements If a task exceeds the maximum the task shuts down T o O eA lt 3 zc e FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 423 FACTORYLINK LITE Configuration Guidelines CONFIGURATION GUIDELINES Configure a FactoryLink Lite application as you would any other FactoryLink application but pay particular attention to the following items e Before you begin configuring plan how you will use elements 1 0 elements in the application so you do not reach the limit before you have defined all you need Note the number of user elements available to you as defined by your license agreement Choose Application Size from the Configuration Manager menu bar or Application gt Tag Count from the Application Editor menu bar to display the Application Size dialog The Application Size dialog is displayed Application Tag Count Total configured tags 711 Total configured tags 711 User defined tags 0 Application Size User defined tags 0 RTDB memory efficiency 100 RTDB memory efficiency 100 Help This dialog displays both the total number of elements defined overall including pre defined elements and the total number of elements you have defined These totals cover all domains for the current application Note
111. priority within the dass listed above Thehigher the number the higher the priority within the dass 2 Rank or position of an operation in a sequence of operations process capability Thelevel of uniformity of product that a process is capable of yielding expressed by the percent of defective products or the range or standard deviation of some product dimension Process capability is usually determined by performing measurements on product units produced by the process 450 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals A B C D EF GHIJK LM N OP QRS TU VW XYZ GLOSSARY process control Maintaining the performance of a process at its capability level by sampling the process product charting its performance determining causes of any problems and taking corrective actions Programmable FactoryLink task that provides triggered up down counters with Counters terminating triggers Programmable Special purpose computer programmed to control process or Logic Controller machine operation The programmable logic controller consists of PLC five basic components processor memory input output power supply programming device A PLC is designed as an industrial control system Programmers Collection of optional F actoryLink software tools and Access Kit PAK programming libraries and keys related documentation for use by programmers in their design and construction of F actoryLink compatible programs prompt Character or message on a video display
112. programs each program performs a specific activity in the automation process such as the collection and storage of data the generation of reports or the management of files These programs are called modules in the development environment and tasks in the run time environment This chapter describes the concepts necessary to understand how F actoryLink works It also describes each module that can be configured to automate your process FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 21 OVERVIEW e Development Environment DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT A FactoryLink application is configured in the development environment This environment contains a series of configuration tables for each module Refer tothe FactoryLink Modules on page 29 for a list of modules You open these tables by choosing a specific menu option from the Main Menu Access to configuratio tables Each option is comprised of one or more panels For example the Logger tableis comprised of two panels the Database Logging Control panel and the Database Logging Information panel Tebic 22 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals OVERVIEW Run time Environment You must fill out these panels to configure the module Refer to the F actoryLink Configuration Guide for details on configuring each module The information entered in these panels is stored in dBASE IV compatible files in the directory where the F actoryLink application files are sto
113. that can be stored addressed or displayed by a computer Abbreviation for picture element pointing device Device such as a keyboard or a mouse that allows control over movement of the cursor during the creation of graphics images and displays polygon Closed plane figure bounded by three or more line segments Power Edit An editing tool that enables you to select and directly edit subobjects including their animation within a composite object without breaking apart the composite See composite object simple object subobject Power Objects User extensible animated compound objects that contain template variables for the animation features See Power Packs Power Packs Libraries of drawings where you can store Power Objects for reuse in creating new instances of similar objects in the same or in other applications See Power Objects pre defined Convenient element configured for internal system use element Sometimes called reserved element or global element Print Spooler FactoryLink task that extends the printing capabilities of the system by providing multiple print buffers and the ability to use serial or parallel printers Also allows output to be directed to a disk file priority 1 Three digit hexadecimal number such as 201 that specifies the processing priority for a FactoryLink task where the first number 2 in 201 specifies the operating system class of priority the second number 01 in 201 specifies the
114. the Table Name field Col number filename Cause column contains an invalid entry Action Open the column and correct the entry Configuration Manager must be closed before exiting Windows Cause You attempted to exit the Windows operating system before exiting the Main Menu Action Exit the Main Menu before exiting Windows Couldn t create input window Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred 105 Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by FactoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for F actoryL ink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardwareis compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur e az orm 5 a 5 y Buisn FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 257 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages Couldn t get external module address Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set to
115. the Timer task is running These reserved elements are constantly updated You must have entered an R flag for the Timer task in the System Configuration Tablein the Configuration Manager Main Menu for the Timer task torun 110 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals EVENT AND INTERVAL TIMER TASK DEFINITION Table 90 1 Reserved Elements Reserved Element A_SEC A MIN A HOUR A DAY Day of month A MONTH A YEAR A DOW Day of week A DOY Day of year DATE DOW MM DD YYYY TIME HH MM SS DATETIME DOW MM DD YYYY HH MM SS YYMMDD YY MM DD SECDAY Seconds since start of current day SECYEAR Seconds since start of current year SECTIME Seconds since J anuary 1 1980 Principles of Operation Data Type FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 111 pue 1 lt lt EVENT AND INTERVAL TIMER TASK DEFINITION Changing the Operating System Date and Time CHANGING THE OPERATING SYSTEM DATE AND TIME Shut down the Timer task change the date and time and restart the task to change the operating system date and time while F actoryLink is running otherwise the Timer task tries to catch up by processing missed intervals 112 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter91 File Manager Task Definition TheFactoryLink File Manager task can be used to perform basic operating system fileemanagement operations initiated by a FactoryLink application at run time Thetask can work in con
116. the default values Refer to Naming the Stations and Network Groups in the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for details on changing these values We recommend you consult your network administrator if you need to change the default values e TX 20 e RX 60 INIT 20 CALL 10 e BUFSIZE 512 MAXLEN 512 e MAXSESS 232 ACK 0 e ST 10 e SD 10 TX Transmit Timeout A number between 0 and 65527 that sets the maximum time in seconds between transmissions The default is 20 If the local station does not send any data to a given remote station after the indicated time the local station sends an am still here packet to the remote station RX Receive Timeout A number between 0 and 65527 that sets the maximum time in seconds between receptions The default is 60 Ensurethis valueis at least three times greater than the TX value If the local station does not receive any data from a remote station after the indicated time the local station disconnects from the remote station and attempts to reconnect 124 FactoryLink 6 5 0 6 5 0 INIT CALL Oo Oo A CQ LOCAL AREA NETWORKING TASK DEFINITION Local Station s Default Values If you specify an RX value greater than 60 modify the t program argument for Run Time Manager in the System Configuration table otherwise FLLANRCV may not shut down properly Refer to Setting Up Program Arguments on page 293 for more information about modifying program argu
117. the maximum number of I O elements for O tasks The Application Size dialog does not separately display the number of I O elements defined although these are included in the total number of user defined elements displayed in this dialog If you are developing a Lite application under a full scale F actoryLink development package and you define too many elements F actoryLink will not display an error message Help If you define too many elements or 1 0 elements you must delete the extra elements or the application will not run Complete the following steps to delete an element 424 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK LITE Configuration Guidelines Choose View gt X ref List from the Configuration Manager menu bar to display the RTDB element cross reference panel This panel lists all of thetasks that reference the element Delete the element from all configuration panels where the element is referenced Delete the element from all graphics objects Choose View gt Object List from Configuration Manager to display the RTDB Element List panel Delete the element from the RTDB Element List panel T o O eA lt 3 zc e FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 425 FACTORYLINK LITE FactoryLink Lite Error Messages FACTORYLINK LITE ERROR MESSAGES If an error related to Lite occurs while you are starting up or running a Lite application one of the following messages may appear on the R
118. the maximum timeout in seconds for Database L ogging to wait for a response from the Historian task The default is 30 seconds For values less than 30 seconds this switch will only work correctly when the Historian initially achieved a successful connection with the database server If the Historian failed to successfully connect with the database server Database L ogging will timeout in 30 seconds regardless of this switch setting Perform the following steps to configure one or more arguments 1 Choose System Configuration on the Configuration Manager Main Menu to display the System Configuration Information panel 88 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DATABASE LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Configuring Program Arguments 2 Enter oneor more arguments separated by spaces in the Program Arguments field for the DBLOG task lt lt eseqejeq FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 89 DATABASE LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Configuring Program Arguments 90 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 88 Data Point Logging Task Definition FactoryLink stores the data it collects or computes as a data element ina real time database Each time a new value for an existing real time database element is collected or computed the current value stored in the real time database for that element is overwritten by the new data You log data to an historical database using a Logger task if you want to preserve d
119. the order in which the EDI task handles the queuing of block read requests The highest priority lowest number is processed first 9 o o o 5 lt FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 431 A DE F GH GLOSSARY Block Read State Block Read Trigger block write triggered Block Write Complete Block Write Disable Block Write Priority Block Write State Block Write Trigger boolean boot browse table BUFSIZE button button holder I JK LE MN OP QR STU VW X Y Z Digital element with a value of 0 OFF when a block read of the elements specified in a read tableis in progress and 1 ON when the table is inactive When the EDI task initializes the Block Read State element is force written to 1 ON Digital element of 1 ON that initiates a block read of the values specified in a Read Write Information panel See trigger Write operation in which the EDI task directs the protocol module to transfer the values of all the elements specified in a Read Write Table to an external device Digital element with a value force written to 1 ON by the EDI task whenever any block write operation for the write table is completed If this element is defined when the EDI task initializes its value is force written to 1 ON Digital element of 1 ON that disables the block write of the elements specified in a write table Priority that influences the order the EDI task handles the queuing of bloc
120. the server Unadvise Request that client is not notified of an item change Data Notify client when an item changes Ack ACK or on message Terminate Termination of the DDE Conversation lt lt These messages are the basic building blocks the FactoryLink DDE Server DDE Client work with e eq 21 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 101 DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE DDE TASK DEFINITION Setting Up DDE Server SETTING UP DDE SERVER Perform the following steps to set up the FactoryLink DDE Server 1 Complete the following fields to configure the DDE Server in the System Configuration Information panel Flag FSR in the Flag field These flags allow the DDE Server to automatically load each time actoryLink is started Task Name Name FLDDESRV to identify the Server task Path Path name as bin flddesrv Refer to Chapter 106 Using System Configuration for more information about the System Configuration Information panel 2 Establish a DDE Link using the application specific procedures for a DDE Formula or Create Link Refer tothe appropriate application documentation such as the Microsoft Excel User Guide for detailed instruction DDE Links give Windows application access to the F actoryL ink real time database F or example the value of a specified element can be set up to be displayed automatically in a cell of a Microsoft E xcel spreadsheet DDE S
121. therein or by reason of fault on the part of USDATA or f the Software Programs will achieve the results desired by the user or any third person U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS The Software is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the government of the United States is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or in subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at 48 CFR 52 227 19 as applicable Contractor Manufacturer is United States Data Corporation 2435 North Central Expressway Suite 100 Richardson TX 75080 2722 To the extent Customer transfers Software to any federal state or local government agency Customer shall take all acts necessary to protect the rights of USDATA in Software including without limitation all acts described in the regulations referenced above The Software Programs are furnished under a software license or other software agreement and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the applicable agreement It is against the law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the applicable agreement No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording for any purpose without the express written permission of USD
122. to do general maintenance of your application FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 29 OVERVIEW FactoryLink Modules Modules for Accessing Stored Data Math amp Logic Performs math on data collected in the Real Time Database The results can be used for writing new data elements inclusion in reports or triggering events Report Generator Generates reports using data from the Real Time Database These reports can be archived to disk or sent toa printer Modules for Logging and Retrieving Data Database Browser Retrieves updates deletes and inserts data into an existing database Database Logger Copies data from the memory based Real Time Database to historical disk based relational databases Data Point Logger Simplifies the task of logging data by providing preconfigured tables Distributed Alarm Logger Checks real time data for permitted limits generates alarms if limits are exceeded and copies the alarms to historical disk based relational database Historian Acts as a conduit for information between F actoryLink tasks that send data to or retrieve data from a relational database Schemas Define table structures such as row and column number size and content Statistical Process Control Displays real time or historical data on statistical charts Trending Displays real time or historical data on trend charts Modules for Communicating Across the Network F actoryLink Local Area Netwo
123. utility is a shell that calls the PARSECML and CCCML utilities as needed for the current application For each domain MKCML checks the dependencies between the configuration tables and the program files by e EnsuringtheIML CT fileis up to date by calling CTGEN CTGEN compares IML CT against the database files upon which IML CT is dependent If the database files have a later time date stamp than IML CT CTGEN rebuilds IML CT to bring them up to date e Checking the time date of IML CT to determine if the Math amp Logic configuration has changed If so it reproduces and recompiles all of the C files by calling PARSECML and CCCML When you redirect the output of MKCML toa file the messages in the dump may appear out of order because of the way the operating system buffers and outputs messages when redirecting output If you do not redirect the output of MKCML the MKCML reports the messages to the standard output in the correct order PARSECML The PARSECML utility parses the application program file and produces C files for a given domain It produces a C file for each program file listed as compiled has COMPILED in the Made field in the Math and Logic Triggers Information panel The utility also checks the dependencies between the program field and the C files to determine if any procedures have been updated sincethe C files were last produced 138 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals MATH amp LOGIC TASK DEFINITION Triggerin
124. utility produces at run time that contains data extracted from the configuration database table Script file or CTG file that tells the CTGEN utility how to extract data from a database table and combine the extracted values to produce a binary configuration table CT file at run time found in FLINKYCTGEN An unchanging quantity or any numeric or string expression that contains no variables Data for a continuous variable A variable which can assume any of a range of values an example would be the measured size of a part 436 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals A COD EF GH control of process statistical control of process manufacturing control chart control limits control panel control statement cursor cycle Database Browser database element database file Database Logger database table data type I JK LM NOP QRS TUV WX Y Z GLOSSARY A process that exhibits only random variations A process with variations within specified control limits Not related to statistical control Graphic representation of a parameter of process performance used to determine if parameter is within acceptable quality limits The limits within which the product of a process is expected or required to remain If the process exceeds the limits it is said to be out of control Not the same as tolerance limits See panel Mathematical expression that includes instructions about the ci
125. you are creating the new application in an empty or new directory FLNEW supplies a set of libraries consisting of a collection of application components used to perform graphical logical process and communication operations Refer to the F actoryLink Rd ease Notes for details on the most current libraries FLNEW contains the following pre defined tags 362 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 1 Tagname Domain Type Description ALC_ACK USER DIGITAL Acknowledge most recent Alarm ALC_ARCHIVE SHARED DIGITAL Alarm Supervisor Control Archive ALC_BANNER SHARED DIGITAL Alarm Supervisor Control Banner ALC_EXEC SHARED DIGITAL Alarm Supervisor Control Execute ALC_GROUP SHARED DIGITAL Alarm Supervisor Control Group ALC_GRPACK USER DIGITAL Alarm Supervisor Control Group Acknowledge ALC_LOGBK USER DIGITAL Alarm logbook trigger ALC_PGDN SHARED ANALOG Alarm Supervisor Control Page down ALC_PGUP SHARED ANALOG Alarm Supervisor Control Page up ALC_PRINT SHARED DIGITAL Alarm Supervisor Control Print ALC_RETURN SHARED DIGITAL Alarm Supervisor Control Enter ALC_SCROLL SHARED ANALOG Alarm Supervisor Control Scroll ALC_SDN SHARED ANALOG Alarm Supervisor Control Scroll down ALC_SELACK USER DIGITAL Alarm Supervisor Control Selection Acknowledge ALC_SORT SHARED DIGITAL Alarm Supervisor Control Sort ALC_SUP SHARED ANALOG Alarm Super
126. 10 Fundamentals Searching foraTag 00 c eee ees 231 Daging a Tag Definition 233 Changing a Tag Definition 235 Viewing Miscellaneous Information 236 Viewing Domain List 236 Viewing the Current Version of 238 ViewingField lt 239 Editing Configuration Panels 240 Inserting a Blank Line 0 0 cece 240 DdetingaLineEntry 2 00 ie a EG 240 Copying Contents of a 241 CuttingaLineEntry eres 241 Pasting a Copied or Cut Line Entry 242 Searching fora Text String 242 Getting Help exce RR ERG E Kr Sha dee SER RE 243 Managing Text entry Panel Files 244 SavingFileContents 244 MergingaFile 244 Checking 5 245 Clearing EFEOES mede Em em EA man 245 Changing Font Size 245 Reporting sees wt eee 246 Configuration Manager Messages 248 Usi
127. 104 Logically represents J Elements an element in database Once an element is defined you can make unlimited references to this element Any FactoryLink task containing a reference to an element can read and write data to and from the element at run time zh 5 D Q During development actoryLink stores tag names the F LAPP directory in the object databasetable This information is updated to the ct files when the run time application is started Some tags are already defined in FactoryLink when it is shipped Others are defined during application development either within the Configuration Manager or the Application Editor This chapter describes how to define tag names for database elements and provides some suggestions on how to usetags in your application FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 201 DEFINING TAGS Tag Naming Guidelines TAG NAMING GUIDELINES Valid tag names conform to the following grammar lt node gt lt name gt lt dims gt lt ext gt where node 15 limited to 8 characters name 15 limited to 32 characters If using an array add delimiters of up to 16 characters Refer to Defining Element Arrays on page 207 for more details If using PowerNet in your enterprise the character count is reduced to 23 When PowerNet is used logical name of up to 8 characters plus a colon 9 characters maximum is added to reference the Factory
128. 2 executing multiple times 342 executing once 342 working with 341 Batch Recipe 430 creating animating a graphics display 64 principles of operation 62 Bell Shaped Curve 431 binary operator 431 bit 431 blank line inserting 240 block send 119 boot 432 browse table 432 Browser logical expressions 68 principles of operation 66 byte 433 CDBLIST 406 Centerline 435 changing font size 245 tag definitions 235 checking databases DBCHK 407 syntax 245 child alarms 52 child alarm delay 53 child recovery delay 54 delay child not suppressed 53 1 460 FactoryLink 6 5 0 JK LM N OP QRS TUVWXYZ delay child suppressed 52 cleaning memory areas FLSHM 410 clearing error messages 245 client application 151 client to server data transfer 156 client server 151 CML switching from IML 136 using 137 color scheme Windows 285 command buttons 218 command line options Run Time Manager 295 commands Run Time Monitor 335 Common Causes 436 compiled mode 136 conditional 436 Configuration Manager accessing OS 2 213 accessing U nix 213 accessing Windows 212 changing font size 245 changing tag definitions 235 checking syntax 245 clearing errors 245 copying a line entry 241 cutting a line entry 241 defining element arrays 207 deleting a line entry 240 deleting tag definitions 233 display 215 editing configuration panels 240 getting help 243 inserting blank line 240 managing text entry panel
129. 6 5 0 Fundamentals 269 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER e Configuration Manager Messages Tag already exists but is not defined in or above the current domain level Cause You tried to define or reference a user domain element in the shared domain Action Assign the element a new name or delete all references to the existing element Task is not installed properly Cause A task may not be loaded and or configured because it is not in the option key Action Check the master and option key contents by typing UKEY I The system couldn t open the object xref or type database Cause FLAPP is not set to a valid application directory Action SetFLAPP to a valid application directory Cause Theindex or file specified may be damaged Action Exit the Main Menu and try again If this doesn t work run DBCHK toidentify the corrupt index file Then delete the index file M DX and rebuild it For information about DBCHK see Chapter 109 FactoryL ink Utilities in this manual The Tag name element name contains one or more invalid characters Cause Theelement name specified contains one or more invalid characters Action Correct the element name The first character of the element name must be alphabetic or one of the following characters _ The remaining characters can be numeric also The Tag name element name is undefined Cause Theelement name specified does not exist Either a wrong name for an elemen
130. 92 test application FL TEST 396 CTGEN 406 CTLIST 406 cutting a line entry in a configuration panel 241 Cycle 437 D DALOG see Distributed Alarm L ogger 43 data deleting 83 Index 1 461 A B C D EF GHtIJS K LM N OP QRS TUVWXYZ grouping 76 logging 183 ordering 186 Data Logging overview 27 data transfer client to server 156 server to client 155 Database Browser task 437 Database Browser see Browser 65 database element 437 Database L ogger See Logger 91 Database Logging overview 28 Data Point Logger 91 overview 91 Data Point Logging 91 Index 94 LOGTIME 93 vs Database Logging Database Logging vs Data Point Logging 28 Data Point Logging Table Schema FLOATVAL 93 LARGEINT 93 SMALLINT 93 TAGDATA 93 Data Point Logging Tables ANALOG 92 LOGDATA 92 LONGANA 92 TRENDATA 92 Data Point Save file 95 date changing 112 DBCHK 407 1 462 FactoryLink 6 5 0 DDE Client DDE Windows 99 106 read operations 106 setup Windows 108 write operations 107 DDE Server DDE Windows 98 setup Windows 102 DDE Windows conversations 99 Create Link 104 DDE Client 99 106 DDE Server 98 establishing a DDE link 103 formulas 104 messages 101 modifying a linked element 105 overview 97 read operations 106 setting up DDE Client 108 setting up the DDE Server 102 write operations 107 Deadbanding 179 180 debugging CDBLIST 406 CTLIST 406 decompressing files EXPLODE 408 default 438 defining element arrays 207 multi dimension
131. ALOG Alarm Supervisor Version Information ALOG MBX SHARED MAILBOX Alarmlogger mailbox A DAY SHARED ANALOG Day of the month A DOW SHARED ANALOG Day of the week A DOY SHARED ANALOG Day of the year A_HOUR SHARED ANALOG Number of hours past midnight A_MIN SHARED ANALOG Number of minutes past the hour A_MONTH SHARED ANALOG Month of the year A_SEC SHARED ANALOG Number of seconds past the minute A_YEAR SHARED ANALOG Current Year BROWSEHISTMBX SHARED MAILBOX Mailbox for BROWSER process 364 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 1 Tagname Domain Type Description BROWSEHISTMBX_U USER MAILBOX Mailbox for BROWSER process a CONNSRVACTIVE SHARED ANALOG Number of brokered services that are active 9 lt CONNSRVINIT SHARED DIGITAL Connection server initialization flare T E CONNSRVMBX SHARED MAILBOX Connection server receive mailbox AX c CONNSRVTOTAL SHARED ANALOG Total number of services being brokered c DALOGACKMBX SHARED MAILBOX Distributed AL LOG mailbox for acknowledged alarms DALOGRCVMBX SHARED MAILBOX Distributed AL_LOG Receive mailbox for Historian communications DALOGRCVMBX_U USER MAILBOX Distributed AL_LOG Receive mailbox for Historian communications DALOGVIEWMBX SHARED MAILBOX Distributed AL_VIEW mailbox for alarm communications DALOGVIEWMBX_U USER MAILBOX Distributed AL VIEW
132. ALVIEW_LOGBOOK_TRIGGER USER DIGITAL Alarm Viewer logbook archive trigger ALVIEW_ROW_SELECT USER ANALOG Alarm Viewer selected row number ALVIEW_SCROLL USER ANALOG Alarm Viewer scroll value ALVIEW_SELECT_ACK USER DIGITAL Alarm Viewer selection acknowledge ALVIEW_SORT USER MESSAGE Alarm Viewer sort method ALVIEW_TEXT USER MESSAGE Alarm Viewer text ALVIEW TEXT BG USER ANALOG Alarm Viewer text background attribute ALVIEW TEXT BL USER ANALOG Alarm Viewer text blink attribute ALVIEW TEXT FG USER ANALOG Alarm Viewer text foreground attribute APPLICATION DRW USER MESSAGE Application window current loaded drawing A DAY SHARED ANALOG Day of the month A DOW SHARED ANALOG Day of the week A DOY SHARED ANALOG Day of the year A HOUR SHARED ANALOG Number of hours past midnight A_MIN SHARED ANALOG Number of minutes past the hour A_MONTH SHARED ANALOG Month of the year A_SEC SHARED ANALOG Number of seconds past the minute A_YEAR SHARED ANALOG Current year BROWSEHISTMBX SHARED MAILBOX Mailbox for BROWSER process BROWSEHISTMBX_U USER MAILBOX Mailbox for BROWSER process CONNSRVACTIVE SHARED ANALOG Number of brokered services that are active 380 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 2 Tagname Domain Type Description CONNSRVINIT SHARED DIGITAL Connection server initialization flare a CONNSRVMBX SHARED MAILBOX Connectio
133. AT This section contains the object names of real time database elements to include on the report Each time the repeat section executes element values are written to the temporary working file This section can also include literal text included in the report e End section End section is delineated by the keyword END This section ends the report and contains text to include at the end of the report lt lt Each format file is comprised of or more of these sections The only required section is the end section that is every report format must have an end section If you only include an end section in the format file you generate a snapshot report Refer to Report Format Variations on page 176 for more information 104 Oday FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 171 REPORT GENERATOR TASK DEFINITION Placement of Reported Data PLACEMENT OF REPORTED DATA Data specified in the format file is collected from the real time database and placed into the report Placement of real time database values is determined by the following e Location of its object name in the format file e Format specifiers Location of Object Name Object names act as a placeholder for data and are linked to data elements in the real time database The value of the real time database element it is linked to replaces the object name during report generation Braces or brackets identify object names within th
134. ATA Trademarks USDATA and FactoryLink are registered trademarks of United States Data Corporation Open Software Bus is a registered trademark licensed to United States Data Corporation All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Table of Contents Fundamentals oves a8 dpud va olus dd ob do De ss 15 PUP D0SG ost tse Lag eie iia aon ii 15 AUdIence xo cur swa cer tete BE Wages dE SERE deo EN Suet iva 15 TheFactoryLink Documentation Set 15 Structure of Fundamentals 16 How To Use This 16 CONVENLIONS Mu EP Maes 17 Gettirigi Help c state es eet ee ed en 19 1 OUI ee edd t arg gk MM matar 21 Development Environment 22 Run time Environment 23 Real time Database mnra a kaa i 24 Generating Data in Real time lt 25 Reading Data from the Real time lt 26 Data Logging Overview 27 FactoryLink Modules 29 General Modules 29 Modules for Accessing Stored Data
135. CE SCREEN When you start the Run Time Manager the Run Time Manager main screen is displayed This document displays the Run Time M anager screen as it is shipped with FactoryLink You can customize the Run Time Manager screen according to your needs using the Application E ditor Last Message Area Aa TET Ha icis V COUNTER HR qu Task Controls Connecting ia 7 wees ___ SFEURAPH ZI E Application E ec OE stad Process natant Controls ee Apphsanesi eR Display Controls The screen has four major components Task controls Turns tasks on or off Refer to the Task Controls page 305 for more details Last message area Shows the last message sent by the task Refer to the discussion on thetask in the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for more details Application controls Displays information about the current application and turns the application off Refer tothe Application Controls on page 306 for more details Display controls Provides access to other application screens Refer to the Run Time Manager User I nterface Screen on page 304 for more details 304 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MANAGER Run Time Manager User Interface Screen Task Controls Thetask control area lists the available tasks for your application Up
136. DATABASE BROWSER TASK DEFINITION Use of Logical Expressions If the view size of the browse window is 2 the browse window writes the values of the elements in two rows to the real time database When the data reaches the real time database other F actoryLink tasks can read it and write to it and an operator can view the data on a graphics screen Browser performs four operations e Select Uses an SQL select statement to select and retrieve data from a relational database to be displayed in a result table e Update U pdates the data in the result table and external database Browser can perform two types of update operations e Positional U pdates the current row row at which the cursor is currently pointing of data displayed in the browse window Logical U pdates the data described by the logical expression e Insert When an update operation cannot be performed because the row to be updated does not exist inserts a new row of data in the result table Delete Deletes a row from the result table and external database Browser can perform two types of delete operations e Positional Deletes the current row row at which the cursor is currently pointing of data displayed in the browse window Logical Deletes the data described by the logical expression 70 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DATABASE BROWSER TASK DEFINITION Configuring Program Arguments CONFIGURING PROGRAM ARGUMENTS Configure the
137. Data Point Logging on page 383 in the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for information on procedures to configure this task Use Data Point Logging on page 83 in the F actoryLink Reference Guidefor a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 91 DATA POINT LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Data Point Logging Function DATA POINT LOGGING FUNCTION Data Point Logging reduces the task of configuring data to be logged Data Point Logging uses a structured database with the number of columns and the names of the columns predefined by the Data Point Logging Schema task Because the table structures are pre configured the Data Point Logging task can only be used tolog shared numeric value tags The tags to be logged can be specified in the Configuration Manager by means of the Data Point Logging Information panel or the Application Editor Tag Definition dialog Refer to Data Point Logging Table Schema Configuration in the FactoryLink Configuration Guideand the Application Editor Guidefor details Preconfigured Data Point Logging Tables Data Point Logging provides five default data point logging tables each mapped to a specific default schema name to provide for efficient storage and retrieval of certain tag types These log tables are Table 88 1 Pre configured Data Point Logging Tables Table Used to Store FLOATVAL floating value data LONGANA long analog large in
138. EAD STATE SHARED DIGITAL Siemens Sinec H1 block read state H1MP READ TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Siemens Sinec H 1 block read trigger H1MP STATIONO READ STATUS SHARED DIGITAL Siemens Sinec H 1 solicited read status H1MP STATIONO STATUS SHARED ANALOG Siemens Sinec H 1 logical station 0 status H1MP STATIONO UNSOL STATUS SHARED DIGITAL Siemens Sinec H 1 unsolicited read status H1MP STATIONO WRITE STATUS SHARED DIGITAL Siemens Sinec H1 solicited write status FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 383 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 2 Tagname Domain Type Description H1MP_WRITE_COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Siemens Sinec H1 block write complete H1MP WRITE DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Siemens Sinec H1 block write disable H1MP_WRITE_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Siemens Sinec H1 block write state H1MP_WRITE_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Siemens Sinec H1 block write trigger HELP_COMPLETE USER DIGITAL Help file read or position complete HELP_SCROLL USER ANALOG Help file position used for scrolling HELP_STATUS USER ANALOG Help file status HELP_TEXT USER MESSAGE Help file output text HELP TRIGGER USER DIGITAL Help file read trigger KTDTL EXCEPTION DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley KTDTL exception write disable KTDTL_EXCEPTION_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley KTDTL exception write trigger KTDTL_LPORTO_MSG SHARED MESSAGE Allen Bradley KTDTL logical port error message
139. ES When sending element values FLLAN groups the elements by data type and sends them in the following order digital analog floating point message long analog and mailbox These groups are called packets To maximize efficiency place tags of like data types next to each other in the LAN Send Information panel and order them by digital analog floating point message long analog and mailbox Example lt lt If you enter the following tags in the panel ana2 flt2 anal 11591 flt1 FLLAN re orders the tags groups them and sends the packets in the following order packet 1 ana2 anal packet 2 flt2 flt1 packet 3 msg1 Enter the same tags in the following order to maximize efficiency ana2 anal flt2 flt1 11591 f you concerned about the order within data type enter them in the order you want FLLAN tosend them anal ana2 flt1 flt2 11591 HulyJOMJON Lay 12907 FactoryLink 6 5 0 6 5 0 129 LOCAL AREA NETWORKING TASK DEFINITION Ordering Tag Names In versions of FactoryLink prior to 4 1 5 FLLAN sent the tags in reverse order For example if you entered tags in the following order anal ana2 flt1 flt2 msgl FLLAN sent them in that order 130 FactoryLink 6 5 0 6 5 0 Chapter 94 Math amp Logic Task Definition The FactoryLink Math amp Logic task coordinates interactions among many of the FactoryLink tasks These features include e Uses
140. F actoryLink application the developer defines which values are to be held within the Real Time Database These data values are called tags Each tag has a unique name and a unique location within the Real Time Database Tag Names Logically represents an element in database Refer to Defining Tags on page 201 for details on assigning tag names and for a list of predefined elements shipped with FactoryLink 24 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals OVERVIEW Generating Data in Real time Database GENERATING DATA IN REAL TIME DATABASE The database stores data that has been Collected from a remote anal device lt s C ed b 2 Comput ya F actoryLink task CBAR E Manually entered by a user When data is collected and stored in the database other tasks can open and manipulate it A task can write information to an element in the Real Time Database using one of two types of writes a normal write or a forced write Normal writes only write to an element in the Real Time Database if the new valueis different from the existing value In this way system resources are not used unnecessarily Forced writes write to an element whether or not it has changed Use this type of write if you want to set the change status flag even if the data has not changed Refer to Reading Data from the Real time Database on page 26 for a discussion on the change status flag FactoryLink 6 5
141. F2 and then F3 Other key combinations are presented in the same manner File gt Open The gt indicates a progression through a menu sequence File gt Open indicates you choose Open from the File menu to perform the required action Other menu sequences are presented in the same manner FLAPP user drw mydrw g The indicates the directory structure for the listed file FLAPP user drw mydrw g indicates the drawing file mydrw g is located in the drw sub directory of the user sub directory to the FLAPP directory Other directory structures are presented in the same manner Brackets indicate an optional argument You can choose none one or all of the options and Braces indicate a choice You must choose one of the elements The vertical bar separates choices within braces 18 FactoryLink ECS 6 5 0 PREFACE Getting Help Example Syntax Example syntax using these conventions is provided below command input_file input_file fa b output_file where command is typed as it is displayed in the syntax input_file indicates a variable the user supplies input file indicates the user can optionally supply multiple input file names each name separated by a space H b indicates either the a or b must be specified as an argument output file indicates the user must specify an output file GETTING HELP Contact your Sales or Customer Support Representative for help with troub
142. FLAPP CT TYPE CT file Action Delete the file and re start the application to rebuild the file Can t convert subgroup table name Cause Tried to convert an older SPC application Action Seethe conversions instructions in the Release Notes Can t create appl filename error error number Cause Tried to start an application already started Action Noadion required 348 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Run time Manager Messages Can t open file filename Cause Action The disk may be full or this may be a log file opened by another process Delete unnecessary files If this error occurs often additional disk space may be required Can t read options file FL OPT Cause Action FL OPT has been damaged Verify the contents of FL OPT by running UK EY Copy flnew opt to fl opt Can t start process process name Cause Action The binary file may not exist may not be executable or the filename in the EXECUTABLE FILE field in the System Configuration Table may be incorrect Under some system platforms this may indicate an insufficient number of processes Verify the correct file the System Configuration Table or see the FactoryLink Fundamentals Can t stop process process name Cause Action The process may already have stopped Attempt to stop the process manually if it has not stopped Client processes failed to start Cause Action Client processe
143. FactoryLink loads persistent tags with the last value saved for them The options you specify using the procedures in this chapter apply to all tasks started for the application You can set options for individual tasks that override these defaults using the System Configuration module which is accessible from the Configuration Manager Main Menu Where you define the default run time options depends on whether you are starting the Run Time Manager from a F actoryLink icon or from an operating System command line If you are starting Run Time Manager from a command line usethe following syntax flrun options where options is one or more of the options specified in the previous table Each option is separated by a space Refer to Accessing Run Time Manager on page 299 for platform specific details on starting Run Time M anager from the command line 296 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MANAGER Setting Command Line Options If you are starting Run Time Manager from a Windows icon you must create a shortcut icon for the Run Time Manager icon using the following procedure 1 Choose drivename Winnt Profiles All Users Start Menu Programs FactoryLink 6 5 0 from the Explorer dialog 2 Click on Start FactoryLink in the Name list to highlight 3 Choose Create Shortcut from the File menu Exploring C WINNT Profiles All Users Start Menu Programs F actoryLink ECS Edit View Tools Help
144. FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FactoryLink 6 5 0 Januar y 1998 Copyright 1984 1998 United States Data Corporation All rights reserved NOTICE The information contained herein is confidential information of United States Data Corporation a Delaware corporation and is protected by United States copyright and trade secret law and international treaties This document may refer to United States Data Corporation as USDATA Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of United States Data Corporation USDATA Although the software programs described in this document the Software Programs are intended to operate substantially in accordance with the descriptions herein USDATA does not represent or warrant that a the Software Programs will operate in any way other than in accordance with the most current operating instructions available from USDATA b the functions performed by the Software Programs will meet the user s requirements or will operate in the combinations that may be selected for use by the user or any third person c the operation of the Software Programs will be error free in all circumstances d any defect in a Software Program that is not material with respect to the functionality thereof as set forth herein will be corrected e the operation of a Software Program will not be interrupted for short periods of time by reason of a defect
145. G THE WINDOWS COLOR SCHEME 106 If some fields on configuration panels are difficult to read you can edit the Windows color scheme to make them more legible Perform the following steps to do this Note Configuration panels should be easy to read if you use the Windows default color scheme 1 Choose Start Settings Control Panel to display the Control Panel dialog o 5 o lt 0 e 3 Choose Control Panel gt Display to display the Display Properties dialog Click on the Appearance tab o N Choose the desired item from the Item box The Color box displays the current color assigned to that item 5 Click on the down arrow to the right of the displayed color to choose a new color from the Color box You might change the M enu Selected Items and Window Text colors so they contrast 6 Click on Save As to save the changes and display the Save Scheme dialog with the current color scheme name 7 Click on OK to save the changes to the current color scheme Or Delete the current color scheme name and enter a new one to save the changes to another name Then choose OK to display the new color scheme 8 Click on OK to exit the Display Properties dialog FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 285 USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Archiving Error Messages ARCHIVING ERROR MESSAGES This section contains information about setting up F actoryLink to create error message log files Whe
146. GGER SHARED DIGITAL Omron block read trigger OMRN_STATIONO_STATUS SHARED ANALOG Omron logical station 0 status OMRN_WRITE_COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Omron block write complete OMRN_WRITE_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Omron block write disable OMRN_WRITE_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Omron block write state 386 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 2 Tagname Domain Type Description OMRN_WRITE_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Omron block write trigger RTMARG SHARED ANALOG Run Time anager argument RTMARG U USER ANALOG Run Time M anager argument RTMCMD SHARED ANALOG Run Time anager system Command RTMCMD_U USER ANALOG Run Time M anager system Command RTMPWD SHARED MESSAGE Run Time Manger password RTMPWD_U USER MESSAGE Run Time Manger password SECDAY SHARED LONGANA Number of seconds past midnight SECTIME SHARED LONGANA Number of seconds since SECURITYMBX SHARED MAILBOX Mailbox tag to log information collected by security SECYEAR SHARED LONGANA Number of seconds past J anuary 1 SHUTDOWN SHARED DIGITAL Run Time M anager shutdown flag SHUTDOWN_U USER DIGITAL Run Time M anager shutdown flag SIEM_EXCEPTION_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Siemens CP525 exception write disable SIEM_EXCEPTION_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Siemens CP525 exception write trigger SIEM_LPORTO_MSG SHARED MESSAGE Siemens CP525 logical port 0
147. H amp LOGIC TASK DEFINITION Modes Using CML When you use CML you make improvements on applications that use complex loops such as nested IF THEN ELSE clauses or WHILE loops Interpreted mode handles the execution of arithmetic operations fairly quickly but CML adds more functionality for you as an in line function to pass simple parameters and as an embedded C code block to pass complicated parameters Compiled mode is most appropriate when you want e Faster startup and execution for improved performance e Better handling of complex multiple conditional statements Ability to call C functions or to insert C code into procedures e Availability of extensive flow control for the application lt lt Running CML After starting the application e Wait for changes to the trigger elements in the real time database associated with the procedures in the program e Execute the program associated with the trigger when the trigger element is set to 1 ON Executing CML Each time a compiled program is executed CML e Reads or interprets the instructions within the program to determine the actions to perform Executes these actions 91607 pue yen CML Operation CML uses three utilities for specific roles in creating the executables used at run time These utilities are e MKCML e PARSECML e CCCML FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 137 MATH amp LOGIC TASK DEFINITION Modes MKCML TheMKCML
148. HARED MESSAGE Application Security Event FLSECEVENT_U USER MESSAGE Application Security Event FLUSER_S SHARED MESSAGE Application User FLUSER_U USER MESSAGE Application User FL MAINWINNAME U USER MESSAGE FL MAIN window screen tag FL TESTWINNAME USER MESSAGE FL TEST window screen name tag GRAPHCONNTYPE USER ANALOG Graph connection and security type GRAPHMBX SHARED MAILBOX Graphics I nput Mailbox GRAPHMBX U USER MAILBOX Graphics Input Mailbox HISTOGRAM STTIME USER LONGANA HISTOGRAM Y MAX VAL USER FLOAT HISTOGRAM Y MIN VAL USER FLOAT MAIN WINNAME SHARED MESSAGE FL TEST window name for shared iml 366 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 1 109 Tagname Domain Type Description NULL_MSG SHARED MESSAGE Blank message tag M NULL MSG U USER MESSAGE Blank message tag RTMARG SHARED ANALOG Run Time Manager Argument RTMARG U USER ANALOG Run Time Manager Argument x RTMCMD SHARED ANALOG Run Time Manager System Command RTMCMD_U USER ANALOG Run Time Manager System Command z RTMPWD SHARED MESSAGE Run Time Manager Password RTMPWD_U USER MESSAGE Run Time Manager Password SECDAY SHARED LONGANA Number of seconds past midnight SECTIME SHARED LONGANA Number of seconds since Start of Tima SECYEAR SHARED LONGANA Number of seconds past J anuary 1 SHUTDOWN 00 00 00 SHARED DIGITAL Ru
149. HE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Tags This list contains an entry for each instance a tag is referenced in the application The information displayed for each instance is described below Tag Name Tag Dimension CT Domain Task Name CT Name Anim Type Table Name Drawing Record Object Name Column Name Anim Field Sub record Pen Name Logical name assigned toreference the element in the real time database E ach element will be displayed in this list as many times as it is referenced Dimension of the tag if the tag is part of an array Domain where element is referenced FactoryLink module using element Panel name referencing element If this is a drawing type of animation applied to element Table name referencing element If this is a drawing name of drawing referencing element Record number referencing element If this is a drawing object name assigned to object referencing element Column namereferencing the element If this is a drawing name of field in Animation dialog referencing element Sub record referencing element If animation typeis Pen name of pen referencing element 3 Select Exit to exit this list 230 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Tags Searching for a Tag Typically there large number of tags defined in an application Therefore a mechanism for searching for a tag by name is provided Use the following procedur
150. LITIES Utility Messages Can t create directory directory name Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by FactoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you havethe correct version for FactoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardwareis compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur eo co T i lt 7 Error writing to file filename Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by FactoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for F actoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardwareis compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur Out of RAM Cause Nomore memor
151. Link application that is the source of the real time database element These additional characters reduce the maximum length of the original tag name by up to 9 making the maximum length of the original tag name 23 Refer to Communications in the FactoryLink Configuration Guidefor more details If using Scaling and Deadbanding the character count is reduced to 25 When Scaling and Deadbanding is applied to a tag a FactoryLink generated extension of up to 6 characters plus a dot 7 characters maximum is added These additional characters reduce the maximum length of the original tag name by up to 7 making the maxi mum length of the original tag name 25 Refer to Scaling Deadbanding Definitions in the Application Editor Guidefor details on the added extensions If using Scaling and Deadbanding with PowerNet in your enterprise the character count is reduced to 16 If you are not sure if you will be using PowerNet or Scaling and Deadbanding we recommend you define tag names using only 16 characters lt gt Is limited to 16 characters ext Is limited to 16 characters 202 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DEFINING TAGS Tag Naming Guidelines The maximum tag name length including node lt name gt ext and the Separators and is 32 Legal characters for the node name and ext strings are gt 2 gt 48 2 gt 0 9 e These strings cannot begin with a number or contai
152. Link stations in order to share and store files on a network server or use network printers External networking software allowing peer services is sufficient to achieve this goal 120 FactoryLink 6 5 0 6 5 0 LOCAL AREA NETWORKING TASK DEFINITION Local and Remote Stations LOCAL AND REMOTE STATIONS Each station on the network must have a unique station name so FLLAN can identify it Each station views itself as the local station and views all other stations on the network as remote lt lt LABELROOM MIXERROOM views LABELROOM views DESIGNLAB views LABELROOM and MIXERROOM and MIXERROOM and DESIGNLAB as DESIGNLAB as LABELROOM as remote stations remote stations remote stations For example in a network with three stations one station is assigned the name MIXERROOM another is assigned the name LABELROOM and the third is assigned the name DESIGNLAB MIXERROOM views itself as local and views LABELROOM and DESIGNLAB as remote LABELROOM views itself as local and views MIXERROOM and DESIGNLAB as remote and DESIGNLAB views itself as local and views LABELROOM and MIXERROOM as remote HulyJOMJON aJy 2907 FactoryLink 6 5 0 6 5 0 121 LOCAL AREA NETWORKING TASK DEFINITION Network Groups NETWORK GROUPS You can combine one or more stations into groups Grouping permits you to transmit the same data to multiple stations with a single operation A single station can belong to more than on
153. Link task When data is collected and stored in this database other tasks can access and manipulate it When new data is received the older data is overwritten 2 Graphics displays the trend chart 190 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals TRENDING TASK DEFINITION Trending Methodology Figure 103 2 103 Graphics Pa The Graphics task receives data and plots it to a trend chart No other tasks are involved Realtime database Historical Trending Historical trending allows you to chart data from the relational database historically or in real time Following is a sequential list and illustration of events explaining the historical trending operation 1 The real time database receives and stores data from various sources such as a remote device user input or computation results from a FactoryLink task When data is collected and stored in this database other tasks can access and manipulate it The older data is overwritten as new data is received 2 Logger reads the value of specific data elements stored in the real time database and maps the data elements to columns in a disk based relational database table 3 Using an SQL INSERT statement Logger sends the data from the real time database to the disk based relational database via a Historian mail box j 5 5 4 Historian inserts the data the relational database file Once this file the data can be used by other applications
154. Main Menu 215 Math and Logic calculating methodology 132 calling 139 compiled mode 136 compiled procedures 135 configuration tables 133 converting previous versions 134 creating programs 133 interpreted mode 135 modes 135 overview 131 Procedure table 133 switching from IML to CML 136 trigger elements 134 Triggers table 133 uses 132 Variables table 133 M ean of a statistical sample 447 menu bar 215 merging files 244 message 447 messages DDE Windows 101 MKCML 138 modifying linked element DDE Windows 105 module dependencies 401 monitoring 1 466 FactoryLink 6 5 0 FactoryLink 331 network 123 real time database status 343 monochrome 447 Moving Average M oving Range Chart 447 moving screen components 289 multi dimensional arrays 208 multiplatform save 392 403 multiple configuration tables opening 225 multiple platforms on a network 122 multiple user environments 34 Separate applications 34 shared applications 34 N NETBIOS 447 network 447 operating systems 122 new application opening 221 node 447 non grouped non sequenced data logging method 86 non grouped sequenced data logging method 86 NOT 448 np Chart 448 numeric constant 448 O object 448 OLE 2 0 Automation Server configuring 142 overview 141 principles of operation 142 AB CD EF GHI one di mensional arrays defining 207 opening multiple tables 225 new development application 221 operand 448 Operating Characteristics Curve 448 Operat
155. NDMBX SHARED MAILBOX SPR historian mailbox SPVRCVMBX SHARED MAILBOX SPC View Mailbox for Database access SPVRCVMBX U USER MAILBOX SPC View Mailbox for Database access STARTUP SHARED DIGITAL Run Time Manager Startup flag STARTUP_U USER DIGITAL Run Time Manager Startup flag TASKDESC_S SHARED MESSAGE Shared Task Description TASKDESC U USER MESSAGE User Task Description TASKDSTATUS S SHARED MESSAGE Shared Task Status Word TASKDSTATUS U USER MESSAGE User Task Display Status Message TASKMESSAGE S SHARED MESSAGE Shared Task Display Message TASKMESSAGE U SHARED MESSAGE _ User Task Message TASKNAME_S SHARED MESSAGE Shared Task Name TASKNAME_U USER MESSAGE User Task Name TASKSTART S SHARED DIGITAL Shared Task Start Trigger 368 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 1 Tagname Domain Type Description TASKSTART_U USER DIGITAL User Task Start Trigger TASKSTATUS_S SHARED ANALOG Shared Task Status Value TASKSTATUS_U USER ANALOG User Task Status Value TIME SHARED MESSAGE Time HH MM SS TIMEO SHARED MESSAGE Time HH MM SS TOPWINDOW_U USER MESSAGE Current Top Window Name TRENDHISTMBX SHARED MAILBOX TREND Receive mailbox for Historian communications TRENDHISTMBX_U USER MAILBOX TREND Receive mailbox for Historian communication TRENDMBX SHARED MAILBOX Trend Input Mailbox TRENDMBX_
156. Number you enter in the FactoryLink External Device Definitions Table to represent the physical port When using an IBM RIC ARTIC card this number represents a combination of the physical card and the physical port Number that you enter in a Read or Write Table representing the combination of a logical port with a physical station Abbreviation for long analog Data type of a 32 bit signed integer supported by FactoryL ink Abbreviated LONGANA Data type supported by FactoryLink a mailbox element is organized as a queue of mailbox messages and associated message data and consists of variable length and variable structure Prevents an alarm from being activated FactoryLink task that performs mathematical and logical calculations and assigns the results to elements 1 A mathematical expression describing a relationship between two or more variables 2 A function that implements a mathematical operation such as square root or cosine For a list of mathematical functions refer tothe F actoryLink Configuration Guide 446 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals AB CD EF GHI JK LM N OP QRS TUVWXYZ GLOSSARY Mean ofa The average value of some variable The mean is given by the statistical sample following formula where x is the value of the variable to the ith element and n is the number of elements in the sample X tXnt X 1 2 n X n Mean menu Set of choices for functions displayed together overlaying the present
157. OSSARY relational For control chart subgroup of units selected to minimize the subgrouping differences because of assignable causes Samples taken consecutively from a process operating under the same conditions usually meet this requirement relay Electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical circuits relay logic Representation of a program or other logic a form normally used for relays remote station Other station on a network Report Generator FactoryLink task that formats real time database information into a predefined field printed report reserved element See predefined element result table Temporary table containing data selected from an external database row Seerecord run A set of consecutive units sequential in time runtime Period during which a FactoryLink application is operating Run Time TheFactoryLink Graphics task Animated displays with which Graphics the operator interacts when the application is running For this task to be available the Application Editor must be installed run time mode State of the FactoryLink system when an application is operating Run Time FactoryLink task that supervises all other FactoryLink tasks as Manager they operate sample statistics representative group selected from a population used to determine the properties of the population sample size The number of elements or units in a sample sampling process of selecting a rep
158. Persistence is the ability of an element to maintain its value over an indefinite period of time Non persistent elements lose their value when the Run Time Manager exits and shuts down the real time database however the values of persistent elements are written to disk sothey are not affected when the real time database shuts down The job of the Persistence task therefore is to save persistent data The task offers the following features e Runs on all FactoryLink platforms e Lets you configure on a per tag basis or on entire domains which elements are persistent and when their values are saved to disk FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 143 PERSISTENCE TASK DEFINITION Persistence Overview e Saves one or all domain instances to disk while a FactoryLink application is running Allows you to specify either a warm or cold start when initializing a domain instance Cold start initializes all elements to their default values as configured in the Configuration Manager Main Menu Persistent elements are not restored to their previous values but are initialized to their default values Warm start initializes all non persistent elements to their default values just like a cold start and restores all persistent elements in the domain instance to their previously saved values e Uses its own internal disk cache to increase speed and reduce disk I O overhead e Resolves configuration changes to the application Allows you to spec
159. SER domain variables variable data variable specifier variance VERBOSE warm start where clause wild card character window write call write complete write disable JK L MN OP QRS TUVWX YZ GLOSSARY Mathematical function that takes one argument usually placed after it For instance in the expression NOT Overflow the logical negation operator NOT has Overflow as its argument Command issued by an external device independently of FactoryLink to write information to the real time database without requesting the data Collection of elements in the real time database that contain data and tasks available locally to a specific user at run time In a multiuser system each user owns a copy of all the elements in the USER domain See domain SHARED domain Quantities subject to change or variability Concerning the values of a variable as opposed to attribute data ASCII character that represents a replaceable value in a character string See sprintf string The square of the standard deviation A command time option that flags the process to provide debugging information When starting a domain instance the initialization of all non persistent elements to their default value Similar to a cold start and restores all persistent elements to their previously saved values See cold start persistence persistent elements SQL Structured Query Language statement part that specifies a filter for accessing d
160. SHARED ANALOG Telemecanique logical station 0 status TE WRITE COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Telemecanique block write complete TE WRITE DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Telemecanique block write disable TE_WRITE_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Telemecanique block write state TE_WRITE_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Telemecanique block write trigger TIME SHARED MESSAGE Time HH MM SS TIMEO SHARED MESSAGE Time HH MM SS TI EXCEPTION DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Texas Instruments exception write disable TI EXCEPTION TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Texas Instruments exception write trigger TI_LPORTO_MSG SHARED MESSAGE Texas Instruments logical port error message TI READ COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Texas Instruments block read complete TI_READ_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Texas Instruments block read disable TI READ STATE SHARED DIGITAL Texas Instruments block read state TI READ TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Texas Instruments block read trigger TI STATIONO STATUS SHARED ANALOG Texas Instruments logical station 0 status TI WRITE COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Texas Instruments block write complete TI WRITE DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Texas Instruments block write disable TI_WRITE_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Texas Instruments block write state TI_WRITE_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Texas Instruments block write trigger TOPWINDOW_U USER MESSAGE Current top window name TRENDHISTMBX SHARED MAILBOX TREND receive mailbox for historian communications 390 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundame
161. Saving an application Perform the following steps to save an application for a platform specific or multiplatform backup 1 Format initialize the target diskette before starting FLSAVE We recommend using a blank diskette because FLSAVE destroys any applications existing on the diskette 2 Insert the target diskette into the drive 3 Start the FLSAVE utility The F actoryLink Application Save dialog is displayed 4 Specify the following information in the dialog Source Destination Save Application Data Files Specifies the application drive and path The default is c flapp Specifies the destination drive and path The default is aX If you do not specify a filename in the destination path a multiplatform FLSAVE will fail Specifies whether or not to save all application data files To use this option click on the selection box 5 Choose the type of save to perform This can be one of the following Local Backup Local Multiplatform Save File Network Multiplatform Save File Performs a platform specific save Performs a multiplatform save to a local drive Performs a multiplatform save of the current node to a remote node Choose this option if you want to restore the application on a node running FactoryLink under another operating system This option uses the TCP IP executable rcp to copy multiplatform saves between nodes on the network This requires the destination node be configured as a network s
162. U USER MAILBOX Trend Input Mailbox VBLOGDISABLE S SHARED DIGITAL PowerVB debug logging disable VBLOGDISABLE U USER DIGITAL PowerVB debug logging disable YYMMDD SHARED MESSAGE alog_anal SHARED ANALOG Alarm Supervisor analog gt 5 test alog anal limit SHARED ANALOG Alarm Supervisor anal limit value alog anal stat SHARED ANALOG Alog status word alog_ana2 SHARED ANALOG Alarm Supervisor analog lt 5 alarm alog_ana2_stat SHARED ANALOG Alog status word alog_digl SHARED DIGITAL Alarm Supervisor digital test tag alog_dig1_stat SHARED ANALOG Alog status word alog_flp1 SHARED FLOAT Alarm Supervisor lt gt 0 test tag alog_flp1_stat SHARED ANALOG Alog status word alog_lanal SHARED LONGANA Alarm Supervisor gt 12 test tag FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 369 e o O mp lt o FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 1 Tagname Domain Type Description alog 1 stat SHARED ANALOG Alog status word alog lana2 SHARED LONGANA Alarm Supervisor lt 12 test tag alog lana2 stat SHARED ANALOG Alog status word alog reset SHARED DIGITAL Alarm Supervisor test values toO browsembx SHARED MAILBOX Browser historian mailbox brw count USER ANALOG Browse count data brw delete USER DIGITAL Browser delete trigger brw move USER ANALOG Browser
163. UNIX Each array can have up to 65 535 elements For Windows 95 An array can have as many elements as will fit into a 65 535 byte memory segment This number depends on the element s data type The following table lists the maximum number of elements permitted in an array for each data type Table 104 1 Windows Array Maximums Data Type Maximum Elements Digital 4 095 Analog 3 640 104 Long analog 3 276 Floating point 2 730 g z 3 y Message 2 730 storage of data Mailbox FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 209 DEFINING TAGS Using Tags as Triggers USING TAGS AS TRIGGERS Many FactoryLink tasks use tags to trigger actions The examples below just a few of the possibilities You can use the complete status tag in a logger operation to initiate a different logging operation You can use the same tag to trigger multiple operations For example you can define a single tag that triggers multiple operations at the start of each hour e Triggering be based on the fact that an element s value has changed e Triggering can be based on a combination of the trigger element s value and the value of its change status flag F or example if you are using a digital element to trigger an action its change status flag must be 1 ON and its value must be 1 ON for the operation to be triggered e You can define triggers using the Interval and E vent timer module You can configure function keys a
164. Utilities Exit Help F1 The following pulldown menu is displayed Main Menu Ctl M Mext Screen Ctl N Previous Screen Ctl P Object List X ref List Domain List Search Next Tag Attributes Ctrl T Field Choices Curl K 3 Choose Field Choices This displays a list of your choices DATA TIME SEOLIENCE GROUP 56 5 2 5 760 5 4 Choose your option and press Esc Your choice is updated to the field you press Ctrl K to display this list FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 239 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Editing Configuration Panels EDITING CONFIGURATION PANELS FactoryLink provides some editing tools to aid in editing configuration panels Access these tools by choosing Edit from the configuration panel menu bar One of the following pulldown menus is displayed Insert Insert Delete Delete Copy Ctrl Ins Copy Ctrl Ins Cut Shift Del Cut Shift Del Edit pulldown menu Paste S Shift Ins Paste Shiftelns from text entry panel Search Edit pulldown menu Reset mark from Structured Panels The following sections describe the available editing functions Inserting a Blank Line 1 Position the cursor on the line below where you want the blank line 2 Choose Insert from the Edit pulldown menu A blank lineis inserted above the current line Deleting a Line Entry 1 Position the cursor on the line you want to delete 2 Choose Delete
165. _gdeclare SHARED DIGITAL IML test trigger for global declare var iml_iftest SHARED DIGITAL IML if test trigger value iml Idedare SHARED DIGITAL IML local declare test trigger iml_mathfun SHARED DIGITAL IML math function test iml_out SHARED MESSAGE Iml information output tag iml_out_u USER MESSAGE __ Iml output message for test iml_strfun SHARED DIGITAL IML string function test trigger iml_trig_s SHARED DIGITAL Iml test proc trigger iml_trig_u USER DIGITAL I ml test proc trigger iml while SHARED DIGITAL IML while structure test trigger imlu call USER DIGITAL IML procedure call trigger imlu const USER DIGITAL IML constant test trigger imlu gdedare USER DIGITAL IML global declare variable trigger imlu_iftest USER DIGITAL IML IF structure test trigger imlu_Ideclare USER DIGITAL IML local declare trigger imlu_mathfun USER DIGITAL IML math function test trigger imlu_strfun USER DIGITAL IML string function test trigger imlu_while USER DIGITAL IML while structure trigger lan begin SHARED DIGITAL LAN begin connections trigger lan local file SHARED DIGITAL LAN local file creation done from report gen lan localname SHARED MESSAGE LAN local name lan math SHARED DIGITAL LAN timer trigger for sending values lan_recv_ana SHARED ANALOG LAN reveive analog tags lan_recv_dig SHARED DIGITAL LAN receive digital tags 374 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW
166. a structured BASI C like syntax e Executes in the background with no operator intervention at run time e Supports both interpreted and compiled Math amp Logic IML and CML e Supports block structures looping constructs and callable mathematical functions e Supports automatic conversion of data types e Supports multi dimensional arrays lt lt This chapter introduces the operational concepts configure Math Logic operations Refer to Configuring Math amp Logic on page 89 in the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for information on procedures to configure this task Use Math amp Logic on 269 in the F actoryLink Reference Guide for a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages 91607 pue yN FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 131 MATH amp LOGIC TASK DEFINITION Uses USES Math amp Logicis called from other applications to perform functions such as e Manipulate real time database elements and local variables e Batch control e Performing computational calculations e Comparing logically two values stored in database elements e Setting the value of an element to a value chosen by end user at run time e Controlling the system activity resulting from end user interaction with on screen buttons e Validating end user input e Controlling screen changes e Controlling information flow into and out of an application PROCEDURES Math
167. actoryLink real time database across the network to the FLLAN on the remote station The FLLAN on the remote station writes these values to the real time database on the receiving station lt lt Real time Real time database Data transfer database on STATION1 on STATION2 FLLAN uses two types of send operations e Block Send Sends the values of all elements configured as a block together An event in FactoryLink triggered block sends If data changes frequently and at regular intervals send the data in triggered blocks because sending by exception can jam the network with data at irregular intervals Block send is most efficient when the application sends a group of elements at one time tothe remote station s e Exception Send Sends the values of elements that have changed since the last send Use this method if the elements in the local station real time database change infrequently You minimize network traffic if you send only the values that change HulyJOMJON Lay 2907 FactoryLink 6 5 0 6 5 0 119 LOCAL AREA NETWORKING TASK DEFINITION Sending and Receiving Data Receiving Values from Remote Stations During a receive operation FLLAN receives values from a remote station and stores them in the FactoryLink real time database as elements Real time Real time database database on STATION1 Data transfer on STATION2 You do not need the module FLLAN on two or more Factory
168. actoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals PROGRAMMABLE COUNTERS TASK DEFINITION Principles of Operation Example One In this example counting is triggered to count bottles 20 per case The Preset Value start count is 0 and the Terminal Value count limit for the number of bottles per case is 20 The Increment Value of 1 represents one bottle When counting is triggered each bottle counted increases the current count of bottles starting with 0 in the case by 1 until the case contains 20 bottles until the Current Value reaches the Terminal Value of 20 When the case contains 20 bottles when the Current Value reaches the Terminal Value the Counter task indicates the case is full by force writing a 1 ON tothe Positive Output element and force writing a 0 OFF tothe Negative Output element At this point if AutoClear Y ES the Current Value element is reset to 0 the Preset Value and the count can begin again If AutoClear NO the current Value element remains at 20 the Terminal Value until another task writes a 1 ON to the clear element indicating the count can begin again The count does not continue past 20 the Terminal Value Each time the bottle count reaches 20 the Terminal Value the Counter task again force writes a 1 ON anda 0 OFF to the Positive and Negative Output elements When AutoClear YES or when the Clear element is triggered the bottle count is reset to 0 the Preset Value ready for a repeat of the counting p
169. ady running Action Nothing the task will continue to run Cause Theindicated task is not enabled on the FactoryLink key 354 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Run time Manager Messages Action Contact your FactoryLink sales representative to obtain the proper key and or option 7 FLE_BAD_ARGUMENT Cause Internal error a task tried to pass an invalid argument to the real time database Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section 9 FLE BAD TAG Cause The CTs need to be rebuilt Action Rebuild the CTs by running CTGEN 10 FLE NULL POINTER Cause Internal error a task gave out a null pointer Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section 12 FLE_PROC_TABLE_FULL Cause 31 tasks are running in the chosen domain Only 31 tasks can run in each domain at once Action Noaction required do not try torun morethan 31 tasks per domain at a time 13 FLE BAD PROC NAME Cause Oneofthefollowing conditions caused this error The CTs need to be rebuilt 108 Action Perform the corresponding action Run CTGEN to rebuild the CTs If this does not solve the problem proceed to step 2 Cause A task name used in the application has not been entered in the Task Name field of the System Configuration Table Action Open the System Configuration Table from the Configuration Manager Main Menu and ensurethe names of all tasks in the application are present
170. ags changes Note If Scaling and Deadbanding is configured from the Application Editor the system automatically assigns default tag names for raw and scaled values deadbanding and scaling lock functions even if entered as a constant H owever if Scaling and Deadbanding is configured from within the Configuration Manager the designer creates only specified tags When a value is written to a raw value tag its related scaled value tag is updated accordingly This is a raw to scaled conversion When a value is written to a scaled value tag its raw value tag is updated accordingly This is a scaled to raw conversion Prior to changing a range tag raw value tag or scaled value tag the function should be disabled using the Scaling Lock Tag When the Scaling Lock Tag has a non zero value changes made to the tag are not propagated to their related members After the changes to that function are made and the funcion is re enabled the current raw value is scaled and written to the scaled value tag Any changes to the ranges are applied to the scaled value as well Deadbanding which applies to raw to scaled conversion but not to scaled to raw conversion may be specified in one of two ways e asan absolute ABS number of Engineering Units EUs e asa percentage PCT of the scaled range During raw to scaled conversion a newly calculated scaled value that does not exceed the deadband is not written to the database If deadbanding is being
171. al arrays 208 one dimensional arrays 207 Defining Element Arrays 207 deleting data 83 elements from a watch list 326 AB CD EF GHI group data 85 line entries from a configuration panel 240 tag definitions 233 development environment 22 digital 438 directory 438 discrete 438 display controls 307 display object 438 Distributed Alarm Logger alarm distribution 57 alarm grouping 50 alarm states 49 child alarm delay 52 child recovery delay 53 criteria establishing 45 Global Hide tags 55 Group Hidetags 55 hide alarms 55 Individual Hide tags 56 logbook 60 logging alarms 58 methodology 44 overview 43 parent child relationship 51 domain 438 454 457 domain list viewing 236 domains 31 changing associations 283 domain selection 215 domain structure 32 run time tasks 33 dynamic 438 Dynamic Data Exchange see DDE Windows and DDE OS 2 97 JK L MN OP QRS TUV WX YZ Dynamic Logging Control panel 96 E echoing a comment in output 341 editing configuration panels 240 task information 281 editing a tag 206 editor 438 element arrays defining 207 elements adding to a watch list 325 deleting from a watch list 326 finding in a watch list 326 viewing cross reference list 229 ending a batch file 342 environment variables 38 error messages clearing 245 utilities 412 Event and Interval Timer see Timer 109 event charts 194 indexing 81 Excel 105 exception data 151 Exception Logging Filtering 94 exception send 119 executi
172. alidate Clear Err The following section describes the available file management functions Saving File Contents Choose Save from the File pulldown menu to save the file as it is currently displayed To avoid losing large amounts of data as the result of a power failure or other unexpected occurrence save the file often The Save operation does not validate the data Merging a File 1 Position the cursor on theline above the line where you want to insert the text file 2 Choose Merge from the File pulldown menu The following dialog is displayed Enter the firmam 244 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Managing Text entry Panel Files 3 Specify the name of the file to merge with the current file and press the Enter key Checking Syntax Choose Validate from the File pulldown menu to check the current file for correct syntax If invalid entries exist an error message is displayed and the errors are highlighted Clearing Errors Choose Clear Err from the File pulldown menu to clear all validation error flags from the current file Clear Err does not remove or correct the errors It simply removes the highlighting from the errors and makes it easier to read the display Changing Font Size The default font for text entry panels is Courier and the font size is 20 You can change the font size using the FLFONT environment variable For example to change the font size to 30 enter the following co
173. amentals GETTING HELP USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Getting Help 1 Choose Help from the main menu bar or configuration panel menu bar Hl Configuration Manager Application View Utilities lel x Exit Help F1 One of the following pulldown menus is displayed Panel Help Fi Panel Help Help pulldown menu Extended Help Extended Help from text entry panels Field Help Error Help Field Error Help Help pulldown menu from Structured Panels 2 Choose one of the following depending on the kind of help you want Panel Help Extended Help Field Help Field Error Help Provides a brief explanation of the active configuration panel Provides general information about using the Configuration Manager Provides a brief explanation of the current field Provides help on errors Provides information on any errors reported for this panel 105 y JE 5 mc 5 o FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 243 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Managing Text entry Panel Files MANAGING TEXT ENTRY PANEL FILES FactoryLink provides tools to aid in managing the files created using text entry panels such as in Math amp Logic or Report Generator Perform the following steps to access these tools 1 Choose File from the text entry panel menu bar Report Generator Format MY fmt File Edit Exit Help The following pulldown menu is displayed Save Merge V
174. amp Logic coordinated with the functions defined in the procedures F or example if a procedure is dependent on data from an external device start EDI before Math amp Logic Priority Processing priority for the task The priority is a three digit hexadecimal value which is divided into two parts Caution Unless you are knowledgeable and experienced in setting priorities in the operating system you might decide to leave the priority at the default value 276 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION First part the 2 in 201 Hex value that specifies the operating system class of priority as listed below This part is inactive in 106 Windows 0 Current class unchanged 1 Idle 2 default Regular 3 Time critical Note Do not set any FactoryLink task to priority class or 1 Use caution in assigning a task with priority dass 3 becausea time critical task takes priority over a foreground task A foreground task takes priority over regular tasks at run time Second part the 01 in 201 Two digit hexadecimal value 00 to 1F O 31 decimal that specifies the priority within the priority dass listed above Thehigher the number the higher the priority within the class Hexadecimal value 00 to 1F default 201 Refer tothe appropriate operating system guide for programming for further information about processing priority within an operating system Third part the 01 in 201 Two digit hexadecima
175. aneously interact with the run time system Task Independence E ach user has access to the same FactoryLink run time tasks such as Graphics Math amp Logic and Statistical Process Control but is able to run these tasks independently from the tasks other users are running Users can share data to perform different real time tasks within the same application lt lt Domains for Run time Tasks Run time tasks are associated with a domain The domain controls whether or not the run time task can share data and which task uses data unique to a user Choosing the appropriate domain for a task in a multi user application is critical The defaults that provide the best performance for most applications are listed in the following table Table 83 1 Optimal Domain Selection Shared Domain User Domain Both Domains File Manager Server External Device SPC View RTMON Interface LAN SPR DALOG Historian Logger SPC Logger Print Spooler FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 33 OVERVIEW Multiple user Environments During application planning review these domain defaults to verify compatibility with a specific application s needs When an application has special requirements you can run the task a different domain except for the EDI task which must be run in the shared domain In addition to these domain defaults the Main Menu has a domain selection feature you must set before configuring each t
176. anges and exit the window Choose Cancel to return to the edit window File is too big Cause Not enough available memory to load the text file Action Closeany unnecessary windows or programs Add memory tothe system if this happens often filename not in key list Cause Astring has been entered that is not in the key file FLINK KEY xxx KEY specified in the AC file Action Modify the string to match or add the string to the key file The string must be in the same caseas it is in the key file Flag must be vbru Cause A flag of other than v b r or u was found in the AC file Action Deletetheinvalid flag Grace period has expired Software must be registered Cause FactoryLink was installed without registering it within the 10 day grace period Action Run FLKEYVAL and follow the instructions for registration 262 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages error while trying to access the domain file Cause Theindex or file may be damaged Action Contact Customer Support error while trying to access the tag file Cause Theindex or file may be damaged Action Exit the Main Menu and try again If this doesn t work delete the index file MDX and rebuild it error while trying to access the XREF file Cause Theindex or file may be damaged Action Contact Customer Support Internal error Cause Either the operating system third pa
177. apter 97 PowerNet Task Definition Data collected or computed by FactoryL ink is stored in data elements in the real time database Tag names defined in the Application Editor or in Configuration M anager panels identify these el ements Real time database elements can be shared among F actoryLink applications running on the same or a different workstation node using PowerN et lt lt FactoryLink application can act as a client server This application can serve other FactoryLink applications by providing needed information As a client the application can use information provided by other F actoryLink applications On platforms where F actoryLink supports multiple applications running on the same computer you can run multiple instances of PowerNet SeeFactoryLink Fundamentals for a discussion of multiple user environments This chapter introduces PowerNet and associated terms definitions and concepts This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure PowerN et operations Refer to Configuring Network Software on page 593 in the FactoryLink Configuration Guidefor information on procedures to configure this task Use PowerN et on page 303 in the FactoryLink Reference Guidefor a quick descri ption of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages 9N49MOd FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 149 POWERNET TASK DEFINITION Using PowerNet with the FLDEMO Applica
178. apter99 Programmable Counters Task Definition Use the Programmable Counters task to provide count per unit of time measurements and to provide event delays such as defining a trigger to unlock a door and then specifying a delay before the door locks again lt lt A programmable counter is group of elements with values that work together to perform a count Outputs from programmable counters can be used to provide input to Math amp Logic programs or other FactoryLink tasks or to trigger Math amp Logic programs There is limit except the amount of memory to the number of programmable counters that can be defined The Programmable Counters task uses either the SHARED or USER domain The use of programmable counters requires an understanding of change status flags Refer to FactoryLink Fundamentals for this discussion This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure Programmable Counters operations Refer to Programmable Counters on page 45 in the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for information on procedures to configure this task Use Programmable Counters on page 459 in the F actoryLink Reference Guide for a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages S19 1uno2 e qeuiureJDoJ4d FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 163 PROGRAMMABLE COUNTERS TASK DEFINITION Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION A programmable
179. as alphabetical before viewing them indexing When planning your database tables determine if you will use these options so you can specify appropriate columns Grouping Data When you log data with a group association you can log morethan one set of data tothe same table if you create a column that contains the group associated with each row of data Ordering Data FactoryLink permits you to log grouped and non grouped data with or without a sequence or order number If you elect to associate a sequence number with rows of data your table structure must include a column that contains the sequence number associated with the row of data Indexing Records are displayed in a relational database table in the order they were added n some cases you may want to create an index to retrieve the records in another order An index uses the values in one or more of the fields to reorganize the records in a database file The field or fields selected for indexing are called the index key s 186 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals SCHEMA TASK DEFINITION When a table is indexed an index file containing the indexed order is created however the actual record order in the database file remains unchanged Accessing indexed records is faster than accessing non indexed records Assigning Names to Schemas Schema names are assigned on the Schema Control panel and each schema definition can be used as the structure for more than one table
180. ask If the domain chosen during configuration does not match the default set for the domain at run time the application will not run as intended You must configure trending in the user domain if it is going to run in the user domain MULTIPLE USER ENVIRONMENTS The UNIX operating system supports multiple users You can configure use by multiple users in one of two ways e Multiple users can share the same applicati on e Multiple users can access separate applications FactoryLink s platform independence lets you create applications on single user computer systems such as Windows OS 2 and port them to on multi user systems Multiple Shared Applications In a multi user application each user executes in their own user domain each user domain has its own copy of user data but shares data from the shared domain Multiple Separate Applications In a multi user application each application has its own Real Time Database and does not share data between them Multiple apg irzirticaris that cle stase fanaa y Syxian 34 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals OVERVIEW FactoryLink Directory Organization FACTORYLINK DIRECTORY ORGANIZATION All FactoryLink files are organized into two main directories e FactoryLink application directory Contains all FactoryLink application files e FactoryLink system directory Contains all FactoryLink program files FactoryLink Application Directory Subdirectori
181. ask at run time This information is displayed on the Run Time Manager screen Name of an element that triggers provides the mechanism for starting the task If the Flags field contains an R for this task at run time a 1 ON is written to this element This causes Start Trigger Task Status Task Message USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Enter an alphanumeric string of between 1 to 32 characters to define the name of the process task such as RECIPE ALOG or TIMER Do not modify these default names For an external program define a program name Enter an alphanumeric string of between 1 to 80 characters to define the description of the task listed in the Task Name field For example the description of the SPOOL task is Print Spooler FactoryLink to start the task automatically If the Flags field for this task does not contain an R the task does not start until the operator writes a 1 ON tothis element by clicking on the task name on the Run Time Manager screen The data type for this tag can be digital or analog depending on the kind of data stored in thetag The default is digital Name of an element that contains the analog status of the task This element can havethe following analog values 0 Inactive 1 Active 2 Error 3 Starting 4 Stopping The data type for this tag is analog Name of an element to which the task listed in the Task Name field writes any run time messages These messages appear in the Mes
182. at creates changes manipulates and deletes objects of a given kind See button block key See protection device Data structure occupying memory in the F actoryLink real time database 438 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals AB CD EF GHI JK LM N OP QRS TUVWXYZ GLOSSARY element name Name you assign toa real time database element used during development of an application error message Display of ASCII text or numeric code indicating that the system has detected an abnormal situation or incorrect data event timer Digital element that initiates or controls a system function at run time whose value is forced to 1 ON more than once every twenty four hours for example M onday at 8 00 am EWMA Chart Graphic display of a statistic that gives less and less weight to data as the data gets older and older A plotted point on an EWMA chart can be given a long memory thus providing a chart similar tothe ordinary CUSUM chart or it can be given a short memory thus providing a chart analogous to a Shewhart X Bar chart EWMA 3 My 3 where Observed value at time t Predicted value at time t oldEWMA e y Observed error at run time oft 1 0 lt A lt 1 Depth of memory of EWMA exception Basic FactoryLink architecture whereby a real time database processing element is read written only when its value has changed See change status flag exception write Write operation that transfe
183. ata element in the real time database If the value for the element meets the criteria established for alarming an alarm message is displayed on the Alarm Viewer screen for the FactoryL ink operator The element is then monitored throughout the alarm cycle in the Alarm Viewer until the element value no longer meets the alarm criteria Thealarm criteria can be set to require an acknowledgment from you or not The acknowledgment provides a means to ensure you know the alarm has been generated because the alarm does not dear from the display until it has been acknowledged If you want to preserve the time of alarm alarm message operator who acknowledged it and logbook entries for historical purposes you can configure Distributed Alarm Logging to send the alarm data to a disk based relational database via an Historian The frequency Distributed Alarm Logging logs data to the relational database depends on the return to normal for each of the elements being monitored o 3 m o e e 2 You can configure Distributed Alarm Logging to distribute the alarm messages along a network if you want the alarms to be viewed on more than one workstation In this way alarms that relate to multiple operators can be seen across the network If the alarms are being logged and acknowledged then your name or the name of the operator who acknowledged the alarm and the node name where it was acknowledged are included in the alarm data sent to the re
184. ata for historical purposes FactoryLink has two loggers Data Point and Database Both tasks read data from the real time database and send it to the disk based relational database via a FactoryLink Historian The Historian used for this transfer depends on the relational database receiving the data The database can be either the dBASE V compatible database that can be purchased with FactoryLink or a third party relational database such as Oracle Refer to Historian Task Definition on page 115 for details on which third party relational databases are compatible with F actoryL ink Data Point Logging simplifies the task of logging data by providing pre configured tables Because the tables are pre configured Data Point Logging can only be used to store shared numeric value tags For all other types of tags Database Logging should be used Only one tag is logged to the database at a time Multiple tags can be recorded to the same database and sorted later if necessary If information about the state of multiple tags at a particular trigger point is desired the Database Logging task should be used If you are uncertain whether to use Data Point or Database Logging for your task refer to Overview on page 21 for an explanation and comparison of both logging tasks eh t U o 3 et r e e 3 This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure Data Point Logging operations Refer to Configuring
185. ata in a relational database Symbolic character usually an asterisk taken to mean any character in a character string Area occupying either part or all of a screen on which program information is presented Operation that writes a new value to an element and if the new valueis different from the previous value sets all of that element s change status flags to 1 ON See Block Write Complete See Block Write Disable FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 457 111 9 o o lt A DE F GH GLOSSARY write priority write state write trigger X Bar x and R Chart x and Sigma Chart XOR XREF cross reference database table I JK LE MN OP QR STU VW X Y Z See Block Write Priority See Block Write State See Block Write Trigger 1 Mean or average represented by the symbol x and the formula shown 2 Type of real time and historical control chart found in FactoryLink SPC See Sigma EWMA etc _ _ Sum of the values in subgroup X a ARNE TG a e eg iS RR EL n Total number of values in subgroup For variable data control charts for the average and range of subgroups of data For variable data control charts for the average and standard deviation sigma of subgroups of data Abbreviation for the Exclusive OR a binary logical operator that yields a value of TRUE 1 if one but not both of its two arguments is TRUE non zero Configuration M anager mai
186. ata is entered in configuration tables through either structured panels or text entry panels This section discusses structured panels and their characteristics Configuration tables are typically built using structured panels Each table has one or more panels Each panel contains a number of data entry fields formatted in columns ui Database Logging Control lof x Edit View Utilities Exit Help Field Names Log Name Log Historian Trigger Mailbox Data Entry Command Buttons Cancel Enter Exit Next Prev n ati 2 Structured configuration panels contain the following areas Menu bar The menu bar provides access to a group of tools you can use to manipulate or review configuration and application data Field names This area lists the names of fields pertaining to the configuration table 105 Data entry You type data for each table entry in this area Use the following keypad keys to move around in the data entry section Press TAB to move forward from one field to the next If the current field is the last field in a row the cursor moves to the first field of the next row Press SHIFT TAB to move backward from one field to the next If the current field is thefirst field in a row the cursor moves tothe last field of the previous row Usethe and J keys to move up or down within a column in a panel You can optionally use a mouse to choose a field
187. ation Data Point Logging is best for situations when you want to Loga tag only when its value changes Use preconfigured tables and eliminate the time spent setting up tables e Beabletoindex on log time or tag name or both Sort all logs of a tag in order of occurrence e Configure a tag to be a dynamic pen on a trend chart e Dynamically change the list of tags being logged during run time Database L ogging is best for situations when you want to Logall tags when any tag changes or is triggered e Simultaneously log a group of like logically associated tags e Group data logged based on some criteria e Configure a table column to be a dynamic pen on a trend chart For example if you had a tank in which you were monitoring the process temperature and had a single probe in the tank you would probably want to use Data Point Logging to track the tag value If you had six probes in the same tank and you wanted to seethe value returned form each probe at a given point in time you would probably want to use the Database Logging task 28 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals OVERVIEW FactoryLink Modules FACTORYLINK MODULES FactoryLink is comprised of modules with unique functions General Modules e Application Editor Draws and animates graphical user interfaces to the FactoryLink application e Batch Recdipe Stores recipes on disk for manufacturing a product These recipes can be sent to an external device at a
188. ation Factory Link Aion San Comigenion Appiceion Fanorink 2 Double dick the left button to open Run Time Manager From a Command Line Enter the following command at the system prompt to open Run Time M anager from an OS 2 command line flrun options where options is one or more of the options specified in Setting Up Program Arguments on page 293 On UNIX Platform Perform the following procedure to open the Run Time M anager if you are running FactoryLink on a UNIX platform 1 Open two operating system windows one to run FactoryLink in the shared domain and another to run it in the user domain You must open the shared domain before you open the user domain 2 Ensurethe FLAPP FLINK FLDOMAIN FLNAME AND FLUSER environment variables are set for the shared domain If not set them How you do this depends on whether you are using a C shell or a Korn or Bourne shell 300 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MANAGER Accessing Run Time Manager If you are using shell enter the following commands at the system prompt of the shell where you are starting the shared domain setenv FLINK flink_dir setenv FLAPP flapp_dir setenv FLDOMAIN domain setenv FLNAME app_name setenv FLUSER user_name If you are using a Korn or Bourne shell enter the following commands at the system prompt of the shell where you are starting the shared domain FLINK flink dir FLAPP flapp dir export FLAPP
189. ation Manager Messages Can t create help dialog Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set to FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by F actoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for F actoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardware is compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur Can t Cut Copy Block in progress Cause A cut operation was attempted while a copy block was in progress Action Complete the copy or cancel it with Esc or Cancel Can t cut copy without an enter Cause A cut or copy operation was attempted but Enter key was not pressed Acion Complete the operation by pressing the Enter key or cancel it with Esc or Cancel Can t delete database rows without an enter Cause Thecurrent panel contains invalid information The system will not function further until the validation errors are removed Action Choose Cancel to correct the validation errors or press the Esc key to erase all input sincethe last validation Can t delete from read only table Cause A delete operation was attempted on a read only table Actio
190. ations In a write operation the DDE Client task through the DDE protocol initiates a write operation to the DDE server item names specified by the user Read Write table FactoryLink write operations can be of two types e Block Write or Triggered Writes the values of all the elements specified in a Read Write table Inatriggered block write as part of the configuration of a Read Writetable the user spedifies a trigger element in the real time database to initiate write operations When the value of this trigger element is 1 ON and has changed since the last scan the DDE task performs a write tothe DDE server item names you specified in the Read Write table Triggered block write operations allow the DDE dient to achieve maximum performance by transmitting the minimum number of write commands necessary to collect the data specified in the Read Write table e Exception Write or Not Triggered Writes only real time database values that have changed or values of elements whose change status flags have been set since the last time the task scanned the real time database You can configure as many Read Write tables as available memory allows with the number of entries in each table also limited only by available memory Mo 2 lt 5 aa o o M Jg Os g m 2 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 107 DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE DDE TASK DEFINITION Setting Up DDE Client SETTING UP DDE CLIENT Perform the following ste
191. cal station 0 status AB_WRITE_COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley block write complete AB_WRITE_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley block write disable AB_WRITE_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley block write state AB_WRITE_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Allen Bradley block write trigger ALLOG_ACTIVE_COUNT SHARED ANALOG Alarm Logger active alarm count ALLOG_AUDIBLE_COUNT SHARED ANALOG Alarm Logger audible alarm count ALLOG_HIST_MBX SHARED MAILBOX Alarm Logger historian mailbox ALLOG_PRINT_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Alarm Logger print active alarms trigger ALLOG_UNACK_COUNT SHARED ANALOG Alarm Logger unacknowledged alarm count ALVIEW_AREA USER MESSAGE Alarm Viewer area filter ALVIEW_BANNER USER MESSAGE Alarm Viewer banner message ALVIEW_BANNER_ACK USER DIGITAL Alarm Viewer banner acknowledge ALVIEW_BANNER_BG USER ANALOG Alarm Viewer banner background attribute ALVIEW_BANNER_BL USER ANALOG Alarm Viewer banner blink attribute ALVIEW_BANNER_FG USER ANALOG Alarm Viewer banner foreground attribute FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 379 e o O mp lt o FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 2 Tagname Domain Type Description ALVIEW_GROUP USER MESSAGE Alarm Viewer group filter ALVIEW_GROUP_ACK USER DIGITAL Alarm Viewer current group acknowledge ALVIEW_LOGBOOK USER MESSAGE Alarm Viewer logbook entry
192. cation Multiplatform restore The multiplatform method transfers an application from a FactoryLink system running on one operating system to a FactoryLink system running on a different operating system The multiplatform method expands a F actoryL ink application from a single image file of the application Use the multiplatform restore when transporting applications across platforms If the application you arerestoring was built under a FactoryLink version prior to 4 3 your current operating system platform may not allow file names directory names and graphic screens to be longer than 8 characters not including the file name extension Starting with 4 3 file names directory names and graphic screens cannot exceed 8 characters If they do the application will not restore on FactoryLink 4 3 or higher Only restore a multiplatform save to the same F actoryLink version from which it was saved because configuration data may be lost Restoring an application Perform the following steps to restore an application from a platform specific or multiplatform backup 392 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLREST 1 Insert the source diskette into the drive eo co 2 Start the FLREST utility The FactoryLink Application Restore dialog is displayed 3 Specify the following information in the dialog Source Specifies the application drive and path The default is Destination Specifies the destination dr
193. caused by one of the tasks in the system in use and not by your application For this reason we recommend you use the following guidelines to correct an internal error 1 Try to determine which task is sending the error by shutting down FactoryLink restarting it and starting each task one at a time 2 Write down any error messages displayed on the Run time Manager screen and their corresponding tasks Thetask having the problem may generate a seemingly unrelated error message 3 Contact the supplier of thetask in error if thetask in error is an external task 4 Contact Customer Support if thetask in error is a FactoryLink task 5 Contact Customer Support if the task cannot be identified 360 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 109 FactoryLink Utilities eo co FactoryLink provides several utilities for general maintenance These are listed below e FLNEW Creates a newF actoryLink application with a baseline configuration e FLREST Restores a saved FactoryLink application FLSETLNG Sets FactoryLink applications to run in a specified language FLTEST Use for testing the installation e FLDEMO Use for application development ideas e FLCONV Converts an application from its current environment to a new environment when upgrading versions or migrating among operations e FLSAVE Saves FactoryLink application to diskette or to another directory on the hard drive e CTGEN Rebuilds CT files
194. cess FLOCX FactoryLink Connection Component Chapter 96 Persistence Task Definition Usethe Persistence task to save the values of an active FactoryLink application at predetermined times so if FactoryLink shuts down unexpectedly useful data is not lost When you restart F actoryLink with the warm start command line option the Run Time Manager restores the last save of the real time database from the persistence save file lt lt PERSISTENCE OVERVIEW The memory based real time database represents the current state values of elements The real time database is a collection of domain instances Elements in the database may have default values that are placed into the domain instance when it is initialized The values of the elements in a domain instance are lost when the domain instance is closed When the domain instance is opened again its elements are initialized to their default values This can be a problem if FactoryLink unexpectedly shuts down because of an event such as a power loss or a faulty process Useful information can be lost because of the initialization of the real time database to its default values when the system is restarted Since most of the information in F actoryLink applications is the accumulation of data over time you cannot recover this data unless it is saved Persistence provides a way of saving the state of an active F actoryLink application o2uelsiSJad
195. cking on this icon 298 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MANAGER Accessing Run Time Manager ACCESSING RUN TIME MANAGER How you open the Run Time Manager depends on your operating system platform Once opened Run Time Manager acts the same for all platforms The method for starting Run Time M anager for each platform follows On Windows NT and Windows 95 Platforms 1 Click on the FactoryLink icon from the Desktop Manager to display the FactoryLink 6 5 0 program group Double click here to start the Run Time Manager If you have more than one F actoryL ink application be sure to open the program group for the desired application 2 Click on the Start FactoryLink icon This starts both the shared and user domains Or Double click on the Start FactoryLink icon on the Desktop Manager On OS 2 Platform If you are running FactoryLink on OS 2 Windows operating system you can open the Run Time Manager from either the Desktop Manager or the command line Both methods start the shared and user domains The two methods are described bel ow FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 299 107 Cc m 9e 2 JJ ftc 8 3 USING RUN TIME MANAGER Accessing Run Time Manager From Desktop Manager 1 Choose FactoryLink OS 2 from the Desktop Manager menu to display the applications available with the F actoryLink group double click here to start the Run Time B 4 E Jb Manager Applic
196. counter current value for 1 ctr_value2 SHARED ANALOG counter current value for 2 ctr_value2_u USER ANALOG counter current value for 2 ctr_value3 SHARED ANALOG counter current value for 3 ctr_value3_u USER ANALOG counter current value for 3 demo belt USER ANALOG Demo screen belt demo belt bot xpos USER ANALOG Demo screen belt bottom X position demo belt top xpos USER ANALOG Demo screen belt top X position demo blue botvalve USER DIGITAL Demo screen blue pipe bottom valve demo blue pipe USER ANALOG Demo screen blue pipe level demo blue pour USER DIGITAL Demo screen blue pipe pouring demo blue topvalve USER DIGITAL Demo screen blue pipe top valve demo pick USER ANALOG Demo screen picker demo pick xpos USER ANALOG Demo screen picker X position demo pick ypos USER ANALOG Demo screen picker Y position demo tank USER ANALOG Demo screen tank level demo tank level USER MESSAGE Demo screen tank level output value FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 371 e T o lt r 2 S FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 1 Tagname Domain Type Description demo_tank_level_fg USER ANALOG Demo screen tank level output foreground color demo_tank_level_xpos USER ANALOG Demo screen tank level output X position demo_tank_xpos USER ANALOG Demo screen tank X position demo_tank_ypos USER ANALOG Demo screen tank Y position demo tr
197. ctoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Whereflink dir defines the full path induding the drive name of the directory containing the FactoryLink program files Whereflapp dir defines the full path including the drive name of the directory containing your application files Where domain defines the domain you are starting This can either be shared or user On single user platforms domain should be user This starts both domains On multi user platforms domain is the domain you want started in the window You must specify two windows one for each domain Where app name defines the name of the application to start which points to a Real Time Database OVERVIEW Using Format Specifiers Table 83 2 Environmental Variables Variable Description FLUSER use name Where user name defines the logical user name FLOPT opt dir Where opt_dir defines the full path including the drive name of the directory containing the F actoryLink s license information lt lt When using environment variables path names you can enter the of the environment variable surrounded by braces and FactoryLink extends the pathname using the default setting USING FORMAT SPECIFIERS Format specifiers allow you to define the format for all or part of an output string The following FactoryLink tasks support the use of format specifiers e File Manager e Batch Recipe e Report Generator e Alarm Superv
198. d Action Enter the correct data type for this field FactoryLink initialization failed Cause FactoryLink system failed to initialize Action Ensurethe master key is present and properly connected Run KEYINST and FLKEYVAL FactoryLink system monitoring failed Cause system was unable to start the monitor task The system may not contain sufficient memory Action Stop unnecessary processes 310 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MANAGER Run time Manager Messages Grace period has expired Software must be registered Cause FactoryLink was installed without registering it within the 10 day grace period Action Run FLKEYVAL and follow the instructions for registration Kernel initialization failed Cause FactoryLink was already initialized FactoryLink was already running when start up was attempted Action Noaction required Monitor tag array definition failed Cause A System Configuration Table monitor element Start Trigger Task Status or Task Message may be undefined or defined incorrectly for one of the tasks being started 107 Action Open the System Configuration Table and define the elements correctly Number of defined proc process number more than max maximum number Cause Morethan 31 processes were started Action Start fewer processes Cc e 5 2 JJ ftc ml 3 Out of RAM Cause No memory is available Action Close any unnecessary windo
199. d passed to an operator A seven bit standard code used for information interchange among data Sra ni S Rr ur aS cq p t D M unc cue li Fra mem E mi run dia eR l arra ee A DE F GH GLOSSARY assignment statement attribute attribute catalog attribute data quality average background display background task banner line Batch Recipe I JK LE MN OP QR STU VW X Y Z Mathematical expression that specifies a calculation to be performed with the results written to a FactoryLink real time database element Assigned characteristic for a group of data points used in evaluating statistical information ASCII text filethat describes the database tables and the configuration information entered through the Configuration Manager and the Application Editor also called an AC file Data coming from yes no pass fail determinations of whether the units conform to standards M ay or may not include weighting by seriousness of defect See mean Graphics display created with the F actoryL ink Application E ditor that contains static non moving graphics images Non interactive F actoryLink task that performs a specific set of functions that operate on FactoryLink data Single line display of information about a sorted alarm group Optional FactoryLink task that allows operators totransfer sets of values between the F actoryLink real time database and disk files
200. d group name are by default associated with a null or blank group All subgroups created without a group name belong to this null group This is important to remember when deleting null group data Refer to Deleting Group Data on page 85 for details 78 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DATABASE LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Ordering Data ORDERING DATA FactoryLink permits you to log grouped and nongrouped data with or without a sequence or order number If you elect to associate a sequence number with rows of data your table structure must include a column that contains the sequence number associated with the row of data record The sequence number can be an integer or a time stamping Integer lt lt Choose an integer for event data logging The following table illustrates the use of an integer to order the data Seq Int Lastname Firstname Start date order If grouped data is logged with an integer sequence number each group has a unique count that is the first record for each group is assigned number 1 the second record number 2 and so on Any data logged with an integer sequence number without a group association belongs to the null or blank group This is important to remember when deleting null group data Refer to Deleting Group Data on page 85 for details Time stamping Choose ti me stamping if you want to associate data with a specific time The following table illustrates the
201. d in the server application This is the most common method of data transfer toa client and depending on the stability of data on the server node limits the network bandwidth usage Polled Data Transmits data to the client on a fixed interval a dynamic interval or at any event the client application generates In order to reduce the total bandwidth utilization PowerNet utilizes smart polling whereby only the data that has changed since the last poll is transferred to the client task at the polled event The polling interval can be specified as either a constant for example 10 seconds or as a tag allowing dynamic change to the interval at run time 9N49MOd FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 155 POWERNET TASK DEFINITION Method of Data Transfer Client to Server Data Transfer A data connection to an external domain may be configured as read only the default or read write Read write connections allow data that has changed in the client application to be written back to the server application The diagram below illustrates supported data transfer for a simple client server configuration Data is transferred at a specified rate variable rate or on Server exception Data is transferred on exception only 156 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Client POWERNET TASK DEFINITION Defining Tags DEFINING TAGS Data stored in the real time database is an element Each element is assi
202. d to specify the maximum number of bytes each node requires to send or receive a single data pack MAXLEN parameters must match on all the nodes that receive data 4 4 4 4 4 4 ea a 126 FactoryLink 6 5 0 6 5 0 LOCAL AREA NETWORKING TASK DEFINITION Local Station s Default Values If you are using distributed alarms use the following formula to calculate the number of bytes required at each node to distribute your alarms and logbook entries along the network 84 x active alarms 4 38 number of logbooks x 24 msg_space bytes where active alarms Maximum number of alarms defined for display in the Active Alarms field of the General Alarm Setup Control panel number of Maximum number of logbooks expected to be generated for the logbooks alarms defined This number can be smaller or equal tothe active alarms A practical estimate of the normal volume of logbook entries is 20 3096 of the total alarms lt lt msg space Number smaller or equal to the number of input lines BUFSIZE A number between 128 and 2048 that sets the size of each buffer in bytes The default is 512 bytes The size of the buffer determines the amount of data File Manager can transmit across the network in a single message Only File Manager uses this parameter FLLAN uses MAXLEN to determine the buffer size MAXSESS The maximum number of stations the local station can connect to at the same time Thes
203. depending on the system in use Memory Amount of RAM used by the real time database The first number indicates the amount of RAM currently in use The number in parentheses indicates the amount of RAM allocated to the real time database This includes available message space Analogs Total number of analog elements defined Longs Total number of longana elements defined Mailboxes Total number of mailbox elements defined Link Id Number identifying the next task that locks the real time database FactoryLink keeps a list of tasks waiting on the real time database E ach task waiting for real time database access is added tothis list TheLink ID field displays only thetask in that list with the highest priority 344 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Monitoring the Status of the Real Time Database The following fields contain only colors to indicate their status Color indicators are green on red off Active Sleep Wait Lock Wait Acc Wait Read Wait Write Each column of colors represents a FactoryLink task The first column on the left represents the first task that is displayed on the Run Time M anager screen the second column represents the second task and so on You can monitor the colors to see if all tasks seem to be active and changing states at regular intervals Active Indicates whether or not the task is active Green indicates task is active Red indicates task is not active
204. e Action Either the operating system third party software or hardware Setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred or your hard drive is full Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by FactoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for FactoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardwareis compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur Can t create edit window Cause Action Either the operating system third party software or hardware setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning 105 parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by FactoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for FactoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardwareis compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur ou RU ES 50 2 o FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 249 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configur
205. e are called connections The default is 32 The maximum number of connections for the TCP IP network protocol can be any number from 1 to 64 ACK A number from 0 to 1024 that specifies the number of seconds the local station waits for a remote station to send a data packet acknowledgment before disconnecting from that station The default is 0 which indicates the local station does not require a data acknowledgment from a remote station HulyJOMJON Lay 2907 FactoryLink 6 5 0 6 5 0 127 LOCAL AREA NETWORKING TASK DEFINITION Local Station s Default Values ST Send Timeout A number from 0 to 1024 that specifies the number of seconds the local station will keep trying to send its data if the remote station cannot accept it because it cannot process data fast enough The default is 10 seconds The local station generates an error when the timeout expires Caution Werecommend you not change this default SD Send Delay A number from 0 to 1024 that specifies the number of milliseconds the local station waits between tries to send its data if the remote station cannot accept it because it cannot process data fast enough The default is 10 milliseconds If you increase this number you will reduce CPU consumption but you may cause the overall performance to drop Caution Werecommend you not change this default 128 FactoryLink 6 5 0 6 5 0 LOCAL AREA NETWORKING TASK DEFINITION Ordering Tag Names ORDERING TAG NAM
206. e configuration databases cell of frequency distribution and or histogram An interval of the variable for which all the elements falling in that interval are summed together U sually the full range of the variable is divided into cells of equal size and only the total number of elements falling into each cell is used in working with the frequency distribution and or histogram This greatly reduces the amount of information centerline For control charts The horizontal line marking the logical center of the chart indicating the expected value of the quantity being charted change read call Read operation that when called checks the change status flags of a list of elements in the real time database change status flag Bit that indicates a change in the value of an element or whether the value has changed since the last time it was read See exception processing change wait call Read operation that when called checks the change status flags of a list of elements in the real time database client Task that sends a request for action to another task o o lt client server model A task operates as the dient when it sends requests for action to another task the server The receiving task acts as the server when it responds to a request for action and sends a reply FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 435 A DE F GH GLOSSARY cold start column common Causes completion trigger composite ob
207. e format file e Enclose the object name in braces for data that may vary in length This places the data relative to other text in that line because the position may change based on the length of the element value A typical use may beto locate data within a sentence e Enclose the object name in brackets for fixed position data The value of the element associated with the object name is displayed in the report exactly where the object name is displayed The starting bracket is the anchor for the data This is typically used for formatting data in columns The identifier braces or brackets is not displayed in the generated report file Use an escape sequence identified in Escape Sequences on page 178 if you want a brace or bracket to be displayed in the report You can use object names in the begin repeat and end sections Format Specifiers Format specifiers allow you to define a variable where a literal is expected Format specifiers can consist of twotypes of objects Ordinary characters which are copied literally to the output stream e Variable specifiers which indicate the format variable information are displayed in Format specifiers use the following form 96 flags wi dth prec type 172 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals REPORT GENERATOR TASK DEFINITION Trigger Actions Refer to FactoryLink Fundamentals Guide for more information on this syntax The following table provides a list of the specifiers t
208. e group You can use the same group name on more than one remote station however these groups are independent and do not correspond to each other For example suppose you define a group named Paint on both MIXERROOM and LABELROOM On MIXERROOM Paint contains only one remote station DESIGNLAB When MIXERROOM sends data to Paint it sends it to DESIGNLAB On LABELROOM Paint contains two remote stations MIXERROOM DESIGNLAB When LABELROOM sends data to Paint it sends it to MIXERROOM and DESIGNLAB USING MULTIPLE PLATFORMS ON A NETWORK Because the Network Operating System is transparent to FactoryLink you can use a different Network Operating System program on each station on a network This lets you use F actoryLink for different platforms within the same network You must use the same protocol on all stations in the network Supported Protocols FLLAN supports TCP IP protocol Supported Network Operating Systems The following tables list the network operating systems compatible with each protocol A table exists for each platform supported by F actoryLink Be sure to use the same network protocol on all stations on the network Table 93 1 FactoryLink for OS 2 Network Products Network Protocol NOS Product TCP IP ftp PC TCP 1 3 IBM TCP IP 2 0 122 FactoryLink 6 5 0 6 5 0 LOCAL AREA NETWORKING TASK DEFINITION Monitoring the Network FactoryLink for Windows NT and Windows 95 can communicate with
209. e locked at the time you stopped it no other tasks will be able to access the real time database until the lock is turned off For Windows NT and Windows 95 re boot the computer For OS 2 run the FLSHM utility with the d parameter to correct this condition Refer to FactoryLink Utilities on page 361 for 108 details on using FLSHM For UNIX FactoryLink monitors for this condition and attempts to unlock the real time database ewiy uny FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 333 USING RUN TIME MONITOR Monitoring FactoryLink Processes Find Finds a task in the process list When you choose Find you are prompted for the task you want to find ENTTASK Lo E Cancel Enter the of the executable This locates the first occurrence of the specified F actoryLink task in the current process list window Exit Exits the process list window and returns to the F actoryLink Run Time Monitor panel 334 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Using Run Time Monitor Commands USING RUN TIME MONITOR COMMANDS RTMON provides a window to the operating system in order to execute commands that aid in developing testing or debugging the application Perform the following steps to open this window 1 Choose Options from the Run Time Monitor panel FactoryLink Run Time Monitor B x ptions Poll Rate 1 000 The following pulldown
210. e necessary to coordinate operations between these two tasks because you do not want to log data tothe report unless you are certain the data has been returned successfully from the EDI task Likewise you do not want to sample more data from the external device before the previous data is logged through the report generator Another application that may require coordination is if you want toread data from a relational database using Browser and write it to the printer You can dothis by using the complete trigger on the Browser to trigger the Report Generator repeat trigger and then havethe Report Generator complete trigger generate a move to the next database row in the Browser task This coordination takes place until all rows are fetched Use Math amp Logicto verify not only complete but successful completion with both tasks Jojelauay Woday FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 177 REPORT GENERATOR TASK DEFINITION Escape Sequences ESCAPE SEQUENCES E scape sequences send instructions to the printer such as backspaces form and line feeds carriage returns or horizontal tabs These sequences can also be used to change operating modes of printers to compressed versus standard print The following table lists and explains commonly used escape sequences Escape Sequence Description b Send backspace 0x08 f Send form feed 0x0C n Send line feed Ox0A r Send carriage ret
211. e or Data Point Logging or retrieve data from the relational database for tasks like Trending or Database Browser FactoryLink communicates with many different Historians depending on the relational database receiving the data request Configuration is predefined for the dBASE IV Historian and you do not haveto configure an Historian if you are using Data Point Logging You need to know how to configure an Historian if you are using a different Historian or want to configure a Data Point Logging table other than the ones provided with FactoryLink This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure Historian operations Refer to Configuring the System to Work with a Historian on page 247 in the FactoryLink Configuration Guidefor information on procedures to configure this task Use Historian on page 227 in the FactoryLink Reference Guidefor a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages o et o E 5 3 Historian Methodology The following steps describe and illustrate how Historian processes data requests for a relational database 1 A FactoryLink task sends a data request to a mailbox Historian service This can be a request from Database or Data Point Logging to store data in the relational database or from a task like Trending to retrieve data from the relational database F actoryLink tasks submit their requests for data in the form of Structured Query Language SQL
212. e relational database and the real time database The browse window views selected portions of the result table For example if a graphic screen is used to display the browse window it can display as many rows of data from the result table as there are elements in the two dimensional element array If there are more rows in the result table than in the browse window the operator can scroll through the result table and see each row of it in the browse window Therelationships among the external database the result table the browse window the real time database and the graphic display are displayed below Ruosullteipio Fam f Eemal maire dasbaso Extern minhnss iip pe Grebe amie Logical gx pras m n Lon 19310126075359 ead Can 1 5ld1z6170201 and Col j ead Cal id pad Lon te 66 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DATABASE BROWSER TASK DEFINITION Principles of Operation Browser can read from and write to an entire array of elements in one operation 86 An internal buffer stores the rows of the result table in RAM An external buffer stores the overflow of rows from the internal buffer on disk This allows the operator to scroll back up through the result table The buffers are shown in the following illustration Figure 86 1 Result Browse Internal External table window buffer buffer RAM disk a I I i i
213. e shown on a time based trend chart Time based charts are best suited for continuous types of data For example using a time based chart you can show trends or variances in a boiler temperature over time Because the boiler must maintain a particular temperature the temperature is sampled every minute Refer to the following example for a representative time based trend chart FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 193 TRENDING TASK DEFINITION Chart Types Figure 103 4 Boiler Temperature 1000 750 S9 500 eae gg 250 Time minutes Event Chart Data indexed on an integer can be shown on an event trend chart The integer index indicates the order the data was logged in Event charts are well suited for two types of data e per piece sample e batch group Per piece data is data collected for every item in a process For example a manufacturer of car windshields inspects the thickness of every completed windshield as it comes off the assembly line Using an event chart this manufacturer can graphically represent the thicknesses of the windshields produced Refer to the following example for a representative event trend chart 194 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals TRENDING TASK DEFINITION Chart Types Figure 103 5 Windshield Thickness 2 0 1 5 7 1 0 7r lt lt Thickness inches 600 450 300 150 0
214. e the panel use the Configuration M anger Cut function to cut the consecutively numbered rows from the panel Then usethe Paste function to reinsert the rows Now you can insert a row between the two rows You can also resequence all the rows of data you can view in the panel at onetime or even resequence all of the data in the panel Can t insert into read only table Cause Aninsert operation was attempted on a read only table Action Donot attempt to perform an insert operation 252 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages Can t insert delete while cut copy is in progress Cause Aninsert or delete operation was attempted while a cut or copy operation was in progress Action Complete the cut or copy operation or cancel it with the Esc key or Cancel box Retry the insert or delete operation Can t load external validation module Cause Themodule may not exist in the specified path or may have been damaged Action Reinstall FactoryLink Can t locate options key Cause option key may not be installed or the license may not be enabled Action Check that the key is installed Verify the license is enabled by running the KEYINST and FLKEYVAL utilities Can t make frame window Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware Setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Action Verify the f
215. e to search for a specific tag in either the element list or element cross reference list 1 Choose View from the main menu bar or from the configuration panel menu bar Hl Configuration Manager lej x Application View Utilities Exit Help F1 One of the following pulldown menus is displayed Main Menu Ctil M Main Menu Object List Next Screen Ctl N X ref List Previous Screen Ctl P Domain List Object List X ref List View pulldown menu ops from configuration Domain List View pulldown menu from Main Menu Search Next Tag Attributes Ctrl T Field Choices Ctl K 2 Choose either Object List or X ref List depending on the kind of information you want to obtain about the element For example choose Object List to display the following element list Edk Weer ides Lad Pap 105 MD Los Klann viewer loghos AB Ml lem Biro iy Port E EN ICNE 1 Hin bigger aritm ALC MIENT ibs Logger ued Ibi MC PRINT Logger print c RETUFIN Mann Superdsar Co 5 ALD AREA r Hann Viewer arce li ALD ACE i Abrie dge meal i gt AD GROUP E E harm Viren group ca MID GHPAEK us Hin Vinge Gran MD LDGBODK Harm Viewer Inghos o gt o 3 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 231 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Tags 3 Choose View from the configuration panel menu bar The following pulldown menu is displayed Mai
216. e used in format files e BEGIN e REPEAT END Keyword lines begin with a period followed by a keyword and a lineterminator such as LF Line Feed or CR LF Carriage Return Line F eed sequence Comment lines can also be included in the format file by starting the line with a period and following it with any text that does not represent a keyword Text displayed in a comment lineis not included on the report Sections of Format File There are four distinct sections to the format file as shown in the following illustration Figure 100 2 Comment section Format file t BEGIN r Get pump temperature Begin section REPEAT Temperature temp Repeat section END all done reporting End section 170 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals REPORT GENERATOR TASK DEFINITION Components of a Format File The sections and their associated keywords are Comment section First section in any format file Any text displayed in this section is not included on thereport This section usually includes a description of the report purpose Do not precede the text in this section with a period Begin section H eader section is delineated by the keyword BEGIN which defines the report header Any text displayed after the BEGIN keyword and before the next keyword is included at the beginning of the report e Repeat section Repeat section is delineated by the keyword REPE
217. ecifies the character or numerictype for the value This can be one of the following d decimal s string Id long decimal e exponential notation of the following form Im nnnnnnE 4 xx f floating point notation of the following form Immmm nnnnnn g use shorter of eor f u unsigned decimal 40 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals OVERVIEW Using Format Specifiers o unsigned octal unsigned hexadecimal using a f X unsigned hexadecimal using A F Examples of valid format specifiers for each F actoryLink data type are displayed in the following table For additional information about format specifiers see any ANSI C reference manual Table 83 3 Format Specifiers lt lt Sample Type of Default Valid Output Element Type Types Description For example 04d specifies 0005 a right justified decimal value with a minimum field width of 4 digits The 0 specifies the value is padded with zeros Analog d x For example 3u specifies a right justified unsigned decimal value with a minimum field width of 3 digits The value is padded with spaces For example 3u specifies the same as the example above except the hyphen before the width specifies the value is left justified FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 41 OVERVIEW Using Format Specifiers Table 83 3 Format Specifiers Type of Default Element Type Long Analog F loating
218. ect subobjects Group of ASCII characters that specify a standard format for one or more variables to be inserted in a character string preceded by the symbol A process showing no recognizable pattern of change See control constant cause system A measure of the variation among the members of a statistical sample If a sample of n values has a mean of x its standard deviation is given by the formula shown Le o Z 1 Standard Deviation Formula Element whose value when forced to 1 ON initiates an action in a FactoryLink task Mathematical expression or formula that may contain any of the following components Directives e Expressions including operators variables and or constants 454 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals A COD EF GH station station name statistical control of a process status message string constant subdirectory subgroup subobjects symbol table tag name tag number task JK L MN OP QRS TUVWX YZ GLOSSARY Comments Functions Any PLC computer or data terminal connected to and communicating through a network Name given to a device connected to a network A process that exhibits only random variations See information message ASCII numeric expression consisting of an opening double quotation mark followed by zero or more printable characters and a dosing double quotation mark Directory contained within another directory For contr
219. ective length of the original tag name is 32 less 7 or 25 If theoriginal tag name plus extension exceeds 32 characters a warning is issued Scaling and Deadbanding When a new tag is created an extension of up to 8 characters plus a colon 9 characters maximum is added These additional characters reduce the maximum length of the original tag name therefore the maxi mum effective length of the original tag name is 32 less 7 less 9 or 16 If you not sure if you will be using PowerNet or Scaling and Deadbanding you may choose to define tag names using only 16 characters Also remember if shortening tag names do not reduce the length of the extensions 182 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 102 Schema Task Definition E FactoryLink relational databases are configured in a table format consisting of rows and columns The schema of the table defines the number size and content of the rows and columns lt lt This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure Schema operations Refer to Defining Schemas on page 225 in the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for information on procedures to configure this task Use Schemas on page 493 in the FactoryLink Reference Guide for a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages Database Logging Data is logged to relational databases in a table format that allows data collection
220. ed in single quotes Using a Create Link Option Many Windows applications use Create Link to establish a DDE Link Thefollowing exampleis specificto Lotus 123W however the basic concept can be applied to any DDE client supporting the Create Link 1 Open the Edit Link Options menu and choose Create Link Enter the following information e Type the value of the environmental variables FLNAME FLUSER separated by a period for application name e RTDB for topic e the name of any standard FactoryLink tag name For item name TheDDE Link is now in place and the dient application can communicate with the FactoryLink real time database 104 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE DDE TASK DEFINITION Modifying a Linked Element MODIFYING A LINKED ELEMENT Once a FactoryLink element is linked it can be modified The following example shows how an element linked to Excel is modified using an Excel macro Perform the following steps in Excel to create an E xcel macro 1 Choose File gt New gt Macro Open the appropriate spreadsheet in E xcel lt lt Select cell 1 o N Enter the following macro information in the spreadsheet Table 89 1 Spreadsheet Macro Information SendChannel Open a channel INITIATE FLNAME FLUSER RTDB P OKE SendChannel message1 B 2 Send this to FactoryLink B TERMINATE SendChannel End DDE conversation Choose For
221. ed when the value of an analog or floating point element is equal to the value specified by the Limit An alarm is triggered when the value of an analog or floating point element is not equal to the value specified by the Limit Not all conditions are valid for all tag types The following table illustrates the conditions supported by each tag type Digital Analog Longana Float Message Mailbox 46 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals ON Active Normal Active Normal ALARM LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Establishing the Alarm Criteria The following diagrams illustrate the behavior of an alarm with specified limits by tag type The diagrams represent the alarm status active and normal based on the value limit and deadband Digital Elements Figure 84 1 Active Normal Time Note A TGL condition is special in that an alarm always returns directly to the normal status It is not visible to you if you do not require acknowledgment Time Analog and Float Elements The principle of operations areidentical when operating on analog longana or float tag types The smallest unit detected is dependent on the type FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 47 lt lt ALARM LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Establishing the Alarm Criteria All examples are based on the following parameters Limit 5 Deadband 2 Figure 84 2 GT gt Active Active
222. eloper defined elements If the application has more than the licensed number of elements defined the application will not run If the application is started using d the error message can be seen in the Run Time M anager window l O Element Maximum FactoryLink Lite contains I O tasks An 1 0 task is any task that communicates directly with an external device such as a computer a PLC or nodes on a network These 1 0 tasks and their associated elements are a subset of the maximum number of elements you can configure for an application FactoryLink Lite is designed to process up to the maxiumum number of I O tag elements in all of the following I O tasks e External Device Interface EDI e PowerNet Client only Local Area Networking F LLAN both Send and Receive Dynamic Data Exchange DDE Server only e Various I O protocol modules such as AB NETDTL or Modicon Modbus Plus An 1 element is any element that is the source or target of any of the following A devicel O point in an EDI read write table An external domain tag e An FLLAN I O address e ADDE 1 0 address 422 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK LITE Developer Defined Tag Element Maximum For example a FactoryLink element that is the target of a Modicon Modbus Plus register in an EDI read write table is 1 0 element A FactoryLink element that triggers the read write table is not an 1 0 element The effects of this maximum apply
223. em these Real Time Database elements are global in scope Remember global Real Time Database elements are not the same as global variables which are declared inside program files and are used only within procedures When a procedure is triggered by an element the name of this element must be entered in the Math and Logic Triggers table so the procedure will load and run Completing the Tables Complete the configuration tables in the following order e Math and Logic Variables table e Math Logic Triggers table e Math and Logic Procedures table Converting Previous Versions Previous versions of Math amp Logic operated the IML mode only Run the FLCONV utility to convert previous versions to the new one Opening the Configuration Manager Main Menu Refer to FactoryLink Fundamentals for information on how to open the Configuration Manager Main Menu screen 134 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals MATH amp LOGIC TASK DEFINITION Modes MODES Math amp Logic runs in one of two modes Interpreted mode Compiled mode Interpreted Mode Interpreted mode is a subset of Compiled Math amp Logic IML means when the values of trigger elements associated with one or more procedures change in the real time database IM L determines which procedures are affected Math amp Logic then interprets every line of the instructions and executes them for each triggered change IML is excellent for application prototyping and l
224. en 108 Output tag array definition failed Cause A System Configuration Table output element Display Status Display Name or Display Description may be undefined or defined incorrectly for one of the tasks being started Action Open the System Configuration Table and define the elements correctly w L uny FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 351 USING RUN TIME MONITOR Run time Manager Messages Process process name may not have started Cause Theprocess failed to be come active It may not have been ableto register with F actoryLink Action Verify the filenamein the EXECUTABLE FILE field in the System Configuration Table Verify the process compatibility with FactoryLink Process process name may not have stopped Cause The process may already have stopped Action Attempt to stop the process manually if it has not stopped Read failed on file filename Cause Areadoperation on the named file failed Action Verify configuration table entries communication parameters hardware identification information and electrical connections Read header failed on file filename Cause The CT file may be damaged Action Deletethe CT filein the FLINK ct directory and restart the application to rebuild the file Real time database isn t initialized Cause FactoryLink is starting or shutting down Action Start FactoryLink again Real time database for application doesn t exist Cause
225. en the part of the program where you enter the registration number without having to go through the complete install process FLKEYVAL T o i lt o This is a protection utility usually run during installation however you can run it at any time After you have the registration number you must contact USDATA within ten days to obtain an authorization number FLKEYVAL allows you quick access to the system to enter this number After turning on KEY you are prompted for the authorization number without having to go through the entire install process FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 409 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLSHM FLSHM Usethe flshm utility to List memory areas used by multi user FactoryLink real time databases e Clean up locked memory areas caused by abnormal shutdown of F actoryLink This is only necessary in a multi user environment The syntax for this command is flshm option rtdb name where option controls how f 1shm executes This can be one more of the following If you do not specify any options you receive a list of available real time databases L Lists existing real time databases U Lists all domain and user names for each real time database M Lists all shared memory segments for each domain D Deletes the real time database Before using this option stop the Run Time Manager C Clears the active flag for one or more user names fo
226. en to message elements Writing a Value to a Single Element Use the w command to write a value to single element The syntax is w tag value where tag value identifies the element to receive value This can either be the element name or element number The element number is displayed in output when you read the element identifies the value to write to tag You can enter numerical values as hexadecimal numbers by preceding the value with Ox For example enter the following command to write a value of 3017 toTEST w TEST 3017 Force Writing a Value to a Single Element Use the W command to force write a value to a single element A force write sets the Change status flag to 1 on The syntax is W tag value where tag value identifies the element to receive value This can either be the element name or element number The element number is displayed in output when you read the element identifies the value to write to tag You can enter numerical values as hexadecimal numbers by preceding the value with Ox FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 339 108 USING RUN TIME MONITOR Using Run Time Monitor Commands Writing a Value to One or More Elements Usethe s command to write the same value to multiple elements in an array with a single command The syntax is s tag count value where tag identifies the element to start with This can either bethe element
227. ent in the database is written all the bits are automatically set by FactoryLink 26 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals OVERVIEW Data Logging Overview DATA LOGGING OVERVIEW As data is collected or computed by F actoryLink it is stored as a data element with a unique tag name in a Real Time Database Each time data for a tag is collected or computed the new value is stored in the Real Time Database overwriting the old data If you want to retain this data so that it can be reviewed compared and or analyzed you can log it to a historical database The major aspects of the data logging function in FactoryLink are The Schema TheHistorian e The Logger Schema In FactoryLink the relational databases are configured in a table format consisting of rows and columns The structure of a table the number size and content of the rows and columns is defined by its schema When configuring a database you must specify what elements for which to collect values and where to place the values what database table row and column Refer to Schema Task Definition on page 183 for more information about schemas Historian The historian serves as an interface between the F actoryLink Real Time Database and the external relational database to which information is being sent or retrieved Refer to Historian Task Definition on page 115 for more information about historians Logger F actoryLink has two different logging tasks
228. ent is found re enter the configuration information 2 Run FLKEYVAL and follow the instructions for registration Write error on log file filename Cause Thedisk may be full Action Delete unnecessary files FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 313 USING RUN TIME MANAGER Run time Manager Messages Messages with Error Numbers Two Run time Manager error messages display error numbers within the message Can t create appl filename error error number Run time Manager errno error number The error numbers in these messages are generated by the F actoryLink real time database E ach error number has a corresponding error keyword Even though this keyword is not displayed in the error message knowing the error keyword helps Customer Support engineers identify the cause of the problem 1 FLE INTERNAL Cause Internal Error Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section 2FLE OUT OF MEMORY Cause Thereis not enough RAM available Action Add RAM tothe system 4 FLE NO FLINK INIT Cause Thereal time database has not been created or cannot finish initializing Action Shut down FactoryLink and restart it 5 FLE NO PROC INIT Cause of the following conditions caused this error The task name of the specified task has not been entered in the System Configuration Table Action Perform the corresponding action Enter the task the Task Name field of the System Configuration Table
229. er of defects found in a subgroup of fixed size Use the c chart when each unit typically has a number of defects Cp For process capability studies Cp is a capability index that may range in value from 0 to infinity with a larger value indicating more capable process A value near is 1 33 normally considered acceptable n Total Tolerance E USL LSL 6x Sigma 66 Cp Formula where USL Upper specifications limit LSL Lower specification limit o Standard deviation Cpk For process capability studies Capability index that measures how capable a process is of producing units within the specifications or tolerance limits If the process is centered on the mean specification Cpk has a value equal to Cp If Cpk is negative the process mean is outside the specification limits if Cpk is between 0 and 1 some of the 60 spread falls outside the tolerance limits If Cpk is larger than 1 the spread is completely within the tolerance limits x LSL Cpk 38 USL x 434 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals AB CD EF GHI JK LM N OP QRS TUVWXYZ GLOSSARY Cpk min Cpky Cpk ica Cpk Formula USL Upper specifications limit LSL Lower specification limit x Grand average from control chart X Bar CT Seeconfiguration table CT file See configuration table CTG file configuration table generator script CTGEN At run timethe utility that generates the binary configuration tables CT files from th
230. er task is shutdown on a Persistence Timed Trigger change or on a Persistence Backup Trigger change Theal log bak file is updated on a Persistence Backup Trigger change Refer to CoreTasks of the FactoryLink Configuration Guidefor more information about the persistence function 56 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals ALARM LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Alarm Distribution Upon restart of the Distributed Alarm Logger task the al_log prs or al_log bak file is read into memory and all alarms are checked for validity The active alarms are stored using their UniqueAlarm ID number If you have not defined a Unique Alarm ID in the Configuration Manager one is defined at startup If the configuration does not change all alarms receive the same U nique Alarm D each time at startup If the configuration changes however each alarm D could be altered and the Distributed Alarm Logger could potentially load persistence information for incorrect alarms or not load persistence information ALARM DISTRIBUTION Usingthe FactoryLink Local Area Network task alarms can be distributed over the network Each node can share one or more groups of alarms with other nodes Thealarmis originated on the node it is defined on and is seen and acknowledged from other nodes that have been configured to receive information on that particular alarm When the alarm is acknowledged either at the source or at the remote the source node accepts the acknowledgment and updates
231. er the following commands at the system prompt of the shell where you are starting the user domain FLINK flink dir FLAPP flapp dir export FLAPP FLDOMAIN domain export FLDOMAIN FLNAME app name export FLNAME FLUSER user name export FLUSER where flink dir defines the full path to the directory containing the F actoryLink program files flapp dir defines the full path to the directory containing your application files domain defines the domain you are starting This should be user for the window where you are starting the user domain app name defines the full path to the directory containing your application files user name defines thelog on name of the user starting the application 302 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MANAGER Accessing Run Time Manager 5 Enter the following command at the system prompt flrun options where options is one or more of the options specified in the table on page 293 The system starts the Run Time Manager in the user domain and the Run Time Manager screen opens You can toggle between the Run Time M anager for the shared domain and that for the user domain from the Run Time Manager screen Refer to the Run Time M anager User I nterface Screen on page 304 for more details FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 303 107 Cc m 5 9e 2 JJ tc ml 3 USING RUN TIME MANAGER Run Time Manager User Interface Screen RUN TIME MANAGER USER INTERFA
232. erence between the highest and lowest of a group of values 2 Type of real time and historical control chart found in FactoryLink SPC See X Bar moving range Largest value in Subgroup minus Smallest value in Subgroup R Operation that returns the value of an element regardless of the value of the element s change status flag See Block Read Complete See Block Read Disable See Block Read Priority See Block Read State See Block Read Trigger I mmediate software response to an event M emory resident array of information that acts both as an in memory storage device and an interprocess communication mechanism for FactoryL ink tasks All FactoryLink tasks share the information in the real time database by reading from or writing to real time database elements FactoryLink task that allows you to modify the real time database during run time and to monitor process access to the real time database used to develop and debug applications RTMON See element Boot again See boot See Batch Recipe Inarelational database a unit or set of data that is the basic component of a file Also called a row Mathematical function that yields a TRUE or FALSE result that depends on the signs and relative magnitudes of its arguments TheFactoryLink Interpreted Math amp Logic program recognizes six relational operators oum Us de 452 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals AB CD EF GHI JK LM N OP QRS TUVWXYZ GL
233. ernel memory resources can be exhausted when the messages written into the kernel are not read by their target consumer task Once these resources are exhausted operations requiring mailbox communication such as screen changes or database logging no longer function o 5 9e 5 D fc cm Oncea mailbox has been stuffed with orphaned messages no other mailbox writes can be performed even if these writes are to a different mailbox The system must be able to be tuned to handle large quantities of mailbox messages as well as not allow any mismatched mailbox producer consumer task combinations exhaust the kernel of all resources Currently the kernel defaults to the following configuration 200 maximum memory segments of 64K bytes each 50 of these 200 segments can be used for mailbox messages One mailbox can retain as much memory as the overall maximum allows FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 293 USING RUN TIME MANAGER Setting Up Program Arguments To make this configuration tunable a switch to the SHARED domain instance of the Run Time Manager is used The syntax of this switch is m lt max_seg gt max_mbxsegs gt lt max_onembx gt where max_seg gt Maximum number of kernel segments Default 200 max mbxsegs Maximum segments used for mailbox messages Default 50 max onembx Maximum number of bytes of message space held by one mailbox The default sets no per mailbox ceiling
234. error message SIEM_READ_COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Siemens CP525 block read complete SIEM_READ_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Siemens CP525 block read disable SIEM_READ_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Siemens CP525 block read state SIEM_READ_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Siemens CP525 block read trigger SIEM_STATIONO_STATUS SHARED ANALOG Siemens CP525 logical station 0 status SIEM_WRITE_COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Siemens CP525 block write complete SIEM_WRITE_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Siemens 525 block write disable SIEM_WRITE_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Siemens CP525 block write state FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 387 e o O mp lt o FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 2 Tagname Domain Type Description SIEM_WRITE_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Siemens CP525 block write trigger SPCDATAMBX_S SHARED MAILBOX PowerSPC Data task receive mailbox SPCDATATRIG_S SHARED DIGITAL PowerSPC Data task initialization indicator SPCGMBX SHARED MAILBOX SPC Graphics input mailbox SPCGMBX_U USER MAILBOX SPC Graphics input mailbox SPCGRPHMBX_S SHARED MAILBOX PowerSPC Graphics task receive mailbox SPCGRPHMBX_U USER MAILBOX PowerSPC Graphics task receive mailbox SPCRCVMBX SHARED MAILBOX SPC receive mailbox for database access SPCRCVMBX U USER MAILBOX SPC receive mailbox for database access SPOOLREQ SHARED MESSAGE Print Sp
235. erver and the source node hostname exists within the destination HOST E QU file FLSAVE spans diskettes for only the Local Backup format Local Multiplatform saves do not span diskettes 6 Choose OK or Cancel when you complete this panel OK CANCEL Initiates the save Exits without saving the application 404 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLSAVE The following files are saved by both platform specific and multiplatform FLSAVE operations 1 e Configuration tables CDB MDB e Graphics files DRW G GC GS GP GPC GPS PL PLS PLC e Report Format files RPT F MT e Math amp Logic source field PROCS PRG INC e CML source files CML C H MAK e Network configuration files NET eo co The following files are saved by platform specific FL SAVE operations e CML binary files CML OBJ EXE e Logfiles LOG e Recipe files RCP T o i lt o When all files have been copied to the appropriate drive directory or to diskettes the following message is displayed FactoryLink Application Save Completed Save CML binary Log or Recipe files with a multiplatform F LSAVE by copying them manually onto a backup diskette FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 405 e FACTORYLINK UTILITIES CTGEN CTGEN The CTGEN utility binds or converts the tagnames specified in the database tables to tag nu
236. erver may be associated with either the SHARED or USER domain 102 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE DDE TASK DEFINITION Establishing a DDE Link ESTABLISHING A DDE LINK When a DDE client initiates a DDE conversation with the FactoryLink DDE Server using the INITIATE message the client must specify a formula that consists of an Application Topic and Item e Application The name of the server application Use the values of the FactoryLink environmental variables FLNAME FLUSER separated by a period delimiter to specify a FactoryLink application FLNAME isthe environmental variable whose value is a FactoryLink application name The default value of the environmental variable FLUSER is SHAREUSR This default is established when the Run Time Manager is started from the Start FactoryL ink icon Specify the FLUSER value used if the Run Time Manager is started from the Run prompt Topic The name of the file containing the exchange data For a FactoryLink application use RTDB to represent the F actoryLink real time database tem The actual data exchanged in DDE conversation This is of a specific FactoryLink tag name for a FactoryLink application Note Excel array tag names must be enclosed in single quotation marks These quotation marks are not used for non array tag names Element names specified for DDE must be unique Refer to Determining U nique Elements in the
237. es TheFactoryLink application directory contains F actoryL ink application files The default name of this directory depends on your operating system platform On UNIX platforms the default directory is usr flapp On all other platforms the default directory is V FLAPP lt lt The application files organized into the following subdirectories Any subdirectories found in the application directory not listed here are reserved for future use ASC ASCII configuration database files that store information about the elements The files in this subdirectory contain a asc extension They are used to import export configuration data from one application directory to another typically from one platform to another during multi platform saves and restores CT Binary files produced at run time containing non domain specific data extracted from the database tables The files in this subdirectory contain a ct extension Domain specific ct files exist in theFactoryLink domain subdirectory DCT Communication support tables The files in this subdirectory contain a dct extension NET Local and group files used by the F actoryLink Local Area Networking task to determine communication parameters and remote node logical groupings RPT Report Generator format files that define the format for reports The files in this subdirectory contain a fmt extension SHARED Files specific to the shared domain USER File
238. es 193 configuring program arguments 199 event charts 194 AB CD EF GHI JK LM N OP QRS TUVWXYZ historical mode 197 historical trending 191 methodology 190 overview 189 panning 197 pen types 197 real time mode 197 real time only trending 190 switching modes 197 time based charts 193 value cursor 198 zooming 197 trending indexing 81 trigger elements Math and Logic 134 triggering schemes 139 triggers complete triggers 177 definition 456 trigger actions 173 using tags in CM as triggers 210 TRUE 456 type 456 U u Chart 456 UCL Upper Control Limit 456 UKEY 411 unary operator 457 UNIX network protocols 123 Unix accessing Configuration Manager 213 accessing Run Time Manager 300 unsolicited data 151 User domain 33 user interface screen 304 using format specifiers 39 USL Upper Specifications Limit 456 utilities CDBLIST 406 CTGEN 406 CTLIST 406 DBCHK 407 EXPLODE 408 FLCONV 402 FLDEMO 396 FLKEYVAL 409 FLNEW 362 392 FLSAVE 403 FLSHM 410 FLTEST 396 KEYINST 409 messages 412 UKEY 411 V value cursor definition 198 Variable Data 457 Variables 457 Variance 457 version viewing current 238 vertical scroll bar 219 viewing 411 authorized options UKEY 411 current FactoryLink version 238 database elements 227 Index 1 471 A B C D EF GHI JK LM N OP QRS TUVWXYZ domain associations 281 domain list 236 element cross reference 229 element values Run Time Monitor 324 field choices 239 number of ta
239. escription of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages e eq 21 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 97 DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE DDE TASK DEFINITION Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Dynamic Data E xchange DDE is a form of interprocess communication used by many Windows applications to automatically update data and to regulate how and when data is passed between applications Because DDE protocol is well defined two applications that follow the protocol can communicate with each other even though neither application was explicitly written to work with the other DDE allows you to perform data display techniques in any software package supporting DDE using FactoryLink data as shown in the following illustration Excel DDE Applications The FactoryLink IV system provides both DDE Server DDE Client functionality DDE Server Use the FactoryLink DDE Server to establish communications between the FactoryLink real time database and client software products such as Lotus 123 and Microsoft E xcel 98 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE DDE TASK DEFINITION DDE Conversations You may set up DDE links for the FactoryLink DDE Server to be initiated from any external Windows application that offers DDE support therefore DDE applications such as Lotus or Excel can pass data to or retrieve data from FactoryLink This means the
240. ex the records by the Location field plus the Lastname field to reorganize the records in the example table in alphabetical order within a company location Index by last name and location Location Lastname Firstname Start date index key Atlanta J ones 11 6 95 80 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DATABASE LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Indexing for the Trend Task INDEXING FOR THE TREND TASK You must specify a sequence number as the index or part of the index if you want to include logged data on a Trend chart What you specify as the index depends on the type of Trend chart you are using to display the data e Time based chart M ust index on a time stamping sequence number e Event chart Must index on an integer sequence number Time Base Chart Indexing lt lt You must specify a time stamping sequence number as the index key to display logged data on a time based chart Use this column A as index key Seq Time Lastname Firstname Start date Event Chart Indexing You must specify an integer sequence number as the index key to display logged data on an event chart Use this column as index key Seq Int Lastname Firstname Start date FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 81 DATABASE LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Indexing for the Trend Task Event and Time based Trend Chart Indexing You must include both an integer and a time stamping sequence numbe
241. f the Command Tag defined in the Dynamic Logging Control panel This type of dynamic logging request either adds tags to or removes tags from the list of tags currently configured for logging Optionally the logging request can have a tag associated with it that describes the logging request status This type of dynamic addition and removal of tags is temporary so every time Data Point Logging is restarted the new tag list generated from the Data Point SaveFileor the Configuration Table file supersedes the existing list 96 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 89 Dynamic Data Exchange DDE Task Definition Dynamic Data Exchange DDE is a protocol used in Microsoft Windows to transfer data from one application to another This chapter contains information about the following topics Principles of Operation e DDE Server e DDE Client e DDE Conversations e DDE Messages e Setting Up DDE Server e Establishing DDE Link Entering a DDE Formula e Modifying a Linked Element e Using a Create Link Option e DDE Client Functions Read Operations Write Operations lt lt This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure Dynamic Data Exchange DDE operations Refer to Dynamic Data Exchange DDE on page 667 in the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for information on procedures to configure this task Use DDE Client on page 97 in the FactoryLink Reference Guide for a quick d
242. files You can nest the execution of batch files which means you can have one batch file executed by another batch file You can nest files four deep End alinein a batch file with a newline or semicolon Creating a Batch File You can create a batch file by save keyboard input toa file You can place a series of commands as well as comments in a batch file Use the f command to create a batch file The syntax is f filename where filenameis the name of the file to receive the input If you use the f command without the file name input is not saved to a file and commands executed as they are entered Adding Remarks to a Batch File Use the command to add a remark to a batch file The syntax is df remark where remark is the text you do not want interpreted as a command Terminate the remark with either a newline or a semicolon You should only use remarks in batch files Echoing a Comment in Output 108 Use the command to echo comments in output The syntax is c comment where comment is the text you want to be displayed in the output If you want the comment sent to a file precede this command with the o command Otherwise the output is sent to the terminal screen 2 w L uny FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 341 USING RUN TIME MONITOR Using Run Time Monitor Commands Ending Current File Place the e command at the end of the batch file to indicate the end of the
243. from one application and importing them into another application This section describes how to export and import application database files Exporting an Application Exporting converts all database files into ASCII text files in preparation for being imported into another application Once files are exported they are saved in the FLAPP default directory Tables in the shared domain are saved in the FLAPP SHARED directory tables in the user domain are saved in the FLAPP USER directory Each table generates its own file each file name includes an exp extension The exp files can be edited using an ASCII text editor however any editing error can cause cascading errors in a FactoryLink application so use care when editing these files Perform the following steps to export database files from one application so they can be imported to another application 1 Open the application you want to export Refer to Opening a New Development Application on page 221 for details on opening an application 222 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Multiple Development Applications 2 Choose Utilities from the Configuration Manager or configuration panel menu bar If you open it from the Configuration Manager the entire application is exported If you open it from a configuration panel only that panel s information is exported ES Configuration Manager 8 x Application View Utilities Exit Help F1
244. from the Edit pulldown menu Before deleting the line the system validates the display and reports any validation errors encountered If none are encountered it updates the real time database 240 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Editing Configuration Panels 3 Correct any validation errors and try again Caution If you want to delete a line entry from a control panel that has information defined on the corresponding information panel you must first delete the information panel definition If you do not the data defined on the information panel becomes orphaned and cannot be deleted although it will still be displayed on the cross reference list This is also trueif you changethe table name on the control panel Copying Contents of a Line Entry 1 2 3 Position the cursor in the first line of the block to be copied Choose Copy from the Edit pulldown menu Move the cursor to the last linein the block to be copied The selected block is highlighted Choose Copy from the Edit pulldown menu The selected block is copied to the Paste buffer Choose Reset Mark from the Edit pulldown menu to cancel the copy operation in a text entry panel Cutting a Line Entry 1 2 3 Position the cursor in the first line of the block to cut Choose Cut from the Edit pulldown menu 105 Move the cursor to the last line in the block to cut The selected block becomes highlighted Choose Cut from t
245. g Calling TRIGGERING CALLING Triggering Developing Triggering Schemes Multiple procedures are executed using the triggering method of this system To develop the most efficient triggering scheme consider the following e What intervals or circumstances trigger individual procedures at a reasonable rate for this data Try touse conditional event triggering based on changing data so procedures run when data is change state driven or trigger driven lt lt Single threaded Task This task is single threaded This means triggered procedures are cued and executed in the order in which they are triggered A procedure that does not complete because of an infinite loop for example will stop the rest of the procedures from executing When running one procedure set a trigger for the next Calling You can both trigger and call procedures 91607 pue yen Trigger Procedure If you want to wait until one procedure has completed before executing another or if your procedure has to execute when an event occurs trigger a new procedure Calling Procedure lf you want a procedure to occur immediately you must call the procedure This system uses a complex cueing process that necessitates using calling procedures if you want them to occur in a distinct order FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 139 MATH amp LOGIC TASK DEFINITION Triggering Calling Completing the Calling Sequence Enter FLRUN com
246. g is logged more than once during a given second any values logged after the first occurrence within that second are ignored At task startup all exception and fixed time interval tags are logged to create a default beginning reference point Triggered logging tags are not logged at startup because the trigger tag is not initiated yet Logging Based on a Change in the Tag Value Exception Logging You can configure Data Point Logging to log an event whenever the value of the selected tag changes F actoryL ink polls for values of all tags specified for Data Point logging If the value has changed from the previous time it was logged another event is recorded to the log Filtering Exception Logged Tags If a given tag changes frequently but not all changes are significant you can configure deadbanding on the tag so only significant changes are logged This reduces the data logged and decreases system processing ti me This feature is called deadbanding which allows you to specify a dead band around a tag value for each tag not considered significant enough to record the changed value to the system This band can bean integer or a percent of value Refer to the Core Task 94 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DATA POINT LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Logging Data Section of the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for a detailed description of the deadbanding function and how to configure it Logging Based on a Fixed Time Interval You can confi
247. g is set for FLRUN In this way you do not lose important information by exiting the task Use Domain Choose this option if you want to use persistent settings defined Settings for the domain If you want to define tag specific persistence deselect this option box does not contain an x Then set the following persistent options for this tag Saving Controls how often the element s value is saved toa disk file This can be one or both of the following If you choose both options the element s value is saved based on a time trigger and when it changes On Time Choose this option if you want the tag value saved based on a time trigger On Exception Choose this option if you want the tag value saved if the tag value changes Restoring Controls whether the element s change status flag is set to on or off when restoring the saved value to the element This can be one of the following Set Change Status On The element s change status flag is set to on when restoring the saved value Set Change Status Off The element s change status flag is set to off when restoring the saved value Use this option to prevent activation of digital triggers on restart Defining Tags While in the Application Editor You can also define a tag name while developing the application within the Application Editor The same information is included in the dialog as well as many additional items configured in the various Configuration Manager tasks Refer t
248. ger startup flag STARTUP_U USER DIGITAL Run Time Manager startup flag TASKDESC_S SHARED MESSAGE Shared Task Description TASKDESC_U USER MESSAGE _ User Task Description TASKDSTATUS S SHARED MESSAGE Shared Task Status Word TASKDSTATUS U USER MESSAGE User Task Display Status M essage TASKMESSAGE S SHARED MESSAGE Shared Task Display essage TASKMESSAGE U USER MESSAGE User Task Message TASKNAME S SHARED MESSAGE Shared Task Name TASKNAME U USER MESSAGE Task Name TASKSTART S SHARED DIGITAL Shared Task Start Trigger TASKSTART_U USER DIGITAL User Task Start Trigger TASKSTATUS_S SHARED ANALOG Shared Task Status Value TASKSTATUS_U USER ANALOG User Task Status Value TE_EXCEPTION_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Telemecanique exception write disable TE_EXCEPTION_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Telemecanique exception write trigger TE LPORTO MSG SHARED MESSAGE Telemecanique logical port 0 error message TE READ COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Telemecanique block read complete TE_READ_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Telemecanique block read disable FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 389 e o O mp lt o FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 2 Tagname Domain Type Description TE_READ_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Telemecanique block read state TE_READ_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Telemecanique block read trigger TE STATIONO STATUS
249. ging to a dBASE IV table e Data be indexed by a sequence number either time stamping or integer All nongrouped sequenced by integer records can be deleted with a single operation Noability to delete a data subset Grouped method Usethis method if you want tolog data with a group and or subgroup assodiation Grouping is best for situations when the group name does not change frequently f you need subgroups with the group name Database L ogging creates the subgroups as they are needed Use the subgroup method when logging data with a group association and the group name changes frequently and you do not want to assign a unique name to each group 86 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DATABASE LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Database Logging Methods Consider the following benefits and restrictions before selecting a grouping method Each group must be assigned a unique name Database Logging creates subgroups Data is indexed by group column and sequence number either time stamping or integer All records for a group subgroup can be deleted with a single operation You cannot restrict the number of records in a group subgroup All records for the oldest subgroup can be deleted with a single operation using subgroup rollover You can control the number of subgroups allowed FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 87 lt lt DATABASE LOGGING TASK DEFINITION
250. given time to control the product manufactured Devicelnterface Communicates bi directionally between the Real Time Database and one or more external devices such as programmable logic controllers PL Cs and remote terminal units RTU s DXF Files Convert original AutoCAD drawings into gx files an ASCII text based file that F actoryLink can import Dynamic Data E xchange U pdates data automatically and regulates how and when data is passed between applications e Event and Interval Timer Works in synchronization with the system clock It updates global information F actoryLink uses as the current time the day of the week and the month e Persistence Saves the values of an active FactoryLink application at predetermined times so if FactoryLink shuts down unexpectedly useful data is not lost Power VB Allows Microsoft Visual Basic compatible scripts to be attached to FactoryLink graphic objects Print Spooler Permits you to direct data to printers or other devices with parallel interfaces and also to disk files Programmable Counter Provides count per unit of ti me measurements and provides event delays such as defining a trigger to unlock a door and then specifying a delay before the door locks again e Scaling and Deadbanding Converts or scales incoming raw data to a different valuerange and indicates a dead or non recalculating band around a scaled value e Utilities Provides ways
251. gle operation All the tags receive the same tag definition You specify an array by entering a value in the Array Dimensions field of the Tag Definition dialog This value defines the number of elements included in the array Tipim Any Subacrigt H General GE Semene SENE De scri pee Specifies the number of elements inthe array gt 104 zh 3 D Q If you specify a value in the Array Dimensions field multiple elements are created in the real time database Once created each element can be referenced individually The value you specify in the Array Dimensions field depends on whether you are defining a single dimensional or multi dimensional array Defining One dimensional Arrays For one dimensional arrays specify a single number in the Array Dimensions field One dimensional array names take the form tagnameLn where tagname is the name defined in the Tagname field of the Tag Definition dialog n isa unique number assigned to each element in the array starting with 0 Each number is surrounded with brackets FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 207 DEFINING TAGS Defining Element Arrays For example if you specify in the Array Dimensions field for a tag named temp the following three elements are created in the real time database temp 0 temp 1 temp 2 The array numbering starts counting at 0 If you specify 4 you rece
252. gned a logical name called a tag This tag is used to reference the element in the real time database 2 1 L ld Realtime database D i Logically represents j A ements an element in database Once an element is defined you can make unlimited references to this element Any FactoryLink task containing a reference to an element can read and write data to and from the element at run time During development FactoryLink stores tag names in the F LAPP directory in the object database table This information is updated to the CT files when the run time application is started Some tags are already defined in FactoryLink when it is shipped Others are defined during application development either within the Configuration Manager or the Application Editor This chapter describes how to define tag names for database elements and provides some suggesti ons on how to use tags in your application TAG TYPES PowerNet can transfer any tag type including mailboxes However PowerN et does not route mailbox replies like FLLAN does It can only send mailbox tags that don t require a reply 9N49MOd FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 157 POWERNET TASK DEFINITION Tag Naming Guidelines TAG NAMING GUIDELINES The following guidelines apply when you assign a tag name e 1 32 characters long If using an array add delimiters of up to 16 characters Refer to Defining Element Arrays
253. gs defined 226 W watch list adding elements 325 deleting elements 326 finding elements 326 retrieving 328 storing 327 window 457 Windows accessing Run Time Manager 299 color scheme 285 network protocols 122 write operations DDE Client Windows 107 writing real time database elements 329 to an element 339 X x and R Chart 458 x and Sigma Chart 458 XOR 458 Z zooming 197 1 472 FactoryLink 6 5 0
254. gure Data Point Logging to log an event at a specific time interval with the minimum interval being one second Fixed time interval logging rates are based on either seconds minutes hours or days as calculated from a starting point of midnight It may be appropriate to log a tag value every hour or oncea day depending on the tag lt lt Fixed time interval based logging is tied to time maintained by internal clock based on the SECTIME global tag This tag tracks time from the starting point of midnight J anuary 1 1980 in intervals of one second Logging Based on a Change in a Trigger Tag You can configure Data Point Logging to log the value of a tag whenever a specified trigger tag is triggered Whenever the trigger tag is triggered Data Point Logger logs the event LOGGING DATA Data Point Logging allows you to specify tags to be logged when you are configuring the system and dynamically during run time At initialization Data Point Logging determines which file is newer e The configuration table CT file FLAPP shared ct dplogger ct The Data Point Save file FLAPP log dplogger dyn e The Data Point Save file specified in the Dynamic Logging Control panel Command File Tag field The newer file becomes the list of all tags currently configured for logging If the Command File Tag is not configured or if the tag contains an empty string the default Data Poi
255. h of the year 1 12 DD istheday of the month 1 31 is the year since 1900 00 99 If you specified during installation you wanted to install the Old version of FLLAN FLLAN s LOG files will have the following path and file names FLAPP NET FLLANSND LOG and FLAPP NET FLLANRCV LOG If you configure F actoryLink to create log file for a task FactoryLink logs a message in its log file whenever that task generates an error The messages in the log file are more descriptive than those that appear on the Run Time Manager screen For debugging purposes configure F actoryLink to create log files automatically at startup Complete the following steps to configure F actoryLink to do this Choose System Configuration from the Main Menu The System Configuration Information panel is displayed Ensurethe current domain selected is correct in the Configuration Manager Domain Selection box Locate the corresponding entry for thetask in the Task Name field Place the cursor on the corresponding entry Tab over to the Program Arguments field Enter L V zz not case sensitive where 15 2 3 or 4 in the Program Arguments field The greater the number the more information you receive Enter L D where 15 any number from 2 to 22 for the File Manager and FLLAN tasks Choose Enter to save the information Repeat steps 2 through 7 for each task that needs a log file FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 287 106
256. h the mouse Theresults are unpredictable Horizontal Scroll Bar Usethe horizontal scroll bar to move the window s contents to the right or tothe left in three ways e Point tothe push button at either end of the scroll bar and click the left button to move tothe left or right one column at a time e Choose the slider box and press and hold the left button while moving slider box along the vertical scroll bar to scroll horizontally Release the left button when you finish e Point tothe left or right of the slider box and click the left button to jump left or right 220 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Multiple Development Applications WORKING WITH MULTIPLE DEVELOPMENT APPLICATIONS You can use the Configuration Manager to develop any number of applications simultaneously however each application requires a unique directory for storing configuration tables For example assume you are building two applications one for collecting data from a station in the Southern part of town and another for collecting data from a station in the Northern area Both applications are located on the C drive The path to the Southern development application is station south the path to the Northern development application is station north The following sections describe how to open different applications and share information between them Opening a New Development Application Although y
257. has been madeto dosetheM ain Menu window while one or more Edit windows were still open If the Main Menu window is closed while Edit windows are still open data not written to the database will be lost Action Choose OK to exit Choose Cancel to abort the exit Out of RAM Cause Nomore memory is available Action Close any unnecessary windows or programs Add more virtual memory to the system if this error occurs often Records can t be deleted from this file Cause An attempt has been made to delete records from a read only file Action Donot attempt to delete records from this file Records can t be pasted to this file Cause An attempt has been made to paste records to a read only file Action Do not attempt to paste records to this file Required field is blank Cause A field requiring entry is blank Action Enter something other than spaces in this field 105 Run time only license Development option not installed Cause A task may not be loaded and or configured because it is not in the option key Action Check the option key contents by typing UKEY I Software has not been enabled Cause error has occurred with thef1 key file in the opt directory ou RU E 50 2 Action 1 Run KEYINST if an invalid or archaic agreement is found re enter the configuration information 2 Run FLKEYVAL and follow the instructions for registration FactoryLink
258. he Edit pulldown menu The selected block is cut from the panel and copied to the paste buffer Choose Reset Mark from the Edit pulldown menu to cancel the cut operation in a text entry panel ou 56 m 5 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 241 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Editing Configuration Panels Although the cut option resembles the delete option in that the selected data is removed from the panel the delete option does not move the data to the paste buffer Unlike material that has been cut deleted material cannot be reinserted in the panel Pasting a Copied or Cut Line Entry 1 Perform a copy or cut operation as described above 2 Position the cursor where you want the copied or cut data inserted 3 Choose Paste from the Edit pulldown menu You can paste the block more than once because the Paste operation does not clear the paste buffer Searching for a Text String 1 Choose Search from the Edit pulldown menu The following panel is displayed Enia the maser parem Sa Eme 2 Enter thetext you want to find 3 Choosethe Enter button to start the search FactoryLink locates the next occurrence of the text in the current file starting at the cursor position and searching downward Repeat this action to search for any additional entries of the text Choose Cancel to end the search and return to the Configuration Manager 242 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fund
259. he priority is a number hierarchy assigned to each individual alarm Use a number between 1 and 9999 to set priority Multiple alarms can hold the same priority and multiple groups and areas can have common priority numbers within them At least one group must be defined The use of areas and priorities is optional Oncethe grouping properties are assigned they can be used to filter and sort the alarms on the Alarm Viewer 50 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals ALARM LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Parent Child Relationship PARENT CHILD RELATIONSHIP Many times the generation of one alarm causes another alarm to be generated When these relationships exist you generally do not want to display the additional alarms resulting from the first alarm For instance if the closing of a valve that feeds four different pipelines generates an alarm it is a reasonable assumption that the lack of flow in each pipe would generate an alarm based on the value of the flowmeter element These resulting alarms would not be important to you because you already know the flow has been cutoff and why This relationship between the alarms is identified as a parent child relationship In this example the main valve is the parent alarm of each of the flow alarms The resulting child alarms are not displayed or counted as active alarms because they are a result of the parent alarm lt lt Figure 84 3 Child Alarm Child Alarm arent A
260. he user domain This enables you to monitor elements from both the shared and user domains If you are monitoring FactoryLink tasks run RTMON in the domain in which the desired task s runs For example to monitor the status of the Alarm Supervisor task run RTMON in the shared domain 322 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Accessing the Run Time Monitor 3 You may have to choose Next Page from the Display Control area to see the RTMON task in the Task Control list 4 Choose the button next to RTMON in the Task Control list The Run Time Monitor panel opens r FactoryLink Run Time Monitor Be x Options HM gt l Poll Rate 1 000 This panel consists of two parts Menu Bar Provides access to a group of tools that permit you to use RTMON through the Options menu The following pulldown menu is displayed when you choose Options from the menu bar Watch Process Tag Input Command Input Global Info Shutdown All Exit Each item on this pulldown menu is discussed in the following pages Poll Rate Bar The Poll Rate bar is a scroll bar that allows you to indicate the rate at which RTMON polls the processes it is monitoring The Poll Rate bar can specify from 10 one tenth of a second to 10 seconds Move the slider bar located on the scroll bar to change the poll rate The remainder of this chapter describes how to use the Run Time Monitor FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals
261. iables table Defines Real Time Database elements Math amp Logic reads or writes to An element must be defined before it can be used in a procedure or it will be considered an undefined variable and will not validate Define each element referenced by the procedures in a program file by entering its tag name this table This table has one panel Math and Logic Variables Information e Math and Logic Triggers table Defines the elements used to trigger the Math amp Logic procedures to run For each trigger element defined enter the associated procedure the trigger element is responsible for triggering and the method of execution interpreted or compiled This table has one panel Math and Logic Triggers I nformation e Math and Logic Proceduretable Writes the Math amp Logic procedures required by the application Each program file must be named exactly as it is named in the Math and Logic Triggers I nformation panel but with a PRG extension After writing a procedure and saving it to a program file name edit it in this panel This table is a text entry panel Math and Logic Procedure filename prg o ey o 5 a r FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 133 MATH amp LOGIC TASK DEFINITION Creating Programs Trigger Elements Trigger elements used in the body of Math amp Logic procedures must first be defined in the Math and Logic Variables table Because many Math amp Logic procedures can access th
262. ible y Buisn az orm 5 a 5 Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 259 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages Error closing database Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set to FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by F actoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for F actoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardware is compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur Error opening database file Cause Thespecified CDB database file does not exist The user does not have sufficient privilege to access the file The file is corrupted Action Verify the following 1 The existence of the database file 2 The user has proper privilege to access the file 3 Theintegrity of the database and index files using the DBCHK utility Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur Error opening index file Cause
263. ical mode and then return to the trending screen FactoryLink reloads the trend chart with the same historical data you were viewing before you changed screens lt lt ZOOMING AND PANNING Because historical trend data is written to a relational database it can be arranged to show different data ranges pan and these ranges expanded or collapsed zoom Using F actoryLink you can zoom and pan to a particular sample or group in event charts or time in time based charts Panning allows you to select the time span of data to display in a historical trend chart Using this feature you can move forward or backward through historical data and you can move to a specific time or sample Zooming either doubles the amount of data displayed or decreases the amount displayed by half You see the same number of points but you zoom in for a wider start end range or zoom out for a narrower range Pan and zoom fields animated as input text fields should not be set for background updates If they are and you disable and enable windows with trend charts in historical mode the pan and zoom settings are executed This does not occur when changing the drawing within a window PEN TYPES Using FactoryLink you can create either fixed or variable pens Fixed pens allow you to permanently assign a database column to a particular pen Variable pens allow you to assign the column to a pen at run time You can assign multiple pens toa
264. ication problem Read Operations In a read operation the DDE Client task performs a read of the DDE server item names specified in the Read Writetable The FactoryLink read operation can be of two types e Block Read or Triggered Reads the values of the DDE server item names specified in a Read Writetableand writes them to the real time database As part of the configuration of a Read Writetablein a triggered block read the user specifies a trigger element in the real time database to initiate read operations When the value of this trigger element is 1 ON and has changed sincethe last scan the DDE Client task performs a read of the DDE Server item names you specified in the Read Writetable Triggered block read operations allow the DDE Client task to achieve maximum performance by transmitting the minimum number of read commands necessary to collect the data specified in the Read Writetable 106 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE DDE TASK DEFINITION DDE Client Functions e Advise U nadvise or Not Triggered The DDE Client task can be configured to notify the DDE server it wants to be updated when the values of the 89 Read Writetable change A digital tag valueis associated with this feature If the digital tag valueis 1 ON the DDE Client alerts the DDE server it wants to be updated on changes of the Read Writetable If the digital tag valueis O OFF no such updating is performed Write Oper
265. iew the tasks associated with a specific domain 1 Ensure the current domain selected is correct in the Configuration Manager Domain Selection box 2 Choose System Configuration from the Main Menu double click on System Configuration to open System Configuration Information panel 3 Change the domain specified in the Domain Selection box to see the tasks in the System Configuration Information panel associated with the other domain Refer to Domains for Run time Tasks on page 33 for information about domain defaults Adding New Tasks The Run Time Manager uses pre defined elements and array dimensions to automatically display items onscreen These element names and array dimensions appear in the System Configuration Information panel for each task displayed on the Run Time Manager screen If you add another task to the Run Time Manager screen use the next available array dimension FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 281 USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Editing Task Information Determining the Next Array Dimension The next available array dimension is determined by a task s position in the display sequence If you view the System Configuration table associated with the SHARED domain you will find all element names associated with Run Time Manager end with a dimension of 0 Persistence element names end with a dimension of 1 Timer elements end in 2 and so on For example the complete entry in the Task Status field f
266. ify a trigger element that triggers the Persistence task to copy the current save file to a backup file This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure Persistence operations Refer to Persistence on page 21 in the F actoryLink Configuration Guide for information on procedures to configure this task Use Persistence on page 295 in the FactoryLink Reference Guide for a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages 144 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals PERSISTENCE TASK DEFINITION Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Persistence begins during application development Whether configuring a new application or reconfiguring an existing application you must first determine which elements are persistent when the values of the persistent elements are saved to disk and how these saved values are restored during a warm start Then specify this information on the Tag Definition dialog when defining a persistent element At run time the Persistence task saves the values of the persistent elements to its own internal disk cache and the task writes the data to disk from there Saving the persistent values to memory first increases processing speed and ensures all values meant to be saved are saved within the allotted time The Persistence task runs under each domain that requires persistent data to be saved The RESOLVE program executed by the FLRUN command creates
267. ig USER DIGITAL Demo screen math trigger demo wheel USER ANALOG Demo screen belt wheel drive demo yel botvalve USER DIGITAL Demo screen yellow pipe bottom valve demo yel pipe USER ANALOG Demo screen yellow pipe level demo yel pour USER DIGITAL Demo screen yellow pipe pouring demo yel topvalve USER DIGITAL Demo screen yellow pipe top valve edi blk1 USER ANALOG EDI block port 1 edi 2 SHARED ANALOG EDI block 2 tags edi blkwrl state SHARED DIGITAL EDI block write state for com1 edi blkwr1 trig SHARED DIGITAL EDI block write trigger for com1 edi_blkwr2_state SHARED DIGITAL EDI block write state for com2 edi_blkwr2_trig SHARED DIGITAL EDI block write trigger for com2 edi_test SHARED DIGITAL EDI math table trigger edi_usl1 SHARED ANALOG EDI unsolicited block 1 edi_usl2 SHARED ANALOG EDI unsolicited block 2 edi_write SHARED DIGITAL EDI block write trigger flfm_del1 USER DIGITAL File Manager delete trigger flfm dir1 USER DIGITAL File manager directory trigger flfm dir rscrl USER ANALOG FLFM remote DIR scroll tag flfm dir scrl1 USER ANALOG File manager directory scroll tag 372 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 1 Tagname Domain Type Description flfm_rdel USER DIGITAL FLFM remote DEL command trigger flfm_rdir USER DIGITAL FLFM remote DIR trigger flfm_remote_dir USER MESSAGE FLFM remote directory name
268. ilable array dimension Choose Enter to save the information when the panel is complete Note You must add new items to the end of the panel to reflect the appropriate display sequence See the previous section for more information about adding tasks to the System Configuration Information panel FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 283 106 oi 5 o lt 0 e 3 USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Setting the Run Time Graphics Windows SETTING THE RUN TIME GRAPHICS WINDOWS You can determine which window should appear first top when the Run Time Graphics task starts up Use the Window Management Control panel to specify the top screen Choose the Windows M anagement option from the Main Menu The Windows Manager Control panel is displayed with all fields visible B Lim Yan ba Ce eh Caneel Exi Specify the following information Top TAG Name of the element used to determine the top window The default is TOPWINDOW The valid data type is message Default Enter an alphanumeric string of between 1 to 8 characters to define the name of the default top window This name must also be defined in the Application Editor window configuration The default is FL MAIN Note New applications created with FLNEW use the default values 284 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Changing the Windows Color Scheme CHANGIN
269. ile cannot be opened it may already be opened by another process Action Rerun theFactoryLink installation if the file does not exist AC file doesn t exist for tag file Cause TheFLINK AC OBJ ECT AC does not exist or cannot be opened If it does not exist FactoryLink installation may have not completed normally If the file cannot be opened it may already be opened by another process Action Rerun theFactoryLink installation if the file does not exist AC file doesn t exist for type file Cause TheFLINK AC TYPE AC does not exist or cannot be opened If it does not exist FactoryLink installation may have not completed normally If the file cannot be opened it may already be opened by another process Action Rerun theFactoryLink installation if the file does not exist AC file doesn t exist for XREF file Cause TheFLINK AC XREF AC does not exist or cannot be opened If it does not exist FactoryLink installation may have not completed normally If the file cannot be opened it may already be opened by another process Action Rerun theFactoryLink installation if the file does not exist 248 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages Can t copy cut block in progress Cause Action A copy operation was attempted while a cut block was in progress Complete the cut or cancel it with the Esc key or the CANCEL button Can t create database file Caus
270. ilename Action Retry the FLREST Copy the application to the FLAPP directory manually if that does not solve the problem 416 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES Utility Messages An error occurred while extracting application files FLTOOLS eo co Cause The multiplatform file may be corrupt or out of hard disk space 1 Action Theutility FLTOOLS provides an error message of its own Follow the FLTOOLS onscreen instructions Cannot open Configuration file source specification FLCONFIG for reading Cause You entered an incorrect source path Action Retry theFLREST with a correct source path and a LOC parameter to restore a multiplatform save T lt 2 Destination path is not full Include drive with directory i e C FLAPP Cause You did not enter a full path Action Re execute FLREST using a complete destination path parameter 2 Error 7 Designated FLTAR file not in FLTAR format FLTAR aborted Cause TheFactoryLink file extraction utility FLTAR FL TOOLS a transparent utility hidden within the F LREST utility was given a file either corrupt or not a multiplatform save file The file might be a platform specific save Action Retry the FLREST without specifying a third parameter File FLINK environment variable ac titles missing from FactoryLink system Cause FactoryLink IV file is missing Action Verify the FLINK en
271. in FactoryLink when it is shipped Others are defined during application development either within the Configuration Manager or the Application Editor This chapter describes how to define tag names for database elements and provides some suggestions on how to usetags in your application 420 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK LITE Tag Naming Guidelines TAG NAMING GUIDELINES The following guidelines apply when you assign a tag name e 1 32 characters long If using an array add delimiters of up to 16 characters Refer to Defining Element Arrays on page 207 for more details If using PowerNet use the model 32 characters less 7 characters 25 characters If using Scaling and Deadbandi ng use the model 32 characters less 7 characters less 9 characters Refer tothe Application Editor Guidefor details on the added extensions e Valid characters are A Z 0 9 e start with a number e No embedded spaces System Added Extensions When defining tag attributes in the Tag Definition dialog new tags are created automatically from the originally defined tag name if you are using PowerNet or Scaling and Deadbanding PowerNet T o 2 eA lt 3 zc e When new tag is created an extension of up to 6 characters plus a dot 7 characters maximum is added These additional characters reduce the maximum length of the original tag name therefore the maximum effective length of the o
272. in products such as Excel or Lotus Either the server or the client can terminate DDE conversations The following graphic illustrates this server client relationship z 2 lt 5 23 Jg Os m 2 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 99 DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE DDE TASK DEFINITION DDE Conversations DDE clients access the FactoryLink DDE Server Initiate External FactoryLink DDE DDE Client rver Lotus Excel Serve Acknowledge FactoryLink DDE Client can initiate DDE conversations with external DDE servers Initiate External DDE Server Lotus Excel FactoryLink DDE Client Acknowledge DDE conversations can be terminated by either the DDE server or the DDE client Terminate External FactoryLink DDE DDE Client Lotus Excel Server Terminate 100 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE DDE TASK DEFINITION DDE Conversations DDE Messages The applications involved in a DDE conversation do not have to be specifically developed to work with each other since the applications communicate via DDE messages DDE messages allow two or more Windows applications to communicate and share data FactoryLink supports the following standard DDE messages Advise Requests notification when an item changes e Execute Acknowledges the message Initiate Start DDE conversation Poke Send new value to the server Request Request a value from
273. in the Task Name field w L uny Cause Therequested task is not running FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 355 USING RUN TIME MONITOR Run time Manager Messages Action Ensure you started all tasks needed to run the application 14 FLE BAD USER NAME Cause TheFLUSER environment variable is not set Action Settheenvironment variables re start FactoryLink 22 FLE ALREADY ACTIVE Cause Thetask is already running Action None do not start a task already running 23 FLE NOT LOCKED Cause Internal error a task tried to unlock the real time database without having locked it first Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section 24 FLE LOCK FAILED Cause Internal error a task used an invalid Task ID to lock the real time database Therefore the task did not successfully lock the real time database or perform its function Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section 25 FLE LOCK EXPIRED Cause Atask has kept the real time database locked longer than the kernel allows Action None currently the kernel allows tasks to lock the real time database for as long as necessary Therefore the lock time will not expire 26 FLE WAIT FAILED Cause Internal error whiletrying to do a change wait on an element a task sent an invalid Task ID to the real time database Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section
274. ined in FactoryLink when it is shipped Others are defined during application development either within the Configuration M anager or the Application Editor This chapter describes how to define tag names for database elements and provides some suggestions on how to use tags in your application pue 2 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 181 SCALING AND DEADBANDING TASK DEFINITION Tag Naming Guidelines TAG NAMING GUIDELINES The following guidelines apply when you assign a tag name e 1 32 characters long If using an array add delimiters of up to 16 characters Refer to Defining Element Arrays on page 207 for more details If using PowerNet use the model 32 characters less 7 characters 25 characters If using Scaling and Deadbanding use the model 32 characters less 7 characters less 9 characters Refer to the Application Editor Guide for details on the added extensions e Valid characters are A Z 0 9 e Donot start with a number No embedded spaces System Added Extensions When defining tag attributes in the Tag Definition dialog new tags are created automatically from the originally defined tag name if you are using PowerNet or Scaling and Deadbanding PowerNet When a new tag is created an extension of up to 6 characters plus a dot 7 characters maximum is added These additional characters reduce the maximum length of the original tag name therefore the maxi mum eff
275. information on the options Indicates whether or not an element s change status flags are set to 1 ON or 0 OFF during a warm start This column is blank if NONE is present in the Persistence field You can modify the entry in this field 3 Choose Exit to exit this list 228 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Tags Viewing Element Cross Reference List A tag referencing a real time database element can be used multiple times throughout the application The element cross reference list defines each instance where the tag is used in the application Perform the following steps to view where references to real time database elements are displayed in the application 1 Choose View from the main menu bar or from the configuration panel menu bar Fl Configuration Manager lel x Application View Utilities Exit Help F1 One of the following pulldown menus is displayed Main Menu Ctil M Main Menu Ctl M Object List Next Screen Ctl N Xref List Previous Screen Ctl P Domain List Object List X ref List View pulldown menu from configuration Domain List View pulldown menu from Main Menu Search Next Tag Attributes Ctrl T Field Choices Ctrl K 2 Choose X ref List The following list is displayed on the screen 105 5 mc 5 o o 5 e er FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 229 USING T
276. ing System 2 05 2 448 operator 448 OR 448 ordering tag names 129 ordering data 186 integer 79 timestamp 79 OS 2 449 accessing Configuration Manager 213 accessing Run Time Manager 299 network protocols 122 output echoing a comment 341 panning 197 parent child relationship 51 Pareto Analysis 449 Pareto Diagram 449 PARSECML 138 pasting line entry in a configuration panel 242 path name 449 p Chart percent defective 449 pens pen types 197 Percent Defective 449 Persistence configuration changes resolving 147 JK L MN OP QRS TUV WX YZ overview 143 principles of operation 145 pixel 450 platform specific save 392 403 PLC 449 pointing device 450 poll rate bar 323 polled data 151 polled exception data 151 polygon 450 PowerN et client to server data transfer 156 data transfer method 155 definitions 151 methodology 152 overview 149 server to client transfer 155 startup 155 tag naming convention 157 tag type conversion 159 Preconfigured Data Point Logging Tables 92 predefined elements 210 Print Spooler overview 161 Process Analysis Diagram 450 Process Control 451 processes monitoring 331 program arguments Browser 71 Trend 199 Programmable Counters analog and digital values 164 elements 164 examples 165 overview 163 Index 1 467 A B C D EF GHI JK LM N OP QRS TUVWXYZ principles of operation 164 Programmable Logic Controller 451 prompt 451 Q Quality Characteristic 451 R Range 452 Rational
277. ing ones first and with a line chart showing cumulative data vs data type path name Route of a sequence of file names or directory names for an operating system to follow to locate information stored in a computer pen Element whose value represents a particular combination of attributes for trending activity Contains values used in an on linetrending chart the same way values recorded by a pen are used in a strip chart recorder pen trace Graphic representation of a record of trending activity associated with a particular pen On an on line trend chart resembles the 111 line drawn by a pen on a strip chart recorder percent defective For acceptance sampling the percentage of defective units or units of unacceptable quality in a lot percent specifier See variable specifier sprintf string persistence Ability of an element to maintain its value over an indefinite period of time persistent Real time database elements that maintain their value when a elements domain instance is closed either deliberately or inadvertently from a power loss or faulty process This is possible because the values of the persistent elements are written to permanent storage and are not affected by a system shut down o o lt FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 449 A B C D EF GHtIJd K LEM N OP QRS TUV WX Y Z GLOSSARY physical station Physical address of an external device on a network pixel group of light phosphors
278. ink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Storing Watch List The elements added to a watch list remain in USING RUN TIME MONITOR Viewing the Current Value of Elements the list for as long as the Run Time Manager is active Once you close the Run Time Manager the watch list is discarded To prevent the necessity of rebuildi to monitor a set of data elements store the co ng a watch list each time you want ntents of the watch list to a file before exiting the Run Time Manager Perform the following steps to store the contents of a watch list 1 Addthe elements you want included in the watch list to the watch list display Refer to Adding Elements to a Watch L ist on page 325 for details on how to do this 2 Choose one of the following options from the watch list Options pulldown menu Save TAGS Saves the tag names of elements defined in the watch list Use this option if you want to see the values of these tags as they currently exist in the real time database when you restore this list Save Data Saves the tag names of elements defined in the watch list and their current values Usethis option if when you restorethis list you want to restore the values of these tags as they exist when the saveis made If you choose Save TAGS the following dialog is displayed requesting the name of the file to receive the watch list elements If you choose Save Data a similar dialog is displayed requesting the data filename
279. ions Lor l Enables logging of errors to the log file By default Trend does not log errors V 1 4 or v 1 4 Writes the trend chart events to terminal output If logging is enabled the trend chart events are written to the log file A verbose level of 1 generates minimum data and a level of 4 generates the most data Level 4 writes all the values of all the points for all the pens in a chart This level can generate a tremendous amount of data W 5 300 or Sets the maximum timeout in seconds for Trend to wait for a w 5 300 response from the Historian task The default is 30 seconds lt lt Perform the following steps to configure more arguments 1 Ensure the current domain selected is USER on the Configuration Manager Main Menu in the Domain Selection box 2 Choose the System Configuration option to display the System Configuration Information panel 3 Enter oneor more arguments separated by spaces in the Program Arguments column for the Trend task FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 199 TRENDING TASK DEFINITION Configuring Program Arguments 200 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 104 Defining Tags Data stored in the real time database is an element Each element is assigned a logical name called a tag This tag name is used to reference the element in the real time database Tag Names pump1_tmp pump2_tmp pump3_tmp Realtime database
280. isor Format specifiers permit you to define a variable when a literal is expected Variable specifiers can consist of two types of objects Ordinary characters which are copied literally to the output stream e Format specifiers which indicate the format in which variable information will be displayed FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 39 OVERVIEW Using Format Specifiers Format specifiers use the following form flags width L prec type where flags width prec type Always precedes a format specifier Controls the format of the output This can be one of the following Left justifies within the field If you do not specify this flag the field is right justified Fills the spaces to the left of the value with zeros until it reaches the specified width Specifies minimum field width in decimal This field is not valid for floating point notations Floating point fields are always padded with spaces Controls the precision of the numeric field What precision defines depends on the format type specified by thetype variable For exponential type e or floating point type f notations specify the number of digits to be printed after the decimal point For short version of exponential or floating point notations type 9 specify the maximum number of significant digits For all other types specify the minimum number of digits to print Leading Os are added to make up the necessary width Sp
281. isplayed at the bottom of the specified domain s Run Time Manager screen 282 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CHANGING DOMAIN ASSOCIATIONS a Mw 10 11 If an application has special task requirements you can change its domain associations Use the Main Menu s Delete Copy and Paste options from the Edit menu as outlined below Ensure the current domain selected is correct in the Configuration Manager Domain Selection box Open the System Configuration Information panel from the Main Menu Choose the task information you want to move Use the Edit menu s Delete function to remove the task information Modify the row for the last task in the current domain to usethe array dimensions Changing Domain Associations of the deleted task to prevent a blank line from appearing on the Run Time Manager screen Choose Enter to save the changes Ensurethe current domain selected is correct in the Configuration Manager Domain Selection box Open the System Configuration Information panel Starting under the last row of information in the System Configuration Information panel add the required information about the new task to each field You can usethe Main Menu s Copy and Paste functions to copy duplicate information such as element names from the previous row Review the previous task in thetask list to determine its dimension Assign the new task s element names the next ava
282. iting for elements to change since startup Process D number usually decimal assigned to the task by the operating system Indicator of whether or not the task s terminate flag is set Number of times the task has waited for access to the real time database since startup Number of elements read by the task since startup Number of elements the task has written since startup Number of milliseconds the task has had the real time database locked Total number of milliseconds the task has been asleep since task startup This value is updated after each sleep cycle 332 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Monitoring FactoryLink Processes This panel has one item on its menu bar Choose Options from the process list menu bar The following pulldown menu is displayed Start Stop Set Terminate Kill Find Exit When you choose one of these options it acts on the task currently displayed in the process list window These are Start Starts thetask Stop Stops the task immediately Set Terminate Stops the task the next time it checks its terminate flag This is the recommended way to stop the task Kill Force stops a task Use this option only if both the Set Terminate and Stop options could not stop the task This usually indicates a task is caught in an infinite loop and is not reading its terminate flag If you use this option to stop a task and if the task had the real time databas
283. its only three records it overwrites the oldest record when the fourth record is logged Employee Oldest record deleted Employee Oldest record Smith Jones Oldest record Jones Johnson Second oldest Johnson Adams Newest record Newest record Adams FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 83 DATABASE LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Deletion Methods Subgroup Rollover Subgroup rollover is available if you are logging by group subgroup or subgroup Subgroup rollover permits you to specify the maximum number of subgroups allowed in the database file Once the maximum is reached the next attempt to create a new subgroup overwrites the oldest subgroup in the database The subgroup number assigned to the oldest subgroup becomes the subgroup number for the new subgroup Oldest subgroup Subgroup Gals Used deleted Subgroup Gals Used Shift_1 45 Shift_2 12 Oldest es Oldest subgroup lt Shift 1 16 Shift_2 56 subgroup Shift_1 27 Shift_2 22 Shift_2 12 Shift_3 34 Second Second oldest Shift 3 oldest subgroup Shift 2 56 18 subgroup Shift_2 22 Shift_1 25 Newest subgrou Third oldest 34 ae subgroup Shift 3 18 J New shift 25 For example the group name is Shift and allows three subgroups before subgroup rollover occurs A new subgroup is created every eight hours
284. ive 5 elements 0 1 2 3 4 Therefore you must specify a number less than the actual number you would like to define Defining Multi dimensional Arrays For multi dimensional arrays specify multiple numbers separated by a comma in the Array Dimensions field Multi dimensional array names take the form tagname n 1 n 2 where tagname isthe defined in the Tagname field of the Tag Definition dialog n1 isaunique number representing the first dimension in the array assigned to each element starting with 0 Each number is surrounded by brackets n2 isa unique number representing the second dimension in the array assigned to each element starting with 0 Each number is surrounded by brackets For example if you specify 3 2 in the Array Dimensions field for a tag named msg tag the following six elements are created in the real time database msg tag 0 0 msg tag 1 0 msg tag 2 0 msg tag 0 1 msg tag 1 1 msg tag 2 1 The array numbering starts counting at 0 If you specify 4 you receive 5 elements 0 1 2 3 4 Therefore you must specify a number one less than the actual number you would like to define 208 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DEFINING TAGS Defining Element Arrays Maximum Number of Arrays This section describes the largest number of elements that can be created for each array This depends on the platform and on the element s data type For Windows NT OS 2 and
285. ive and path The default is cA flapp If you do not specify filename in the destination path a multiplatform FLREST will fail 4 Choose the type of restore to perform This can be one of the following T i 9 lt 7 Local Backup Performs a platform specific restore Local Multiplatform Performs a multiplatform save to a local drive Restore File Network Performs a multiplatform restore from a remote node to the Multiplatform Save current node Choose this option if you want to restore the File application from a node running FactoryLink under another operating system This option uses the TCP IP executable rcp to copy multiplatform restores between nodes on the network This requires the source node to be configured as a network server and the destination node hostname to exist within the source HOST EQU file 5 FLREST spans diskettes for only the Local Backup format Local Multiplatform restores do not span diskettes Choose OK or Cancel when you complete this panel OK Initiates the restore CANCEL Exits without restoring the application FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 393 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLREST The following files are restored by both platform specific and multiplatform FLREST operations e Configuration tables CDB M DB e Graphics files DRW G GC GS GP GPC GPS PL PLS PLC e Report Format files RPT F MT e Math amp L
286. ject conditional conditional statement configuration database Configuration Manager configuration mode configuration table configuration table generator script constant continuous data continuous variable I JK LE MN OP QR STU VW X Y Z When starting a domain instance the initialization of all elements including persistent elements to their default values found in the Configuration Manager See persistence persistent elements and warm start 1 Part of a relational database record a record is composed of one or more columns Also called a field 2 A vertical group of data entry fields of the same type Those sources of variability in a process which are truly random or inherent in the process itself Element that is force written to a 1 ON when an operation is complete See trigger Two or more graphic objects combined so the system treats them as a single object See simple object subobjects Depending on or relating to a condition s See control statement Relational database that stores FactoryLink configuration data FactoryLink development tool that allows you to define the functionality of each task in an application by specifying information in a configuration table s M ode of operation that the FactoryLink system is in when you set up an application In the configuration mode you use the Application Editor or the Configuration M anager Binary file or CT file that the CTGEN
287. junction with FactoryLink s FLLAN option to initiate operations within other FactoryLink stations on a network TheFile Manager initiates the following operations which are performed by the operating system e Copy afile e Renamea file e Deletea file e Print a file e Display a directory Typeafile lt lt File Manager initiates these operations with six commands COPY REN DEL PRINT DIR and TYPE These commands perform the same functions as their operating system counterparts The File Manager controls all file operations through the FactoryLink real time database You can configure other FactoryLink tasks to initiate File Manager operations These include the following You can configure input functions in Graphics so an operator can use them to initiate filemanagement operations at run time such as to display a list of recipes or reports TheTimer task can trigger File Manager to automatically back up files to a networked server at certain intervals such as each day at midnight e TheTimer task can alsotrigger File Manager to delete log files automatically at certain intervals such as once every four hours or after certain events such as when log files reach a specified size e Alarm Supervisor can trigger File Manager to print alarm files JoDeue N FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 113 FILE MANAGER TASK DEFINITION To enable a local node to perform file management operations
288. k write requests The highest priority lowest number is processed first Digital element with a value 0 OFF when a block write of the elements specified in a write table is in progress and 1 ON when the table is inactive When the EDI task initializes the Block Write State element is force written to 1 ON Digital element with a value when forced to 1 ON initiates a block write of the values specified in a Read Write I nformation panel See trigger 1 Digital 2 A value of 0 or 1 represented internally in binary notation Load an operating system onto a computer A configuration table specifying the correlation between elements and database information The size of a data buffer in networking Hardware component plugged into a F actoryLink button holder that contains information used by F actoryLink to enable licensed software options See button holder protection device Hardware device that contains information about the licensed FactoryLink options See block key button key ring protection device 432 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals AB CD EF GHI JK LM N OP QRS TUVWXYZ GLOSSARY byte Unit of storage consisting of eight bits Because each bit has two possible states a byte has 256 2 to the 8th power possible states o o f 5 lt FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 433 A B C D EF GHtIJd K LEM N OP QRS TUV WX Y Z GLOSSARY c chart For attribute data A control chart of the numb
289. l value 00 to 1F 0 31 decimal that specifies the priority within the priority dass listed above Thehigher the number the higher the priority within the class Hexadecimal value 00 to 1F default 201 Refer tothe appropriate operating system guide for programming for further information about processing priority within an operating system e 5 o lt o e 3 Executable File Location of the executable file If this is a relative path name to FLINK do not use leading spaces Any path name which has the following format DIRECTORY SUBDIRECTORY FILENAME For example bin iml Note Do not use a file extension of exe for this entry It is not required and can cause undesirable results if the application is ported to UNIX FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 277 USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Application This field is reserved for future use Directory Program This field is reserved for future use Directory Program Values used as the arguments to the process If this field is blank Arguments noarguments are passed to the task Program arguments are not case sensitive The table below shows valid arguments for applicable tasks Table 106 1 Valid Program Arguments FactoryLink Task Valid Entries Descriptions Data Alarm Logger T Enables the limit value to be written to the limit tag If the T option is not specified the limit value is not initialized upon Data Alarm L
290. lapp dir is the full path to the directory If you do not specify flapp dir the default FLAPP directory is used Be sure not to use a space between the A option and f app dir Ttitlefile defines the files to check where titlefileis the name of the file containing the names of the AC files to check titlefilecan be the name of any file you created using a text editor FLINK AC TITLES path of the file that contains the names of all AC files accessible from the Configuration Manager Main Menu Usethis option if you want to check all the files FLINK AC TTITLES name of the file that contains the names of all AC files not directly accessiblefrom the Main Menu likethe object and cross reference databases Be sure not to use a space between the T option and titlefile C reports potential problems but does not try to correct them If this option is chosen only reporting occurs even if other options are specified D removes duplicate entries from the database files and generates a new index if any are found Be careful not to specify a file that permits duplicate entries or they will be removed I generates a new index for the database files FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 407 e T i lt 7 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES EXPLODE Vn W ac file AC gt filename out EXPLODE activates verbose mode where n indicates the level of verbosity This can be one of the follo
291. larm Child Alarm Child Alarm wiely If on the other hand the main valve is open and one of the individual pipeline flowmeters registers an alarm you would want to be advised In this case the child is not dependent on the parent because the child alarm initiated on its own This alarm is displayed and counts as an active alarm Distributed Alarm Logging allows you to specify parent child relationships for each alarm so you can determine if a relationship exists that would generate additional alarms you do not want to be advised of Each alarm can have multiple parent child relationships Alarms defined in a remote group can never act as a child alarm If an alarm has a defined Unique Alarm ID it can ac as a parent on the View node creating the child alarms FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 51 ALARM LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Parent Child Relationship Each alarm is evaluated by Distributed Alarm Logging and compared to its parent child relationship prior to displaying Ifthe alarmisa parent Distributed Alarm Logging displays the alarm If thealarmisa child and the parent is not active Distributed Alarm Logging displays the alarm Ifthealarmis a child and the parent is already active Distributed Alarm Logging determines if the child should be disregarded or displayed based on delay criteria you establish in the relationship Within the parent child relationship two kinds of delays can be specified e
292. lational database This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure Distributed Alarm Logging operations Refer to Distributed Alarm Logging on page 499 in the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for information on procedures to configure this task Use Distributed Alarm Logging on page 107 in the FactoryLink Reference Guide for a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 43 ALARM LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Alarm Logging Methodology ALARM LOGGING METHODOLOGY The following steps describe and illustrate how memory resident real time data is monitored for alarm conditions and is then logged to a disk based relational database 1 The real time database receives and stores data from various sources such as a remote device user input or computation results from a FactoryLink task 2 Distributed Alarm Logging reads and compares the values of the data elements stored in the real time database with criteria defined within Distributed Alarm Logging 3 When the value of the data element meets the criteria for an alarm Distributed Alarm Logging sends the alarm to the Application E ditor for display on the Alarm Viewer screen 4 Each timethe data value changes Distributed Alarm Logging evaluates the element and updates the Alarm Viewer through the Application Editor 5 When the value of the data element longer meets the criteria for
293. lause specifies which rows in a database table to place in the result table The following table represents part of a sample database table CAR Table 86 1 TRANDATE CONVEYOR CARNUM COLOR 19910126080000 I9 0 yellow 19910126083000 19910126090000 19910126093000 19910126100000 19910126103000 19910126110000 19910126113000 19910126120000 19910126123000 19910126130000 19910126133000 68 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DATABASE BROWSER TASK DEFINITION Use of Logical Expressions Table 86 1 TRANDATE CONVEYOR CARNUM COLOR 19910126150000 burgundy 19910126153000 blue 19910126163000 brown 19910126170000 burgundy A sample WHERE clause referencing the previous table CAR is 19910126160000 blue TRANDATE gt 19910126075959 AND TRANDATE lt 19910126170001 AND CONVEYOR 1 AND CARNUM gt 14 AND CARNUM lt 22 In this example the WHERE clause requests What colors cars 15 through 21 on conveyor 1 were painted between 8 00 and 5 00 P M on January 26 1991 Fromthis WHERE clause the relational database places the following values in a result table Table 86 2 19910126110000 1 15 black 19910126113000 1 16 black 19910126120000 1 17 white 19910126123000 1 18 white 19910126130000 1 19 blue 19910126133000 1 20 blue 19910126140000 1 21 blue FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 69 lt lt eseqeijeq
294. le user environment If you multi user environment this stops the application for all users Stop User Name Stops the application for the current user Always choose this button if you are running a multi user environment If this is the shared domain shareusr is displayed in this field If this is the user domain fluser is displayed in this field indicating the instance of the user domain In a single user environment this will always be fluser1 FactoryLink Displays the current FactoryLink directory Directory Application Displays the current application directory Directory 306 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MANAGER Run Time Manager User Interface Screen Display Controls The display control area provides the ability to open other user interface screens for the application 01 Alarm Viewer mi Hext Page 107 m Shared Processes Return to Application Alarm Supervisor Choose this button to open the alarm summary display Next Page Choose this button to display a second page of tasks This is necessary only if all the tasks in your application do not fit on a single display Shared Processes Choose this button to toggle between the user domain and the shared domain If you arein the user domain this button is titled Shared Processes f you choose this button you open the shared domain If you arein the shared domain this button is titled User Processes f you
295. lement number is displayed in output when you read the element FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 337 USING RUN TIME MONITOR Using Run Time Monitor Commands count identifies the number of elements in the array to display starting with the element identified by tag For example to display the values of three elements in an array starting with tag enter the following command d TEMP 4 3 This generates the following output 01 0078 15 5 2 where 01 isthe segment where tag is located 0078 isthenumber assigned tag This number can be used in command syntax in place of the tag name 15 5 2 arethe values of the three elements Press any key to stop the display from scrolling Press any key except s torestart the scroll Press any key then press s to stop the display Redirecting Read Output Read output is sent to the terminal screen unless redirected to a file using the o command The syntax is o filename where filenameis the name of the file to receive the output If you do not supply filename output is sent to the terminal screen 338 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Writing to an Element USING RUN TIME MONITOR Using Run Time Monitor Commands A number of commands write to an element If the tag type is message all text between the last character of the element name and the end of the line or semicolon is written including any leading or trailing spaces Newlines and semicolons are not writt
296. les to theX FLAPP directory by performing X COPY FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 415 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES Utility Messages Backup to filename FAILED Cause Either you entered an invalid destination path or there may bea network error Action Check theusagetoseeif you have entered an invalid destination path If so reenter the command using the correct destination path If you entered a valid destination path there may bea network error For network errors use rcp remote copying program to copy the application to the desired node The directory directory path does not exist Cause You specified a source path that does not exist Action Reenter the command with a valid source path Unknown third parameter Cause You have chosen an invalid third parameter Action Reenter the command using one of the following valid parameters to save to a remote node LOC to save to a local drive Verification of remote copy capability failed Cause FactoryLink is unable to remote copy to the destination file Action Verify the network is configured to use rcp remote copying program provided with TCP IP software to perform a remote copy tothe specified host FLREST Thefollowing error messages may occur during an FLREST A problem was found with file s by the file copy program FLXCOPY Cause Thefiles or application you aretrying to restore may be corrupt or you may have entered an invalid f
297. leshooting probl ems Also help files are included for each configuration panel Click on Help on the panel menu bar to access these files FactoryLink ECS 6 5 0 19 PREFACE Getting Help 20 FactoryLink ECS 6 5 0 Chapter 83 Overview FactoryLink is a software development tool designed to build a modular multi tasking application that automates and controls a process such as the production of goods at a factory the movement of liquid or gas down a pipeline or the periodic collection of data You use the unlimited capabilities of F actoryLink to build an application that performs the task you want to automate for your processes FactoryLink has two operating environments Development The activities required to automate and control a process are configured in the development environment creating a practical application You configure an application using the Configuration Manager Main Menu Refer to Using the Configuration Manager on page 211 for details on starting and using the Main Menu Run time When the application created in the development environment is started it executes in the run time environment You control and monitor the status of the application using the Run Time M anager which allows you to start monitor and stop individual run time tasks Refer to Using Run Time Manager on page 293 for details on starting an application and using the Run Time Manager FactoryLink is a set of
298. lowed is the number of users that can simultaneously interact with the run time system See domain M athematical expression consisting of an optional minus sign followed by consecutive digits 0 9 Element whose value is forced to 1 ON at least once every twenty four hours at regular intervals of the system dock for example every 60 seconds An interval timer can be used to initiate or control a system function at run time 444 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals A COD EF GH kernel key keyboard cursor key ring Keystroke keyword files LCL LSL ladder logic LAN library inking JK L MN OP QRS TUVWX YZ GLOSSARY For process capability studies a measure of difference between the process mean and the specification mean K Mean Midpoint A Tolerance 2 K Index Formula FactoryLink software module that creates the real time database when the FactoryLink Run Time system is started that provides security for the FactoryLink System and exchanges data among tasks See block key See text cursor Part of an electronic protection system that plugs into a FactoryLink key ring Contains information used by FactoryL ink to enable the licensed software options See option key protection device button Keyboard key or button that is being animated using the Application Editor ASCII text files that tell the Configuration Manager how to translate text table entries into binary value
299. ls specified in its configuration tables To switch between two states or values The permissible range of variation in a particular dimension of a variable Tolerances are often set by engineering requirements to ensure components will function together properly A gradual systematic change with time or another variable FactoryLink task that displays data stored in a relational database as a strip chart on a real time graphics display FactoryLink graphics display that resembles a strip chart recorder Composed of a chart object and pen objects that function in combination with real time database values for on line display of real time and or historical data Digital element that causes an event to occur when its value is forced to 1 ON L ogical level associated with any non zero numeric value usually 1 ON See data type Database table that defines segments where a data type used is stored in the real time database For attribute data a control chart of the percentage of defects in one inspection subgroup of non fixed size Upper Control Limit For control charts the limit above which the quality of a process is out of control FactoryLink utility you view information in the software security mechanism with U pper Specifications Limit the highest value of a product dimension or measurement which is acceptable 456 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals CD EF GH unary operator unsolicited read U
300. lsewhere in the factory lt lt You can set up multiple F actoryLink applications to run on one operating system For example applications for development testing and production can all run on one machine FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 31 OVERVIEW Two Domains Domain Structure Domains exist in a parent child hierarchy The following illustrates the shared domain is like a parent upon which a child domain user is based A SHARED domain has the following characteristics Accessibility All operators within a user domain can access data existing in a shared domain Frequent use F requently used items need only be defined once in the shared area This characteristic eliminates duplication of effort and reduces configuration time e Automatic data changes Data changes are passed immediately to all users who are accessing the modified data in a user domain e Global data processing Processing activities such as computations data accessing and data logging are performed once and then are available to all users accessing the shared area 32 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals OVERVIEW Two Domains A USER domain has the following characteristics e Private copies of data You can configure a single application and then specify the number of instances copies of that domain to be executed at run time The number of instances allowed is the number of users that can simult
301. ly Rerun the FactoryLink installation No message queue Cause Action Either the operating system third party software or hardware Setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up torun FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by FactoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for actoryL ink 3 All hardwareis correctly set up and all of the hardware is compati ble Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur No panel is defined Cause Action Either the operating system third party software or hardware Setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 266 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals No RAM for Cause Action No TITLES file Cause Action USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages 2 All third party software needed by F actoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for F actoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardwareis compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is co
302. mand FLRUN calls theMKCML utility MKCML calls PARSECML to produce C files C code from the program files MKCML then calls CCCML to compile the C files into object files using an external compiler and to link the object files into binary executables using an object linker 140 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter95 OLE Automation Server Task Definition This chapter explains how to use the FactoryLink OLE Automation Server FLOLE Refer to the Microsoft OLE documentation for a definition of how an OLE container application can directly open the OLE object functions OLE automation is available in many products including Visual Basic Visual C Borland C lt lt This FactoryLink task provides the necessary object classes to allow these OLE compliant applications to directly read and write elements in the FactoryLink Real time Database RTDB OLE Automation provides this ability The OLE Automation Server chapter contains information about the following topics e Principles of Operation e Configuring the OLE Automation Server e FactoryLink 6 5 0 Tag Data FLOCX e FactoryLink ODBC Data Source e Configuration of e Windows NT Accounts e Windows NT Distributed COM Configuration e Visual Basic Usage e Error Messages This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure OLE Automation Server operations Refer to OLE Automati
303. may not have actually changed In this case the server object transmits unsolicited data to interested clients only 1 when the dient has indicated interest in the data and 2 when changes are indicated for the data Polled or solicited data refers to one or more FactoryLink data objects processed only on demand In this case a client object must send a request to a server object before the server will transmit the requested data Polled exception data refers to one or more FactoryL ink data objects whose processing is only considered on an on demand basis but is actually limited to the subset of objects whose attributes indicate a changed state at the time of consideration In this case a client object must send a request to a server object and the server will transmit only the subset of data that has changed since last transmission This is also referred to as smart polling External domain refers to a named logical grouping of FactoryLink data elements or tags whose owning application is not the local application External domains have properties such as network node and service names update method exception data or polled exception data and update frequency If required any number of external domain names in a given application may reference a single remote application each having different update methods and rates Each external domain defines a connection from the application to a server application Remote TAG object refe
304. mbers maintained by the real time database At run time the task loads the CT file and builds any internal structures required to perform the job To improve performance tasks use the tag number from the CT instead of the tagnames in the database table s to access the real time database CTGEN uses the CTLIST file to build CTs and rebuild all CTs whose database tables have changed CTGEN be stand alone or with a combination of parameters To run CTGEN in stand alone mode enter the following command at the system prompt ctgen Enter CDBLIST This utility is used to debug at the database configuration level The command line is cdblist d lt file cdb gt file mdx where d shows field names file cdb is the database file to show contents CTLIST This utility is used to debug at the binary level The command line is ctlist lt file ct gt 406 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES DBCHK DBCHK Use the Database Checking DBCHK utility to Check databases for corrupted index files e Remove duplicate entries e Rebuild index files The syntax is dbchk options where options controls how dbchk executes If you do not specify any command line parameters the utility only reports on potential problems for the whole application without trying to correct them options can be one of the following Aflapp dir defines the name of the application directory to check where f
305. me Manager a flapp dir Defines the full path of the directory containing the application files This path overrides any path set by the FLAPP environment variable p flink dir Defines the full path of the directory containing the FactoryLink programs This path overrides any path set by the FLINK environment variable eti PID check If experiencing kernel lock up problems the switch adds extra checking to prevent rogue tasks from corrupting the kernel however there is a performance penalty log file Logs error and other data to log file t timeout Defines the start stop timeout in seconds for the Run Time Manager error report process The default timeout is 60 seconds 5 Starts only the shared domain on PC platform The user domain is not started Turns on verbose mode for CT generation n Defines the domain name where domain can either be shared or user If you specify shared only the shared domain is started This overrides the FLDOMAIN environment variable i flname Defines the name of the application to start This overrides the FLNAME environment variable FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 295 USING RUN TIME MANAGER Setting Command Line Options Option Action u fluser Defines the user name This overrides the FLUSER environment variable w warm start Turns on the warm start modeto reload persistent values If you specify this option
306. me s in the Index Information panel to create an index The Security Logging Schema panel is used to define table structure for the Security Log if security has been configured for any events Data Point Logging The schemas for four tables for Data Point Logging are predefined Schema Name Data Type 184 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals SCHEMA TASK DEFINITION The table size column structure and data types used for any Data Point Logging table are adjusted using the Data Point Schema Control panel Add the name of 102 the new table to the Data Point Logging Control panel when you create an additional Data Point L ogging table Database vs Data Point Logging FactoryLink depends on the data logging method used for defining a table structure schema Prior to configuring the logging function you should determine which logging task you will be using for a particular situation Database Logging is best for situations when you want to Logall tags when any tag changes or is triggered Simultaneously log a group of like logically associated tags e Group data logged based on some criteria e Configure a table column to be a dynamic pen on a trend chart Data Point Logging is best for situations when you want to Logatagonly when its value changes Use preconfigured tables and eliminate the time spent setting up tables Beableto index on log time or tag name or both e Sort all logs of a tag in order of occurrence
307. ments Complete the following steps to do this Ensure the current domain selected is SHARED in the Configuration M anager Domain Selection box Choose System Configuration from the Configuration Manager Main Menu to open the System Configuration Information panel Choose FLLAN The cursor highlights FLLAN SND and RCV Tab to the Program Arguments field Enter t and the same value as RX For example if RX is 90 enter 190 Click on Enter to save the information Click on Exit to return to the Main Menu A value of 0 or 1 that specifies whether the local station sends all data when it first connects with another station The default is O The local station uses this value only when a remote station starts up If you leave the value at 0 when the local station first connects to another station it does not send values until one of the values has changed If you enter 1 when the local station first connects to another station it sends all values during the first real time database scan This can be useful when you start up a remote station after the local station has been running The new station has no values when it first starts up sothelocal station sends all the values it has at that time After that the local station sends values as normal A number between 0 and 65527 that defines the minimum amount of time in seconds the local station waits for a call to a remote station to connect The default is 10 If the remote stati
308. mmand at the system prompt set FLFONT 30 105 ou 56 RIE 5 gt FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 245 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Reporting REPORTING 1 Choose Utilities from the main menu bar or from the configuration panel menu bar If you choose it from the main menu bar the report is generated for the entire application If you choose it from a configuration panel menu bar the report is generated for that panel Configuration Manager e x Application View Utilities Exit Help F1 The following pulldown menu is displayed Report Export Import 2 Choose Report The following dialog is displayed requesting information about how and where to generate the output Fispart Conligerstan X Colenna pn Lines po Emer 3 Definethe following fields Heading Nameofthetabletoincdude the report Enter the name as it is displayed on the Main Menu Filename of thefile to receive the output The default file name is FLAPP ALL TXT Columns Width of the report in number of characters permitted a single line The default is 80 characters Lines Length of the report in number of lines permitted on a single page The default is 60 246 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Reporting 4 Choose Enter to process the report FactoryLink converts the specified table to
309. more points lie outside of control limits 15 consecutive points lie within either upper or lower Zone C on the same side of the Center Line of 25 points at least 90 percent of these or 23 lie within Zone C U pper or Lower and all 23 are on the same side of the Center Line 8 consecutive points lie outside either Zone C and are all on the same side of the Center Line of 25 consecutive points at least 60 percent or 15 lie outside Zone C and are all on the same side of the Center Line CD EF GH FactoryLink task FALSE field file File Manager file name file transfer operation FIRST flag FLAPP FLAPP FLCONV FLDOMAIN FLDOMAIN FLINK FLINK FLNAME FLNAME FLNEW JK L MN OP QRS TUVWX YZ GLOSSARY See task Logical level associated with the numeric value of zero logical operators return zero when the result of their operation is FALSE Spacein a configuration tableor on a display that may or may not contain data part of a record a record is composed of one or more fields Specific set of data defined by the operating system FactoryLink task that performs basic file management operations such as copying printing renaming typing and deleting files locally or remote Name of a specific set of data Transmitting the contents of a file from one F actoryLink station on a network to another F actoryLink station on the same network using theFile Manager task Optio
310. mory disk drives input output devices printer ports and other system components Abbreviated OS 2 9 1 The person who operates the finished application 2 Mathematical function The operators supported by Interpreted Math amp Logic include the most common arithmetic logical relational and conditional operators used in computer science and related disciplines See block key button Binary logical operator that yields a value of 1 TRUE if at least one of its two arguments is TRUE non zero and 0 FALSE otherwise See operator 448 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals A B C D EF GHIJK LM N OP QRS TU VW XYZ GLOSSARY OS 29 See Operating System 2 out of control Variations larger than the quality control limits PAK See Programmer s Access Kit p chart percent For control charts the percentage of defective units in which the defective subgroup size varies Used for attribute quality control PLC See Programmable Logic Controller panel Screen display that provides pre defined entry fields for information required by a configuration table Pareto analysis An analysis of the frequency of occurrence of various possible concerns This is a useful way to decide quality control priorities when more than one concern is present The Pareto Principle states that 20 of concerns cause 80 of the problems Pareto diagram bar graph showing the frequency of occurrence of various concerns with the most frequently occurr
311. move value brw position USER ANALOG Browser position value brw row USER ANALOG Browser current row value brw sec USER ANALOG Browse seconds data brw select USER DIGITAL Browser select trigger brw status USER MESSAGE Browser action status word brw time USER MESSAGE Browsetime data cr dear3 SHARED DIGITAL counter clear tag for 3 ctr_clear3_u USER DIGITAL counter clear tag for 3 ctr_dn_trig3 SHARED DIGITAL counter down trigger for 3 ctr_dn_trig3_u USER DIGITAL counter down trigger for 3 ctr_enable3 SHARED DIGITAL counter enable tag for 3 cr enable3 u USER DIGITAL counter enable tag for 3 ctr neg out3 USER DIGITAL counter negative output for 3 ctr neg output3 SHARED DIGITAL counter negative output for 3 ctr_pos_out2_u USER DIGITAL counter positive output for 2 ctr_pos_out3_u USER DIGITAL counter positive output for 3 370 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 1 Tagname Domain Type Description ctr_pos_output2 SHARED DIGITAL counter positive output for 2 ctr_pos_output3 SHARED DIGITAL counter positive output for 3 ctr_up_trigl SHARED DIGITAL counter up clock trigger for 1 ctr_up_trig2 SHARED DIGITAL counter up trigger for 2 ctr_uptrig3 SHARED DIGITAL counter up trigger for 3 ctr_up_trig3_u USER DIGITAL counter up trigger for 3 ctr_valuel SHARED ANALOG counter current value for 1 ctr_valuel_u USER ANALOG
312. mpatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur There is no more available RAM Close any unnecessary windows or programs Add RAM tothe system if this happens often The specified AC file does not exist or cannot be opened If it does not exist FactoryLink installation may not have completed normally If the file cannot be opened it may already be opened by another process Re run the FactoryLink installation if the file does not exist No window for tag selection Cause Action Either the operating system third party software or hardware setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 105 2 All third party software needed by F actoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for F actoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardwareis compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur ou RU E 50 2 9 5 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 267 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages No window system Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal e
313. mple if FactoryLink shuts down before Report Generator has created the report archive file the report temporary file still exists on disk 5 When the report is completed the information in the temporary disk based working file is sent to either a permanent file on disk a printer or a communication port 168 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals REPORT GENERATOR TASK DEFINITION Reporting Methodology The following illustration outlines the process of generating a report Figure 100 1 Configuration Manager tables lt Format file 7 BEGIN Realtime database Log pump temperature elements m REPEAT Format file Temperature temp generated by user END all done reporting Triggered events defined in Configuration Manager Y Temporary working file 104 Oday Hardcopy or ASCII report file FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 169 REPORT GENERATOR TASK DEFINITION Components of a Format File COMPONENTS OF A FORMAT FILE User defined ASCII format files control the look and contents of the report A unique format file is defined for every report generated by Report Generator This section describes the components of the format file Keywords K eywords are used in the format file to trigger an action The associated section of the format file is processed and written to a temporary working file when the trigger executes Three keywords ar
314. mula Define Name Type a name for the macro and choose Command Type Enter A 1 in the Refers To field on Oo GC Open the Macro menu and choose Run e eq 21 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 105 DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE DDE TASK DEFINITION DDE Client Functions DDE CLIENT FUNCTIONS Usethe DDE Client Tableto configure bidirectional communications between the F actoryLink real time database and external Windows applications via a DDE link This communication is established by entering data in configuration tables that enable the system to read data from and write data to an external DDE server The DDE Client task uses two types of configuration tables e Read Write Control This table allows the user to specify multiple DDE server configurations e Read Write I nformation This table allows the user to identify DDE item names to be read and transferred to the F actoryL ink real time database or real time database values are written to The DDE Client task through the DDE protocol reads and writes data to and from a DDE server Read and write operations can occur at timed intervals and upon triggered conditions operator requests or system events TheDDE Client also times the response If a time out occurs or the response is not valid thetask determines the interface to be faulty and an error codeis displayed on the Run Time Manager screen indicating which device has the commun
315. mum Number of Arrays 209 Using Tags aS 5 210 Predefined Elements 210 23 Using the Configuration Manager 211 Opening the Configuration Manager 212 Windows NT or Windows 95 Platform 212 0S7 2 Platform o ipn e e ea 213 UNIX Platform 213 Configuration Manager Display 215 Working with Text entry Panels 216 Working with Structured Configuration 5 217 Scrolling a Window or Panel 219 Vertical Scroll cease ue raene ee 219 Horizontal Scroll 220 Working with Multiple Development Applications 221 Opening a New Development Application 221 Sharing Information Between Applications 222 Opening Multiple Configuration Tables 225 Working with Tags 226 Viewing the Number of Tags Defined 226 Viewing a List of Real time Database Elements 227 Viewing Element Cross ReferenceList 229 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals
316. n Donot attempt to perform a delete operation 250 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages Can t delete block operation in progress Cause Action Can t execute Cause Action Can t find AC Cause Action Can t find tag to Cause Action A delete operation was attempted whilea block operation was in progress Complete the deletion or cancel it with Esc or Cancel The specified file does not exist or has been damaged Reinstall FactoryLink Either the operating system third party software or hardware Setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by FactoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for F actoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardwareis compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur be deleted from x ref database Either the operating system third party software or hardware 105 Setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third
317. n Movethecursor to this field and choose Error Help or press the Alt E key sequence to find out the reason for the failure Invalid file name Cause Thespecified file name is missing too long or has the wrong format Action Enter a valid file name Invalid tag or dimension string length Cause screen contains an tag or dimension string that exceeds the allowable size Action The specified item exceeds size limitations An element name cannot exceed 32 characters and a dimension cannot exceed 16 characters total 48 characters Correc the item that exceeds the size limitations Missing KEY file Cause The system can t find the KEY file FLINK KEY xxx KEY Action Enter the correct key filename in AC or create the desired key file 264 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages Multiple panels Cause Thereis more than one panel statement in the AC window definition Action Delete unnecessary panel statements No dialog for file selection Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware Setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by FactoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version fo
318. n 0 status MBUS WRITE COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus block write complete MBUS WRITE DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus block write disable MBUS WRITE STATE SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus block write state MBUS WRITE TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus block write trigger MODP_EXCEPTION_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus Plus exception write disable MODP_EXCEPTION_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus Plus exception write trigger MODP_LPORTO_MSG SHARED MESSAGE Modicon Modbus Plus logical port 0 error message MODP LSO FAIL DIG SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus Plus logical station failure MODP LSO FAIL MSG SHARED MESSAGE Modicon Modbus Plus communication failure MODP_READ_COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus Plus block read complete MODP_READ_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus Plus block read disable MODP_READ_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus Plus block read state MODP_READ_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus Plus block read trigger MODP STATIONO STATUS SHARED ANALOG Modicon Modbus Plus logical station 0 status MODP_WRITE_COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus Plus block write complete MODP_WRITE_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus Plus block write disable MODP_WRITE_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus Plus block write state MODP_WRITE_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Modicon Modbus Plus block write trigger FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 385 e o O mp 9 lt
319. n Menu CULM Next Screen Ctl N Previous Screen Ctl P Object List X ref List Domain List Search Next Tag Attributes Ctl T Field Choices Ctrl K 4 Choose Search You are prompted for the name of the tag you want to find E tes the Earth paner ee ome onem 5 Enter the of the tag you want to find and choose Enter You can use an asterisk in the name as a wildcard 6 Choose Next from the View pulldown menu if you want to find the next occurrence of the search pattern 232 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Tags Deleting a Tag Definition When you delete a tag from a graphics picture or configuration panel the tag definition is not deleted from the element list Perform the following steps to delete a tag definition 1 Choose View from the main menu bar or from the configuration panel menu bar 1 Configuration Manager x Application View Utilities Exit Help F1 One of the following pulldown menus is displayed Main Menu Ctrl HM Main Menu Ctl M Object List Next Screen Ctl N X ref List Previous Screen Ctl P Domain List Object List X ref List View pulldown menu Domain List from configuration View pulldown menu from Main Menu Search Next Tag Attributes Ctl T Field Choices Ctl K 2 Choose X ref List The following list is displayed on the screen MODI lid yee him Hein
320. n OS 2 operating system Both methods are described below From the Desktop Manager 1 Choose FactoryLink OS 2 from the Desktop Manager menu to display the applications available with the FactoryLink group double click here to 5 5 P start the Run Time Hu Fail 1 Ji Application Factorlink Enn Moss Ecenr Comigsre man App cs amp on Appirsion 2 double dick the left button to open the Configuration Manager From the Command Line 1 Set the FactoryLink application environment variable by entering the following command from the system prompt Set FLAPP c flapp 2 Enter the following command to open the Configuration Manager flcm UNIX Platform 105 1 BesuretheF actoryLink application directory environment variable F LAPP is set tothe full path name of the directory containing the application you are running If itis not set it using the following instructions If you are using a C shell enter the following command at the system prompt setenv FLAPP flapp dir y JE 56 mc 5 gt where flapp dir isthe full path of the directory containing the application F or example setenv FLAPP usr newapp FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 213 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Opening the Configuration Manager If you are using a Korn or Bourne shell enter the following command set at the system prompt FLAPP flapp dir
321. n Time M anager Shutdown flag SHUTDOWN_U USER DIGITAL Run Time Manager Shutdown flag SPCCHART_STTIME USER LONGANA SPCCHART_Y_MAX_VAL USER FLOAT SPCCHART_Y_MIN_VAL USER FLOAT SPCDATAMBX_S SHARED MAILBOX PowerSPC Data Task Receive Mailbox SPCDATATRIG_S SHARED DIGITAL PowerSPC Data Task Initialization Indicator SPCDATA_APPDISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Tag to toggle disable enable of Power SPC processes SPCDATA_APPDISABLEO SHARED DIGITAL SPCGMBX SHARED MAILBOX _ SPC Graphics input Mailbox SPCGMBX_U USER MAILBOX Graphics input Mailbox SPCGRPHMBX S SHARED MAILBOX PowerSPC Graphics Task Receive Mailbox SPCGRPHMBX U USER MAILBOX PowerSPC Graphics Task Receive Mailbox FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 367 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 1 Tagname Domain Type Description SPRCVMBX SHARED MAILBOX SPC Receive Mailbox for Database access SPCRCVMBX_U USER MAILBOX SPC Receive Mailbox for Database access SPOOLREQ SHARED MESSAGE Print Spooler Request SPOOLREQ_U USER MESSAGE Print Spooler Request SPOOLRPLY SHARED MESSAGE Print Spooler Reply SPOOLRPLY_U USER MESSAGE Print Spooler Reply SPRGMBX SHARED MAILBOX SPR graphics input mailbox SPRGMBX_U USER MAILBOX SPR graphics input mailbox SPRRCVMBX SHARED MAILBOX SPR receive mailbox for database access SPRRCVMBX_U USER MAILBOX SPR receive mailbox for database access SPRS
322. n a relational database through a browse window Browser offers the following features e Allows relational data in a relational database to be manipulated from within FactoryLink Allows an application to send and retrieve data to and from all external database tables including those created outside of F actoryL ink e Allows you to define elements referenced by Browser in arrays as well as individually lt lt This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure Database Browser operations Refer to Database Browser on page 473 in the F actoryLink Configuration Guide for information on procedures to configure this task Use Database Browser on page 29 in the F actoryLink Reference Guide for a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages JloswoJg eseqeijeq FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 65 DATABASE BROWSER TASK DEFINITION Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Browser is a Historian client task that communicates with Historian through mailbox elements to send and receive historical information stored in an external database Browser accesses data in a relational database by selecting the data specified in a configuration table and placing it in a temporary table called a result table The element views and modifies the data in the result table through a browse window A browse window is a sliding window that maps data between th
323. n either be shared or user The default is the same as the domain specified in the FLDOMAIN environment variable Refer to Overview on page 21 for a discussion on FactoryLink environment variables Double click on the desired domain or be sure to press Enter after choosing a domain or the domain does not change Refer to Overview on page 21 for details on which domain to select for each application 313 3035 vcr Q 5 e 3 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 215 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Text entry Panels WORKING WITH TEXT ENTRY PANELS Open configuration tables by selecting a module from the Main Menu Data is entered in configuration tables through either structured panels or text entry panels This section discusses text entry panels and their characteristics Text entry panels do not have defined data entry fields Report Generator Format MY fmt File Edit Exit Help Menu Bar Data Entry Text entry configuration panels contain the following areas Menu bar The menu bar provides access to a group of tools you can use to manipulate or review configuration and application data Data entry Type ASCII text in the data entry area 216 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Structured Configuration Panels WORKING WITH STRUCTURED CONFIGURATION PANELS You open configuration tables by choosing a module from the Main Menu D
324. n element and sets all of that element s change status flags to 1 ON See statement Number of times each outcome of a statistical population is observed Option for displaying an alarm on line displays the first oldest unacknowledged alarm Subroutine that performs a specified operation or calculates a specified result F requentl y activated by a keyboard input hence function key See mathematical function 442 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals AB CD EF GHI JK LM N OP QRS TUVWXYZ GLOSSARY Function Key An animation object in the FactoryLink Application Editor that animates a key on the keyboard so it causes an action to occur when pressed at run time function 1 A key used to send a signal to the computer program controlling the display 2 a key that performs a specific set of operations G GFIRST Option for displaying an on line alarm displays the first oldest alarm in a selected alarm group GHIGH Option for displaying an on line alarm displays the oldest and highest priority alarm in a selected alarm group GLAST Option for displaying an on line alarm displays the last most recent alarm in a selected alarm group global element See pre defined element reserved element H hexadecimal Numeric system used in computers with a base of 16 in which the number system letters A F represent numerical quantities equal to 10 through 15 in the decimal numbering system Histogram A graphic representation of
325. n for displaying an on line alarm displays the first oldest alarm on the system Attribute that has only two possible states ON or OFF FactoryLink environment variable that corresponds to the name of the directory structure containing the application related files If you use F LAPP in the pathname with its the system uses the default environment variable FactoryLink utility that converts older applications to run under the current version FactoryLink environment variable specified during installation as the name of the domain under which the application is designed to run There is no default for this variable FactoryLink environment variable that corresponds to the name of the directory structure containing the F actoryLink software system program files If you use FLINK in the pathname with its the system uses the default environment variable FactoryLink environment variable specified during installation as the name of the application There is no default for this variable FactoryLink application utility that creates the user specified directory structure and copies files required for development of a new application to this directory structure FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 441 o o lt A DE F GH GLOSSARY FLOAT floating point floating point constant FLOPT FLOPT FLREST FLSAVE FLUSER FLUSER font forced write formula frequency distribution
326. n server receive mailbox 9 lt CONNSRVTOTAL SHARED ANALOG Total number of services being brokered T el DALOGACKMBX SHARED MAILBOX Distributed AL LOG mailbox for x acknowledged alarms c d DALOGRCVMBX SHARED MAILBOX Distributed AL LOG receive mailbox for Historian communications DALOGRCVMBX_U USER MAILBOX Distributed AL LOG receive mailbox for v Historian communications DALOGVIEWMBX SHARED MAILBOX Distributed AL VIEW mailbox for alarm communications DALOGVIEWMBX U USER MAILBOX Distributed AL VIEW mailbox for alarm communications DATASRVMBX USER MAILBOX Data server receive mailbox DATE SHARED MESSAGE Date day MM DD YYYY DATEO SHARED MESSAGE Date day MM DD YYYY DATETIME SHARED MESSAGE Dateand Time day MM DD Y YYY HH MM SS DB4HISTMBX SHARED MAILBOX dBASEIV Historian mailbox DBLOGHISTMBX SHARED MAILBOX Database L ogger receive mailbox for Historian communications DBLOGHISTMBX_U USER MAILBOX Database L ogger receive mailbox for Historian communication DPLOGHISTMBX SHARED MAILBOX Data Point Logger receive mailbox for Historian communications DYNLOGCOMMAND SHARED MESSAGE Dynamic Logging command message tag for Data Point Logger DYNLOGFILE SHARED MESSAGE Dynamic Logging save point file for Data Point Logger FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 381 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 2 Tagname Domain
327. n spaces Defining Tags While in the Configuration Manager When using the Configuration Manager during application development some fields require the name of a tag If you enter the name of a tag not already defined in the application the following Tag Definition dialog is displayed 104 Name assigned to tag zh 3 D Q f you specified multiple tags on a configuration panel this panel will display each tag namein turn until all tags are defined Complete the following information for each tag Tag This field displays the name of the tag you are defining Tag names can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters with no embedded spaces or periods Do not start the name with a number FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 203 DEFINING TAGS Tag Naming Guidelines Description Type Domain Array Dimension Length Default Value Enter a description of up to 79 characters that defines the purpose of the tag Enter the type of data that will be stored in this tag This can be one of the following although you may be restricted to a subset of these depending on where the tag is specified Refer to the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for valid data types for specific fields digital Digital is a binary data type Its value can be 0 or 1 analog Analog is a 16 bit signed integer Its value can range between plus or minus 32 768 longana Long analog is a 32 bit
328. n your system is incorrect or incompatible Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by F actoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for F actoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardware is compatible Cause An internal error has occurred Action Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur Database doesn t contain any printable records Cause A report or export operation was attempted on an empty database file Action Donot attempt to export or report this database file Error allocating panel Maximum 12 Cause Twelve panels are already created and displayed Action Close some panels and then reopen the desired panel Error allocating table structure Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal 105 error has occurred Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by FactoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for F actoryL ink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardwareis compat
329. nal Errors at the end of this section 316 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MANAGER Run time Manager Messages 28 FLE_QSIZE_TOOBIG Cause Internal error a task attempted to attach a queue to an element but there was not enough memory Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section 29 FLE QSIZE CHANGED Cause Internal error a task attempted to attach a queue to an element but a queue of a different size was already attached Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section 30 NO TAG LIST Cause This error only occurs on custom tasks written using the FactoryLink PAK If the custom task was set up to access elements by name instead of by ID number this error can occur 107 if the element list has not been defined Action Usethe API function FL SET TAG LIST todefinethe element list Then re start FactoryLink Refer to the Programmer s Access Kit PAK manual for information about L SET TAG LIST 31 FLE TAG LIST CHANGED Cause This message can be displayed only if an application has been set up so one task monitors another task s element list f one task modifies the other task s element list the task that modified the list will return this message thus informing the task that it s list has been modified Action Noaction required Cc e 5 2 JJ ftc 3 32 FLE_WAKEUP_FAILED Cause Internal
330. nced Rows of data not associated with a group and with no ordering Nongrouped sequenced Rows of data not associated with a group and ordered by time stamping or integer or both Group name and or subgroup number grouped Rows of data associated with a group name group name and subgroup number or subgroup number The following sections provide a brief description of each method FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 75 DATABASE LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Grouping Data GROUPING DATA FactoryLink permits you to log data with or without a group association If you elect to log data without a group association nongrouped the table delineates the data in the table from data in other tables For example to maintain the start date for employees at two company locations such as Dallas and Atlanta you log the employees located in Dallas in a different table than the employees located in Atlanta Lastname Firstname Start date ae 12495 nans Lastname Firstname Start date Atlanta Grouping data allows you store data with a common structure in the same table but still separate it based on some criteria such as company location If you elect to associate logged data with a group the table structure must include a column that contains the group associated with the row of data Group column Location Lastname Firstname Start_date 76 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DATABASE
331. nction returns this message For example if a task requests to view the third message waiting in the queue and only two messages are in the queue then the task is requesting to view a message outside the range of available messages Action Noadion required 358 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Run time Manager Messages 37 FLE_ACCESS_DENIED Cause Ifa task tries to read a mailbox element that it is not allowed to read the real time database returns this error If the task is a custom task developed using PAK the programmer may not have set up ownership of the mailbox element by the task requesting to read from it Action Usethe PAK function FL SET OWNER MBX toestablish the task as owner of the mailbox element Cause Internal error Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section 41 FLE APP EXISTS Cause A real time database with the same FLNAME but a different number of users or elements already exists Action Either shut down the running real time database or set FLNAME with a different name 42 FLE NO FLINK RTDB Cause A user domain was started for a real time database for which the shared domain has not been started Action Start the shared domain first 108 fe w L uny FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 359 USING RUN TIME MONITOR Run time Manager Messages Correcting Internal Errors Internal errors are generally
332. never an error occurs in a FactoryLink task at run time FactoryLink sends a message for display to the Run Time Manager screen F actoryLink also sends a longer more descriptive message to the log file if the file has been set up The following F actoryLink tasks can create an error message log file e Batch Recipe e Database Logger e Database Browser e FactoryLink Local Area Networking FLLAN e File Manager Any Historian e Math amp Logic Interpreted mode only e Statistical Process Control SPC Log SPC View and SPR Trending You can configure F actoryLink to automatically create an error message LOG file at startup In Windows NT LOG files are stored in the FLAPP FLNAME FLDOMAIN FLUSER LOG directory In Windows 95 for tasks configured in the USER domain the LOG files are stored in the FLAPP FLNAME FLDOMAIN FLUSER LOG directory for tasks in the SHARED domain the L OG files are stored in the FLAPP FLNAME FLDOMAIN SHAREUSR LOG directory where FLAPP isthe environment variable for the application directory FLNAME isthe environment variable for the application name FLDOMAIN is the environment variable for the domain FLUSER isthe environment variable for the user name 286 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Archiving Error Messages FactoryLink creates the log file name using the following format XXMMDDYY LOG where XX indicates the FactoryLink task MM isthe mont
333. ng batch file 342 exiting commands window Run Time M onitor 336 Run Time Monitor 347 EXPLODE 408 Index 1 463 A B CD EF GHtIJS K LM N OP QRS TUVWXYZ exponential constant 439 exporting an application 222 expression 439 external domain 151 F FactoryLink directory organization 35 module descriptions 29 monitoring 331 version number 238 FactoryLink Application Restore dialog 393 FactoryLink ECS Languages dialog 395 FactoryLink Lite configuration guidelines 424 FALSE 441 field 441 field choices viewing 239 file 437 FileManager 113 overview 113 file name 441 Filtering E xception L ogged Tags 94 finding elements in a watch list 326 flag 441 FLCONV 402 FLDEM O 396 FLKEYVAL 409 FLLAN local station default values 124 local stations 121 methodology 118 monitoring the network 123 multiple platforms 122 network groups 122 1 464 FactoryLink 6 5 0 ordering tag names 129 overview 117 receiving data 119 receiving values from remote stations 120 remote stations 121 sending data 119 sending values to remote stations 119 supported network operating systems 122 supported protocols 122 FLNEW 362 392 FLOAT 442 Floating point 442 Floating point constant 442 FLSAVE 403 FLSETLNG utility 395 FLSHM 410 FLTEST 396 font 442 font size changing 245 format specifiers 39 formula 442 formulas DDE Windows 104 G Global Hide tag 55 Group Hide tags 55 grouped by group logging method 86 grouping data 76 deleting 85 indexing
334. ng System Configuration 273 Editing Task Information 281 Viewing Domain 281 Adding New Tasks 281 Changing Domain Associations 283 Setting the Run Time Graphics 284 Changing the Windows Color Scheme 285 Archiving Error Messages 286 Resizing and Moving Screen Components 289 Calculating the Number of FactoryLink Processes 290 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 11 Table of Contents Fundamentals 25 Using Run Time Manage 293 Setting Up Program Arguments 293 Tuning Kend 293 Setting Command Line Options 295 Accessing Run Time Manager 299 On Windows NT and Windows 95 Platforms 299 On 05 2 Platform 0 ee es 299 On UNIX Platform 300 Run Time Manager User Interface Screen 304 Task Controls 0 000 cee ees 305 Application lt 306 Display Controls
335. ng or corrupted Action Copy the DOMAIN CDB file from another application If you do not have another application run FLNEW to create one However make sure the new one is created in a different directory Refer to the Windows NT and Windows 95 Installation Guide for information about running FLNE W After you copy the file re start the application Cause TheFLAPP is not set toa valid application Action Set the FLAPP toa valid application Can t read options key Cause Theoption key file FL OPT has become corrupt Action Copythefile FLNEW OPT from the installation diskette to the fileFLINK OPT FL OPT Can t read type database Cause Thefile DOMAIN CDB is either missing or corrupted Action Copythe DOMAIN CDB file from another application If you do not have another application run FLNEW create a one However make sure the new one is created in a different 256 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages directory Refer to the Windows NT and Windows 95 Installation Guide for information about running FLNEW Cause TheFLAPP is not set toa valid application Action Set the FLAPP toa valid application Can t update with null table name Cause NoTableName for this panel Action Return to the Control panel and move the cursor line containing the correct table name Return to the Information panel The correct table name should now be displayed in
336. ng sends the data from the real time database to an Historian mailbox in the form of an SQL INSERT statement The request remains in the Historian mailbox until Historian processes the request 4 Once Historian processes the request it connects to the relational database and inserts the data in the relational database file Once in this file other applications can use the data Data is collected or computed and stored in m the real time database s V Database Logging prepares the data Real time Database g Historian transfers for transfer toa data to the relational relational database in table database table format 71 60 52 47 34 62 gt I Relational E Database EBD Database Loggin 2 5 writes data SN en j S 14 H Historian mailbox 74 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DATABASE LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Database Logging Methodology When selecting a logging method you must consider Grouping method Although you can theoretically log grouped data without a sequence number the examples show use of a sequence number because this is more typical for grouped data Sequencing or ordering method both available with all grouping methods e Integer Time stamping e Indexing Deleting method lt lt Three logging methods are available to choose from based these considerations Nongrouped nonseque
337. nge Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section w L uny FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 357 USING RUN TIME MONITOR Run time Manager Messages 33 FLE_NO_SIGNALS Cause Ifa task calls the FL_RECV_SIG function to find out if any signals have been sent to it the FL_RECV_SIG function returns a message If no signals have been sent to the task FL RECV SIG returns this message Action Noadion required 34 FLE SIGNALLED Cause Thereal time database sends this message to inform a sleeping task that the task has received a signal not a change in value of the element for which it is waiting Action Noadion required 35 FLE NOT MAILBOX Cause of the following conditions caused this error The CTs need to be rebuilt Action Perform the corresponding action Run CTGEN to rebuild the CTs If this does not solve the problem proceed to step 2 Cause While configuring a task you entered an element of a data type other than MAILBOX in a field that requires a MAILBOX element Action Open the configuration panels from the Main Menu of the task containing the error Ensure the data types of the elements in all fields requiring MAILBOX elements are defined as MAILBOX 36 FLE NO MESSAGES Cause If through the PAK QUERY MBX function a task requests to view a message whose queue number falls outside the range of available messages the QUERY MBX fu
338. nt this case the new value is stored and a new deadband recalculated but the new value is not written to the program database Since FactoryLink tasks process values upon every change deadbanding provides a means of saving processing time and improving system efficiency Note The deadbanding portion of the function cannot be implemented without configuring the scaling portion of the function Refer to the Application Editor Guidefor more information on how the Scaling and Deadbanding feature works in the Application E ditor This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure Scaling and Deadbanding operations Refer to Scaling and Deadbanding on page 219 in the FactoryLink Configuration Guidefor information on procedures to configure this task Use Scaling and Deadbanding on page 483 in the FactoryLink Reference Guidefor a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages Hulpueqpesg pue Buljeos FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 179 SCALING AND DEADBANDING TASK DEFINITION Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Scaling is only available in the SHARED domain The scaling function only applies for tags with an analog longana or float data type Scaling is configured using a pair of ranges e one for raw values one for scaled values These ranges can be specified as constants or tags The scaling formula is adjusted accordingly if one or more of the range t
339. nt Save file is used FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 95 DATA POINT LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Logging Data Logging Data During Configuration When FactoryLink is being configured the Data Point Logging function can be configured for a specific tag in one of two methods e Through the Tag Definition dialog displayed in the Application Editor when a new tag is referenced Refer tothe Application Editor Guidefor more details e Through the Data Point Logging Information panel accessible through the Configuration Manager Main Menu Refer to Configuring Data Point Logging in the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for more information Logging Data Dynamically Data Point Logging allows you to dynamically add tags to and remove tags from its list of tags to belogged during run time operation in one or both of the following ways Generate and load a Data Point Save File that contains or more logging requests e Enter a single logging request in tag Data Point Save File The Data Point Save File FLAPP log dplogger dyn contains a list of all tags currently configured for logging You can create a Data Point Save File that is loaded whenever its associated Read trigger is set The load process causes the list of tags currently being logged to be overwritten by the list of tags specified in the designated Data Point Save File Single Logging Request Data Point Logging allows you to enter a single logging request by means o
340. nt and child to the normal state If the parent returns to the normal state and the child does not within the timeframe specified the child becomes an alarm of its own FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 53 ALARM LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Parent Child Relationship Figure 84 7 Child Recovery Delay Child Recovers Parent Alarm 10 Return to Alarms Displayed parent 1 0 00 Normal none Child 10 01 Recovery Child Alarm 05 child 1 Suppressed 10 04 Figure 84 8 Child Recovery Delay Child Alarms Parent Alarm Return to Alarms Displayed 10 00 parent 1 Normal child 1 Child alarmed 10 01 Recovery at 10 06 Child Alarm 05 child 1 Suppressed 10 15 54 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals ALARM LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Hide Alarms HIDE ALARMS You hide alarms most commonly used when you do not need to manage a particular set of alarms Alarm hiding is used in the following common situations Equipment maintenance e Redundant systems e Station functionality e Bad sensor Alarm hiding should not be confused with filters used with the Alarm Viewer Alarm hiding tells the Alarm Logger to disregard all events associated with a particular set of alarms Alarm filtering only filters the alarms from the viewer but the alarms are still being logged and tracked If an alarm is hidden it does not act as a parent in parent child relation
341. nt is created in the application it is added to an element list Perform the following steps to view the real time database elements configured for this application 1 Choose View from the Main M enu bar or from the configuration panel menu bar Configuration Manager e x Application View Utilities Exit Help F1 One of the following pulldown menus is displayed Main Menu Ctil M Main Menu Ctl M Object List Next Screen Ctl N Xref List Previous Screen Ctl P Domain List Object List X ref List View pulldown menu from configuration Domain List View pulldown menu from Main Menu Search Next Tag Attributes Cul T Field Choices Ctrl K 2 Choose Object List The following list is displayed ATOD Lipi lcu Edt Yie jji Ep o Help Ji Allen Bradley Legie AH T dilen radley Port E ALT ACTCNT i ALT ADENT ALC PRINT RETURN ALO AREA ALD Acknowledge maori s An Gaui E 5 dism Virwer grep ALD CAPACE Alm Viewer Grep Virmeerr lagho Cc o gt Alaa e n p r e 5 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 227 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Tags This list contains an entry for each tag defined in the application Tags are listed in alphabetical order The list contains the following information for each entry Tag
342. ntained database table that contains a record for each occurrence of an element in any task specific database table or graphics animation 458 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Index A accessing help Run Time Monitor 336 Run Time Manager 299 Run Time Monitor 322 adding elements to a watch list 325 new tasks 281 alarm criteria 45 distribution 57 grouping 50 logging 58 parent child relationship 51 persistence 56 states 49 Alarm Logger see Distributed Alarm Logger 43 alphanumeric 429 AND 429 animate 429 animation creating a graphics display 64 animation object 429 application controls 306 application directory files 36 subdirectories 35 Application E ditor animating a graphics display 64 creating a graphics display 64 defining tags 205 applications converting FL CONV 402 creating new FLNEW 362 392 demo application FLDEM O 396 exporting 222 importing 223 saving FLSAVE 403 test FLTEST 396 archiving 429 archiving error messages 286 argument 429 arrays defining element arrays 207 determining next available dimension 282 maximum number 209 multi dimensional 208 one dimensional 207 ASCII 429 Assignable Causes of variation 429 assignment statement 430 attribute 430 Attribute Data Quality 430 Average 447 background display 430 background task 430 Index 1 459 A EF GHI 449 batch files adding remarks 341 echoing a comment in output 341 ending current file 34
343. ntains invalid lines Action Choose OK to exit with validation errors Choose Cancel to abort the exit 272 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 106 Using System Configuration FactoryLink sets up default run time parameters in the System Configuration Information panel during FLNEW The default values displayed on the System Configuration Information panel as set up within an application newly created by FLNEW establish the following parameters for the run time F actoryLink system e Tasks that start up when the application is running e Tasks allowed to run as foreground tasks Order in which tasks start up and shut down e Priority of each task e Domain associated with each task Usethis panel if you want to makethe following modifications Changetask settings such as flags and program arguments e Resequence the order in which tasks start up e Change foreground and background task identification Add a new task to an existing application FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 273 106 o 5 o lt o e 3 USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Choose System Configuration from the Configuration Manager Main Menu The System Configuration Information panel is displayed Pies FR T FLPA BETH FLACA FLLNNHLW mE ups Loser ander Vas akE i Owebesr Lepr Twin emi i
344. ntals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 2 Tagname Domain Type Description TRENDHISTMBX_U USER MAILBOX TREND receive mailbox for historian communication TRENDMBX SHARED MAILBOX Trend input mailbox TRENDMBX_U USER MAILBOX Trend input mailbox VBLOGDISABLE S SHARED DIGITAL PowerVB debug logging disable VBLOGDISABLE_U USER DIGITAL PowerVB debug logging disable YYMMDD SHARED MESSAGE Date YYMMDD slprocess button action USER DIGITAL Style 1 process button tag used for VB events secl SHARED DIGITAL One second interval timer trigger FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 391 e o O mp lt E o FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLREST FLREST Usethe FLREST utility to restore saved F actoryLink application files FLREST overwrites existing files Never restore to the root directory the FLINK directory or any other directory that contains working files The safest option is to have an independent directory for restores preferably on a separate disk or partition FLREST restores FactoryLink applications by one of two methods e Platform specific e Multi platform Platform specific restore The platform specific method restores an application from another computer running on the same operating system Use the platform specific restore e torestore platform specific files e torestore backed up applications This restores the entire appli
345. o the Application Editor Guide for details FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 205 104 zh 5 D Q DEFINING TAGS Tag Naming Guidelines Editing a Tag If a tag needs to be edited after it is created access the Tag Definition dialog by pressing CTRL T Click on Edit at the bottom of the window to edit general information for the tag When the edit function is selected the attributes of the tag definition become editable Changes to the information for the tag must be made before any other changes can be executed If the tag is a SHARED domain tag already used in the SHARED domain thetag domain cannot be changed Array dimensions can be increased from the existing dimensions or decreased if the items being eliminated have not already been referenced in FactoryLink If a tag was not originally created as an array it cannot be changed to bean array tag Likewise the number of dimensions cannot be changed F or example tag 3 4 cannot be changed to tag 3 When all changes to the tag definition are complete click on OK at the bottom of the dialog When all editing to information for the tag is completed click on OK to save all the options 206 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DEFINING TAGS Defining Element Arrays DEFINING ELEMENT ARRAYS A tag name can be assigned to a single element or a group of elements sometimes called an array This permits you to create multiple tags with a sin
346. o the relational database in the same way the FactoryLink Database Logger does in table format via an Historian as the alarm occurs when the alarm is acknowledged or after an alarm has returned to the normal state The tables for alarm logging one for alarm entries and one for logbook entries and their associated schemas have already been defined within Distributed Alarm Logging The alarm entry table is built using the following schema Column Type Array Description Fo eee une esum __ emon Eu mm Fa m m E E lt lt z z FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 59 ALARM LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Logbook Array is determined by the specified size in the Message Size field of the Alarm Archive Control panel in the Distributed Alarm Logging Setup table Index Unique Column list The logbook entry table is built using the following schema Column Type Array Description INTEGER eene diem _ ermiDrumbe _ m aema GHAR 8 oeae Array is determined by the specified size in the Message Size field of the Alarm Archive Control panel in the Distributed Alarm Logging Setup table Index Unique Column list LOGBOOK Distributed Alarm Logging provides a logbook entry capability during run time that allows you to annotate the alarm These entries are saved in the relational database or a
347. of each page c checks if system is properly initialized If the check is unsuccessful the following message is displayed Key not installed If the message above is displayed install the software protection key or code FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 411 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES Utility Messages UTILITY MESSAGES If errors occur while FactoryLink is executing a utility error messages are displayed on the screen This section lists these messages describes their cause and provides suggested actions Can t open file filename Cause Thesystemis unableto open an output file The disk may be full or the path may not exist Acion Delete any unnecessary files if the disk is full Createthe path if it does not exist Can t create file filename Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware Setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up torun FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by FactoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for actoryL ink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardware is compati ble Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur 412 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTI
348. of the following pulldown menus is displayed Main Menu Main Menu Ctl M Object List Next Screen Ctl N Xref List Previous Screen Ctl P Domain List Object List X ref List View pulldown menu Doman List from configuration View pulldown menu from Main Menu Search Next Tag Attributes Cul T Eield Choices Ctul K 236 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Viewing Miscellaneous Information 2 Choose Domain The following list is displayed on the screen Demam Lint linj Ect View due Ei nor NONE HIKE This list contains an entry for each domain defined This will be one shared domain and one user domain The information displayed for each domain is described below Domain Domains configured for the application Parent The parent of the domain For user domain this is shared The shared domain does not have a parent INST Number of users that can open the domain at any one time For shared domain this defaults to 1 and should not be changed F or user domain this defaults to 2 and should be changed to the maximum number of users you want to open the application at any one time Persistence Type of persistence assigned to this element You can modify the entry in this field Refer to the CoreTask Section of the FactoryLink Configuration Guidefor more information on the options Change Bits Indicates whether not
349. ogger startup L Batch Recipe L V Log error messages to a file Log error messages with more Historians information increased verbose level to a file Database Browser Math amp Logic Interpreted mode only SPC Log SPC View and SPR Trending is 2 3 or 4 The greater the number the more information you will receive is any number between 100 and 2000 is any number from 2 to 22 The greater the number the more information you will receive 278 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Table 106 1 Valid Program Arguments Continued FactoryLink Task Valid Entries Descriptions Database L ogger Log error messages to a file Log error messages with more information increased verbose level to a file Increase the size of the Logger s buffer Run Time Graphics Performs redraw for static objects Uses object s animated value Performs redraw of symbol background Print Spooler Send print requests except for alarm logs and binary files to the system print queue instead of directly to the printer FactoryLink Local L Log FactoryLink FLLAN error Area Networking messages to a file FLLAN Log FactoryLink FLLAN error messages with more information increased verbose level to a file X Log underlying network software s error messages to a log file Prevents actoryLink from automatically setting FLLAN s Enable Disabletag to 1 ON is 2 3 or 4 The g
350. ogging Methodology 74 Grouping Data uo er bU 76 Orde mg Dataren iey i ee ae ak as A 79 Ial ea E E NNE EE E EE E E 79 Tirriestambplrig zusammen vU Rd ay ad 79 Indexing csse te eee be ered es v LO ear W Evade eee ey envied 80 Indexing for the Trend Task 81 TimeBaseChart Indexing 81 Event Chart Indexing 81 Event and Time based Trend Chart Indexing 82 Grouped Data Indexing 82 Deletion Methods 83 Record Rollover 1 1 es 83 Subgroup Rollover 84 Deleting Group 85 Database Logging Methods 86 Nongrouped Nonsequenced Method 86 Nongrouped Sequenced Method 86 Grouped method 86 Configuring Program Arguments 88 Data Point Logging Task Definition 91 Data Point Logging Function 92 Preconfigured Data Point Logging Tables 92 Preconfigured Data Point Logging Table Schemas 93 Data Logged
351. ogic debugging Most applications written in the Interpreted M ode function can be used with limited or no modifications under the Compiled ode If an application runningin Interpreted M ode uses any reserved words as variables or procedure names these will need to be modified so the compiler will be ableto compile and link the procedures error free These words indude any reserved by the C compiler for the platform you are running on as well as those reserved by F actoryLink Using IML When you use IML you create procedure files that are scripts and manipulate both real time database elements and local variables o ey o 5 a e Interpreted mode is most appropriate when Only mathematical functions will be performed A compiler is not available Running IML After starting the application Load the program into memory e Validate the program e Wait for changes to the trigger elements in the real time database associated with the procedures in the program e Execute the program associated with the trigger when the trigger element is set to 1 ON FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 135 MATH amp LOGIC TASK DEFINITION Modes Executing IML When procedure changes are triggered in the real time database IML determines the proper procedure requested and then interprets and executes the instructions in the procedure Each time an IML program is executed Math amp Logic first reads or inter
352. ogic source field PROCS PRG INC CML source files CML C H MAK e Network configuration files NET The following files are restored by platform specific F LREST operations CML binary files CML OBJ E XE Logfiles LOG e Recipe files RCP 6 When all files have been copied to the appropriate drive directory the following message is displayed FactoryLink Application Restore Completed 7 Restore CML binary Log or Recipe files with a multiplatform F LREST by copying them manually from the backup diskette 394 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLSETLNG FLSETLNG The FLSETLNG utility allows the user to specify the language F actoryLink Configuration Manager Application Editor and non operating system specific Runtime modules run in based on the languages installed on the system FLSETLNG can berun stand alone or by double clicking on the executable file e co Caution You will receive an error message if you try to FLSETLNG while another FactoryLink task or configuration is running The executable file is located in the FLINK BIN directory To run FLSETLNG in stand alone mode enter the following command at the system prompt flseting o pr E lt 3 2 The FactoryLink 6 5 0 Languages dialog displays the available languages installed on your system that you can choose to run your applications
353. ogram Manager These applications are configured to usethe dBASE IV Historian If you do not usethis Historian configure the application to usethe desired Historian before you run any activities accessing a relational database This application uses most of the FactoryLink tasks you have purchased Some Screens may do nothing if you have not purchased or installed the task that provides the information to that screen FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 397 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLTEST and FLDEMO On OS 2 Operating Systems This section describes how to restore the FLTEST or FLDEMO application on an OS 2 operating system from the Program Manager and a command line From the Desktop Manager 1 Choose FactoryLink OS 2 program group from the Desktop Manager menu to display the applications available with the F actoryLink group Double click im FactorgLink OS 2 Icon View no here to restore an application bi a H X ab Apipi Factor Link Saat Hew Spy Corbara Peetondonk Aun pi acsi pri 2 Choose Restore Application 3 Follow the onscreen instructions From a Command Line 1 ChangetotheMPS directory in the FLINK path at the OS 2 system prompt F or example CD FLOS2 MPS 2 Enter the following command if you want to restore the FLTEST application FLREST FLTEST MPS c FLTEST loc Enter the following command if you want to restore the FLDEMO application FLREST FLTEST MPS c FLDEMO loc
354. ol charts sample of units taken at or near the sametime from a given process Each object in a composite object is called a subobject Subobjects can contain simple and or composite objects See composite object simple object A graphic object exchanged with another object during runtime See configuration table database table See element name A two part number F actoryLink assigns to an element and uses to refer to that element when writing a value to it or reading its current value For example the tag number 0 177 where is the segment block of space in the real time database that stores elements of one datatype 177 is the offset location of the bits in the segment that contain the element FactoryLink program that reads from and writes to the real time database and performs a specific function FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 455 111 o o lt A DE F GH GLOSSARY task specific database table text cursor Timer toggle tolerance trend Trending trending chart trigger TRUE type TYPE database table u Chart UCL UKEY USL I JK LE MN OP QR STU VW X Y Z Database table that stores information related solely to a specific task Flashing vertical bar that indicates the point on the screen where the next keyboard input will be displayed FactoryLink task that updates real time database information based on the chronological events and time interva
355. ollowing 1 The operating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by FactoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and 105 you have the correct version for F actoryL ink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardwareis compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur ou 56 DIE 5 gt FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 253 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages Can t make subframe window Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set to FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by F actoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for actoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardware is compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur Can t make task list window Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occ
356. on e Between multiple F actoryLink applications on different nodes Node1 Node2 FL Application 1 Node2 FL Application 2 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 153 lt lt JoNJ9MOd POWERNET TASK DEFINITION PowerNet Methodology e Between one application on one node and applications on different nodes Node2 Node1 Node3 amp M N N Node4 You can configure the application to permit each of these connections to be changed at run time This permits the operator at a client application to change the node being used as its server 154 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals POWERNET TASK DEFINITION Method of Data Transfer METHOD OF DATA TRANSFER This section describes what initiates data transfer between a server application and a dient application Startup As each client attaches to a server application all of the data shared between the server and dient applications is transmitted from the server to the dient This ensures the client contains up to date data immediately upon starting up This also occurs at reconnection in the event a connection is lost between the client and server lt lt Server to Client Data Transfer Data transfer from the server to the client is configured by one of the following two methods Exception Data Transmits data to the client only when data has change
357. on Server on page 689 in the FactoryLink Configuration Guidefor information on procedures to configure this task J9A19S 310 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 141 OLE AUTOMATION SERVER TASK DEFINITION Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The FactoryLink OLE Server task provides other applications access to the FactoryLink real time engine Any application that supports OLE custom controls can interface with the OLE Server task using the F actoryLink Connection Component F LOCX The FLOCX is an ActiveX control designed to interface with the OLE Server task ActiveX is a technology that enables software components to interact with one another in anetworked environment regardless of the language they were created in Activex controls are reusable software components developed to quickly add specialized functionality desktop applications and development tools The diagram below shows an overview of the relationships between the FactoryLink real time engine the FactoryLink OLE Server task the FLOCX and the container application Process Boundry LRPC RPC FactoryLink Mechanism Ole Server FLOle Task Write Forced Write to FactoryLink Tag Read from FactoryLink tag GetValue FactoryLink tag Change Notification 142 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Application that supports OLE Controls Visual Basic 4 0 and 5 0 Excel 97 and Ac
358. on does not connect to the local station the local station waits at least CALL seconds before attempting to reconnect The remote station may still connect to the local station in the interim FactoryLink 6 5 0 6 5 0 125 r o Oo cA gt o P o 25 2 LOCAL AREA NETWORKING TASK DEFINITION Local Station s Default Values MAXLEN The largest number of bytes a station can send or receive a single data packet The default is 512 This number can be from 512 through 1 048 576 The tag data is truncated if a message or mailbox tag larger than MAXLEN is sent Make this number the same on all stations If you enter a value for this parameter less than the minimum FLLAN uses the default minimum If you enter a value greater than the maximum FLLAN uses the default maximum Only FLLAN uses this parameter File Manager uses BUFSIZE to determine the buffer size E ach element uses a specific number of bytes depending on its data type All elements use 4 bytes to store the tag name x bytes to store the value as shown in the following table Table 93 4 Bytes for Data Type The tag type uses bytes 4 for the tag name which z Digital Es p e Longana Message the number of characters in the string 42 bytes for the length Mailbox the number of characters the string 26 bytes for the header The MAXLEN parameters in the LAN Local Names panel must be configure
359. on page 189 in the FactoryLink Reference Guide for a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages HulyJOMJON L y 2907 FactoryLink 6 5 0 6 5 0 117 LOCAL AREA NETWORKING TASK DEFINITION FLLAN Methodology FLLAN METHODOLOGY The following steps describe and illustrate how FLLAN sends and receives data across a network 1 FLLAN reads the data from the real time database and passes it tothe Network Operating System 2 The Network Operating System translates the data into a form the other station understands before sending it across the network 3 The Network Operating System on the receiving station receives the data and translates the data into a form FactoryLink understands before passing it to FLLAN 4 FLLAN writes the data tothe real time database on the receiving station tag1 tag2 realtime database on STATION1 realtime database on STATION2 118 FactoryLink 6 5 0 6 5 0 LOCAL AREA NETWORKING TASK DEFINITION Sending and Receiving Data SENDING AND RECEIVING DATA FLLAN uses send and receive operations to transfer data between stations on the network This includes the following e Sending Values to Remote Stations e Receiving Values from Remote Stations Sending Values to Remote Stations FLLAN uses send operations to send data to remote stations During a send operation the FLLAN on the local station sends values from the F
360. ontaining the tag name you want to edit 2 Choose View from the Configuration Manager menu bar ES Configuration Manager lal x Application View Utilities Exit Help F1 The following pulldown menu is displayed Main Menu Ctl M Next Screen Ctl N Previous Screen Ctl P Object List X ref List Domain List Search Next Tag Attributes Ctrl T Field Choices Cul K 3 Choose Tag Attributes The Tag Definition dialog is displayed S 313 3a 5 M per Donate Sari axing marg Jiss hingi Co Ge Enrepiiun Emi hange ites m zi bee eaae iiri arae EIE FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 235 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Viewing Miscellaneous Information 4 Choose the Edit command button 5 Edit the fields you want to change Refer to Defining Tags in the F actoryLink Configuration Guide for descriptions of fields on this panel Or you can press Ctrl T to display this panel ViEWING MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION The Configuration M anager provides the following tools to view information about the FactoryLink application you are developing Using these tools you can view the following Current version of FactoryLink Number of domains defined for an application Viewing Domain List 1 Choose View from the main menu bar or from the configuration panel menu bar Configuration Manager amp xl Application View Utilities Exit Help F1 One
361. ooler request SPOOLRPLY SHARED MESSAGE Print Spooler reply SPRGMBX SHARED MAILBOX SPR graphics input mailbox SPRGMBX_U USER MAILBOX SPR graphics input mailbox SPRRCVMBX SHARED MAILBOX SPR receive mailbox for database access SPRRCVMBX_U USER MAILBOX SPR receive mailbox for database access SPVRCVMBX SHARED MAILBOX SPC View mailbox for database access SPVRCVMBX_U USER MAILBOX SPC View mailbox for database access SQRD EXCEPTION DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Square D exception write disable SQRD_EXCEPTION_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Square D exception write trigger SQRD LPORTO MSG SHARED MESSAGE SquareD logical port 0 error message SQRD READ COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Square D block read complete SQRD_READ_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Square D block read disable SQRD_READ_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Square D block read state SQRD_READ_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Square D block read trigger 388 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 2 Tagname Domain Type Description SQRD STATIONO STATUS SHARED ANALOG Square D logical station 0 status SQRD_WRITE_COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Square D block write complete SQRD_WRITE_DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Square D block write disable SQRD_WRITE_STATE SHARED DIGITAL Square D block write state SQRD_WRITE_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Square D block write trigger STARTUP SHARED DIGITAL Run Time Mana
362. or the Run Time Manager task is TASKSTATUS 5 0 If the information in a field is longer than the number of characters that fit in the allotted space on the screen part of the entry will scroll out of sight as shown below If this is the complete data Then This Is Displayed in the in the field 16 Character Space Programmable Counter 7 Programmable Cou To see characters that have scrolled out of sight press the gt and lt keys The field scrolls to display the text The bracketed number represents an array dimension Complete the following steps to add a task tothe Run Time Manager screen 1 Choosethe appropriate domain for the task on the Main Menu 2 double dick on System Configuration to open the System Configuration Information panel 3 Starting under the last row of information in the System Configuration Information panel add the required information about the new task to each field Usethe Copy and Paste functions to copy duplicate information such as element names from the previous row 4 Review the previous task in the task list to determine its dimension Assign the new task s element names the next available array dimension If you used the Copy and Paste functions to copy information from an existing row modify each array dimension to be the correct value 5 Choose Enter to save the information when the panel is complete Thenext time you run the application the new task and its related information is d
363. ort Export Import 4 Choose Import The following dialog is displayed requesting the name of the file you want to import Ester ihe FacteryLink eggscalian directory emm nem 5 Enter thefull pathname of the directory containing the file s you want to import 224 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Opening Multiple Configuration Tables OPENING MULTIPLE CONFIGURATION TABLES When you are configuring an application sometimes you must fill out configuration tables for multiple modules For example if you are configuring logging of data from the real time database to a relational database you must define tables in the Historian Schema and Logger modules It can be beneficial in these cases to open configuration tables for multiple modules at the same time Perform the following steps to open multiple configuration tables 1 Choose View from the Main Menu or configuration panel menu bar Configuration Manager lej x Application View Utilities Exit Help F1 One of the following pulldown menus is displayed Main Menu Ctrl M Main Menu Ctl M Object List Next Screen Ctl N X ref List Previous Screen Ctl P Domain List Object List X ref List View pulldown menu Domain Lid from configuration View pulldown menu from Main Menu Search Next Tag Attributes Ctul T Field Choices Ctl K 2 Choose Main Menu This makes the Main Menu the
364. ou can develop multiple F actoryLink applications simultaneously you can actively work on only one at a time When you open the Configuration Manager the application located in the default F LAPP directory is active Perform the following steps to open a development application other than the default application 1 Choose Close from the Configuration Manager Application pull down menu to dose the active application Only one application can be open at a time Open Ctl 0 Close Ctl C Size 2 Choose Open from the Application menu You are prompted for the directory containing the application you wish to open 105 Ente the Focherst int epgkrelias mee nem Click here if you need help y Buisn 56 RIE 5 gt 3 Enter the full pathname of the directory containing the application you want to open FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 221 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Working with Multiple Development Applications 4 Choose the command button of the operation you want to perform Enter open the application For example if you want to open the Southern application enter C station south Cancel Toreturn tothe Configuration Manager without choosing an application Help To get help Sharing Information Between Applications Often two applications are similar When this is the case you can save development time by exporting database files
365. p to set up the FactoryLink DDE Client 1 Configure the task in the System Configuration Information panel by specifying the following information in each field Flag FSR theFlag field These flags allow the DDE Client to automatically load each time F actoryLink is started Task Name NameFLDDECLI to identify the Client task Path Pathnameas bin flddecli Refer to Chapter Running H F 4 Using Systen Configuration for more information about other related System Configuration Information panel fields such as Status 108 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter90 Event and Interval Timer Task Definition Use the Event and Interval Timer task to define timed events and time intervals that initiate and control any system function in run time mode Timed events occur at a specific time not more than once every 24 hours for example Monday at 8 00 A M They are configured in the Event Timer Table e Time intervals occur at least once every twenty four hours at regular intervals of the system clock for example every 60 seconds They are configured in the Interval Timer Table lt lt The Event Interval Timer task links timed events and intervals to real time database elements used as triggers whenever the event or interval occurs It is defined in the SHARED domain The use of Event and Interval timers requires an understanding of change status flags Refer to the FactoryLink Fundamen
366. panels 217 subdirectory 455 Index 1 469 A EF GHI Subgroup 455 subgroups rollover 84 supported relational databases 116 switching from IML to CML 136 symbol 455 syntax checki ng 245 System configurati on adding new tasks 281 array dimension determining 282 calculating number of processes 290 color scheme changing 285 domain associations changing 283 editing task information 281 error messages archiving 286 overview 273 Run Time Graphics Windows 284 screen components modifying 289 System Configuration Information panel 274 viewing domain associations 281 System directory subdirectories 36 system messages archiving 286 T tag name 455 structure 202 tag naming convention 157 tag number 455 tag parameters 157 181 202 420 tag type conversion 159 TAGNAME 93 tags changing a definition 235 1 470 FactoryLink 6 5 0 JK L MN OP QRS TUVWXYZ converting tagnames 406 deleting definition 233 editing 206 parameters 157 181 202 420 searching 231 using as triggers 210 viewing number defined 226 TAGVALUE 93 task controls 305 tasks adding 281 terminating 346 terminating all FactoryLink tasks 346 single task 336 text cursor 456 text entry panels managing files 244 overview 216 time changing 112 time based charts indexing 81 trending 193 Timer changing date 112 changing time 112 overview 109 principles of operation 110 timestamp order 79 toggle 456 Tolerance 456 Trend 456 Trending chart typ
367. party software needed by FactoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for F actoryL ink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardwareis compatible ou Buisn az orm 5 a o 5 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 251 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur Can t find window Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware Setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up torun FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by FactoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for actoryL ink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardware is compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur Can t insert at this point in database file Cause Youtried to insert a row in a configuration panel between consecuti vel y numbered rows rows cannot be inserted between consecuti vel y numbered rows Action Insert the row either before or after the two consecutive rows or resequence the panel To resequenc
368. paste operation but the block to be pasted was not moved to the paste buffer Move the block to be pasted to the paste buffer by performing a copy or cut operation Then retry the paste operation Can t paste at this point in database file Cause Action You tried to paste a row between consecutively numbered rows you cannot insert rows between consecutively numbered rows Paste the row either before or after the two consecutive rows or resequence the panel To resequence the panel usethe Main Menu Cut function to cut the consecutively numbered rows from the panel Then usethe Paste function to reinsert the rows Now you can insert a row between the two rows You can also 105 resequence all the rows of data you can view in the panel at one time or even resequence all of the data in the panel ou 22 ES 50 2 o 5 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 255 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages Can t process command line Cause Thecommand line you entered to the Main Menu has an invalid argument Action Enter a valid command line argument Command Description PXXXXXXXX of Program directory AXXXXXXXX XXXXXxxx of Application directory LXXXXXXXX name of Log TXXXXXXXX XXXXXxxx of Program Title Can t read domain database Cause Thefile DOMAIN CDB is either missi
369. pe when you restart the application Before each FactoryLink session is restarted the element names stored in the persistence save file must be checked for changes against the OBJ ECT CT and the DOMAIN CT files The RESOLVE EXE program resolve on UNIX systems resolves the configuration changes The FLRUN command automatically executes this program before it starts the Run Time Manager for a particular FactoryLink session The RESOLVE program serves three purposes e Creates the blank persistence save file the first time it is run e Manages the changes between the persistence save file and the F actoryLink configuration files e Determines if the persistence save file is usable and if not the program looks for and uses the persistence backup file UU n o e gt Oo RESOLVE makes the following changes e Removes element names from the persistence save file that have been deleted from the application or changed to a different data type e Updates the element name ID for element names that were deleted then recreated e Adds element names to the persistence save file that have been reconfigured to have persistence these element names are added with no data values e Copies the persistence backup file over the persistence save file if the savefile is corrupted FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 147 PERSISTENCE TASK DEFINITION Resolving Configuration Changes 148 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Ch
370. perating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by F actoryLink such as 105 X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for F actoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardware is compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur ou RU ES 50 2 External modules not supported at this time Cause This error is displayed only on FactoryLink for OS 2 or Windows The Main Menu cannot load an external module Either the module may not exist in the path or it may have been damaged FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 261 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages Action Run CHKDSK If there are no problems with the disk files re install FactoryLink Field not in key list Cause A string has been entered that is not in the key file FLINK KEY xxx K EY specified in the AC file Action Modify the string to match or add the string to the key file The string must be in the same caseas it is in the key file File has been modified since last save Select OK to destroy changes or CANCEL to return to the edit session Cause An exit was attempted from a window in which the changes have not been written to the database Action Choose OK to disregard the ch
371. prets the instructions within the program to determine the actions to perform Then it executes those actions Switching from IML to CML Usethe following procedure to make switching from IML to CML in large applications a one step process Issue the following command from the BH SQL prompt in the FLAPP directory of the application To change from IML to CML use the following command SQL update imltrig set mode COMPILED where mode is not null To change from CML toIML use the following command SQL update imltrig set mode INTERPRETED where mode is not null Compiled Mode Compiled modeis a combination of several FactoryL ink utilities with a third party ANSI C language compiler working together to generate ANSI C code from user created prg files In CML the procedure program file is translated into C source code that is compiled to create a binary executable file for the platform the application is developed on Because the application consists of both the SHARED and USER domains CML creates two executable files one for each domain These executables are unique and are named For SHARED domain FLAPP SHARED CML CSHARED EXE e For USER domain FLAPP USER CML CUSER EXE Thesefiles perform the same actions described in the program file when the associated trigger elements are set CML increases the speed and functionality of applications that useIML 136 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals MAT
372. r F actoryL ink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardwareis compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur No dialog for tag selection Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 105 2 All third party software needed by FactoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for F actoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardwareis compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur y Buisn orm 50 2 5 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 265 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages No error Cause Action No help yet Cause Action The current error field contains a valid entry No action required A hlp file was not present for this field Verify the related hlp file is present in the FLINK MSG directory and then run MKHELP EXE No names in TITLES file Cause Action The file FLINK AC TITLES does not contain any AC file names F actoryLink installation may not have completed normal
373. r in two separate columns and specify two indices one with the integer and the other with the time stamping to display the same logged data on both an event anda time based trend chart Refer to Indexing on page 80 for details on indexing Y Y Use each column as one index key Seq Int Seq Time Last First Start date 48652600 12 14 93 Grouped Data Indexing You must specify an index key that includes both the sequence number and the group column to display grouped data on an event chart The sequence number column must contain an integer The group column contains the group association of groupname groupname subgroupnum subgroupnum Use these two columns Seq_Int Location Lastname Start_date as index key Atlanta J ones 11 6 95 82 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DATABASE LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Deletion Methods DELETION METHODS The logging method you choose depends in part on how data gets deleted from the relational database Your options include e Record rollover e Subgroup rollover e Group data deletion Record Rollover lt lt Record rollover is available if you are logging nongrouped data to a FactoryLink dBASE IV relational database Record rollover permits you to specify the maximum number of records allowed in the database file Once this maximum is reached the next attempt at logging a record overwrites the oldest record in the database If the database file perm
374. r the indicated application and allows the user to start again without shutting down FactoryLink Usethis option only when an abnormal shutdown of a single domain occurs rtdb name isthe name of the real time database on which to act This field is required if you are using the D option and optional with all the other options If you do not specify rtdb name the actions are taken on the database defined in the FLNAME environment variable For example specify the following command to unlock the shared memory areas for the flapp1 real time database flshm Imu 410 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES UKEY UKEY eo co Usethe UKEY utility to e List licensed options e Check licensed options Enter this command in lowercase if you are running in a UNIX environment The syntax is ukey options where options can be one of the following If you do not specify any options a menu is displayed that includes all of the options available with ukey o O mp lt o 1 lists all the options provided with your license If there are more options than can fit on one page the list stops at the end of each page 1 lists all the options without stopping at the end of each page d list all the options available If there are more options than can fit on one page the list stops at the end of each page dp lists all the options without stopping at the end
375. r to Logging in the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for more information Data Logged Data is logged to a predefined table structure F or each event logged the database row reflects the following entries LOGTIME TAGNAME TAGVALUE e LOGTIME is a numeric column that stores the time the tag was logged TAGNAME isthe name of thetag that was logged at LOGTIME TAGVALUE isthe value of the tag logged at LOGTIME FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 93 DATA POINT LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Logging Methods Only one tag and the value of the tag is recorded in each row This means less data is stored and captured at each logging trigger optimizing database storage space The data point logging configuration also allows you to change the length of the tagname column and the column type and precision of the tag value column for further maximizing of storage space Theindex created for Data Point Logging tables is a multi column index based on Tag Name and Log Time with Tag Name the major key Data Point Logging also allows you to dynamically add or remove tags from the list of tags being logged during run time without affecting the database structure LOGGING METHODS With Data Point Logging you can specify when a tag data point is to be logged based on one or more of the following A change the tag exception logging A fixed time interval a trigger tag If a ta
376. rations and information at the beginning of each chapter about specific Historians in the Configuration manual before configuring a particular Historian 116 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 93 Local Area Networking Task Definition TheFactoryLink Local Area Networking F LLAN module transmits FactoryL ink data between computers or stations across a network A network is a combination of hardware and software that lets multiple computers share resources such as files printers or data A network consists of the following parts A Network Operating System NOS Software that transports data between software applications on different computers e A network application Software that sends data to a similar application on another computer via the Network Operating System FactoryLink FLLAN isa network application FLLAN can send data to multiple FactoryLink stations on a network even if each station runs on a different operating system Thenetwork hardware N etwork interface cards installed on each computer on the network and cables that link them all together lt lt FactoryLink stations Ethernet network cables running FLLAN This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure Local Area Networking operations Refer to Setting up the System on page 617 in the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for information on procedures to configure this task Use FLLAN
377. rcumstances under which a block of code is to be executed Also called conditional statement Light indicator on a monitor that shows where the next character is to be generated The cursor can be moved across the screen by the use of a key on the keyboard or with a pointing device Also refers to the chart cursor which points to a specified instant in time on a Trend or SPC plot The chart cursor retrieves the numeric value or values which are plotted for that instant in time Recurring pattern FactoryLink task that uses SQL statements to communicate with a Historian sends and retrieves data to and from external database tables including tables created outside of F actoryL ink See element Group of related database records FactoryLink task that enables other FactoryLink tasks to send element information to a database historian FactoryLink configuration database table that stores information generated by a task from the Main Menu or data in the task s panels Digital analog long analog floating point message or mailbox data types supported by actoryL ink FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 437 Q o o lt A DE F GH GLOSSARY decimal number system default developer Device Name digital directory discrete display object domain dynamic EDI architecture EDI base module EDI External Device Interface editor electronic key electronic protection device
378. real time database tried unsuccessfully to wake a task waiting for the value of a particular element to change Action See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 317 USING RUN TIME MANAGER Run time Manager Messages 33 FLE_NO_SIGNALS Cause Ifa task calls the FL_RECV_SIG function to find out if any signals have been sent to it the FL_RECV_SIG function returns a message If no signals have been sent to the task FL RECV SIG returns this message Action Noadion required 34 FLE SIGNALLED Cause Thereal time database sends this message to inform a sleeping task that the task has received a signal not a change in value of the element for which it is waiting Action Noadion required 35 FLE NOT MAILBOX Cause of the following conditions caused this error The CTs need to be rebuilt Action Perform the corresponding action Run CTGEN to rebuild the CTs If this does not solve the problem proceed to step 2 Cause While configuring a task you entered an element of a data type other than MAILBOX in a field that requires a MAILBOX element Action Open the configuration panels from the Main Menu of the task containing the error Ensure the data types of the elements in all fields requiring MAILBOX elements are defined as MAILBOX 36 FLE NO MESSAGES Cause If through the PAK QUERY MBX function a task requests to view a message whose queue number falls ou
379. reater the number the more information you will receive is any number between 100 and 2000 is any number from 2 to 22 The greater the number the more information you will receive FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 279 STET USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Table 106 1 Valid Program Arguments Continued FactoryLink Task Valid Entries Descriptions File Manager Log error messages to a file Log error messages with more information increased verbose level to a file is 2 3 or 4 The greater the number the more information you will receive is any number between 100 and 2000 is any number from 2 to 22 The greater the number the more information you will receive 280 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Editing Task Information EDITING TASK INFORMATION 106 The new application utility FLNEW establishes default values for tasks in the System Configuration Information panel and associates each task with a specific domain These defaults and associations are based on evaluation of task performance and are recommended for most applications You may edit this panel toidentify an external program to the system Although you can make changes in some fields it is better not to change any fields except Flags and Display Status o 5 o lt 0 e 3 Viewing Domain Associations Complete the following steps to v
380. rectly but the error continues to occur There are no errors because the file has not been validated Cause Action Too many keys Using only 100 Cause Action The VALIDATE function has not yet been used on this file The standard edit window may mean the Enter key has not yet been 105 entered for this window It may also mean no validation exists for this application Noaction required There are too many keys in the key file The maximum number of keys allowed is 100 Remove enough keys from the key file so there will be only 100 ou 22 o 50 Be o 9 5 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 271 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages Unknown error error number Cause Either the operating system third party software or hardware setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set to FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by F actoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for actoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardware is compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur Validation error Select OK to continue exiting Cause Thetext file co
381. red Refer to FactoryLink Directory Organization on page 35 for details on where these files reside These files identified by their cdb extension and their corresponding index files are identified by their mdx extension RUN TIME ENVIRONMENT lt lt The run time environment uses the information provided in the configuration tables to build an application When the F actoryLink application is started the contents of the dBASE IV files aretranslated and stored in binary files containing a ct extension Where these files are located depends on the domain associated with the data Refer to FactoryLink Directory Organization on page 35 for details The name assigned to each file uses the following form module name CT where module name thename of thetask as is displayed in the system configuration task FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 23 OVERVIEW Real time Database REAL TIME DATABASE A Real Time Database is central to all FactoryLink tasks in real time mode This Real Time Database resides in memory and acts as both a storage device and an interprocess communication mechanism Real Time Database All FactoryLink tasks share information in the Real Time Database by reading from or writing to the Real Time Database Data is never passed directly between two tasks The Real Time Database contains all the data values to be shared between the application tasks When configuring the
382. relational database receiving the data This can be either the dBASE I V compatible database that can be purchased with FactoryLink or a third party relational database such as Oracle7 or Sybase Refer to Historian Task Definition on page 115 for details on which third party relational databases are compatible with F actoryLink This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure Database Logging operations Refer to Database Logger on page 347 in the F actoryLink Configuration Guide for information on procedures to configure this task Use Database Logging on page 57 in the FactoryLink Reference Guide for a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 73 DATABASE LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Database Logging Methodology DATABASE LOGGING METHODOLOGY The following steps describe and illustrate how memory resident real time data is logged to a disk based relational database 1 The real time database receives and stores data from various sources such as a remote device user input or computation results from a FactoryLink task When data is collected and stored in this database other tasks can access and manipulate it 2 Database Logging reads the values of data elements stored in the real time database and maps the data elements to columns in a disk based relational database table 3 Database Loggi
383. rence refers to a FactoryLink data element or tag whose name implies but does not require the element exists in an external domain A tagname prefixed with an external domain name and a colon is a remote reference U 2 emt FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 151 POWERNET TASK DEFINITION PowerNet Methodology POWERNET METHODOLOGY The following steps describe and illustrate how data stored in one F actoryLink application server is referenced by another FactoryLink application client 1 The client application requests all remote tag references on connection toa server 2 A server transfers the data to the F actoryLink client application according to a client defined schedule This can either be on exception or on a polled interval 3 Optionally when data changes in the real time database of the F actoryLink client application the dient application writes data back to the FactoryLink server application A distributed FactoryLink system can share data in any one of the following configurations e Between two FactoryLink applications running on the same node Node1 FactoryLink application FactoryLink application 152 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals PO WERNET TASK DEFINITION PowerNet Methodology e Between two F actoryLink applications running on two different nodes FactoryLink application Node1 A Node2 K FactoryLink applicati
384. resentative sample of a population and determining the properties of the sample sampling variation The variation of a sample s properties from the properties of the population from which it was drawn 9 o o lt select object Seeinput select object FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 453 A DE F GH GLOSSARY server SHARED domain Sigma sigma limits signals simple object sprintf string stability of a process standard deviation start trigger statement I JK LE MN OP QR STU VW X Y Z 1 Task that receives requests for action from other tasks 2 A computer that provides a shared hard disk and possibly other resources in a local area network Collection of elements in the real time database that contain publicly owned data and tasks available to all users at run time See domain USER domain 1 Standard deviation of a statistical population Represented by the symbol o 2 Type of real time and historical control chart found in FactoryLink SPC See X Bar moving averages For histograms lines marked on the histogram showing the points n standard deviations above and below the mean For control charts control lines evenly spaced on either side of the center line Notifications of events used to affect process control Single objects such as lines circles and text not composed of any other objects The basic building blocks of a graphics display See composite obj
385. riginal tag name is 32 less 7 or 25 If the original tag name plus extension exceeds 32 characters a warning is issued Scaling and Deadbanding When a new tag is created an extension of up to 8 characters plus a colon 9 characters maximum is added These additional characters reduce the maximum length of the original tag name therefore the maximum effective length of the original tag nameis 32 less 7 less 9 or 16 If you are not sure if you will be using PowerNet or Scaling and Deadbanding you may choose to define tag names using only 16 characters Also remember if shortening tag names do not reduce the length of the extensions FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 421 FACTORYLINK LITE Developer Defined Tag Element Maximum DEVELOPER DEFINED TAG ELEMENT MAXIMUM FactoryLink Lite is designed to process a limited number of developer defined real time database elements per application All elements of tag arrays are counted toward this total This total is in addition to the pre defined elements provided with a new blank application The total number of tags available to you is determined by your licensing agreement Each time you configure an element during configuration FactoryLink Lite adds it tothe total count of elements you have defined for that application If you define more elements than allowed FactoryLink displays an error message At run time FactoryLink Lite checks the application to determine the number of dev
386. rk Links networked applications providing transfer of real time data elements from one station to the next FLOCX Is an ActiveX control designed to interface with the OLE Server task File Manager M anages files on local drives or remote servers and transfers files from one station to the next PowerNet Shares real time data between applications across a network Details on how to configure each module can be found in the F actoryLink Configuration Guide 30 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals OVERVIEW Two Domains Two DOMAINS There are two run time environments called domains These are the SHARED domain and the USER domain During configuration you associate tasks tables and elements with a specific domain so you can configure a F actoryLink application to suit your needs You can give a group of users independent access to the same F actoryL ink run time tasks such as Graphics Math amp Logic and Statistical Process Control This lets users access the same data at the same time with two different tasks You can create an application that lets multiple users of a single run time system use the tasks independently without the users sharing data that is users can simultaneously run the same tasks but each user s data is unique For example one user can employ the Statistical Process Control task to evaluate the consistency of an assembly sequence while another uses it to report anomalies in a packaging process e
387. ro oN49MOd FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 159 POWERNET TASK DEFINITION Tag Type Conversion 160 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 98 Print Spooler Task Definition The FactoryLink Print Spooler task permits you to direct data to printers or other devices with parallel interfaces and also to disk files The Print Spooler task also provides other features File name spooling loads file when print device is available minimizing required memory Management of printing and scheduling functions lt lt Print Spooler receives output from other FactoryLink tasks such as Alarm Supervisor or File Manager and sends this output to a printer or disk file You can define up to five devices with Print Spooler to receive output from other FactoryLink tasks actoryLink tasks reference the corresponding device number in a configuration table to send files to one of these devices This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure Print Spooler operations Refer to Print Spooler on page 83 in the FactoryL ink Configuration Guidefor information on procedures to configure this task Use Print Spooler on page 449 in the FactoryLink Reference Guidefor a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages 1uud FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 161 PRINT SPOOLER TASK DEFINITION 162 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Ch
388. rocess Example Two You can set up another task such as EDI or Math amp Logic to react to a deviation such as a defective bottle during the count by adjusting the count To adjust the count that task writes a 1 ON to the Down Clock element to cause the value of the Current Value element to move toward the Preset Value by the Increment Value For example during counting if a defective bottle is counted but not packed in the case the EDI or Math amp Logictask subtracts that bottle from the total count by writing a 1 ON tothe Down Clock element to causethe Current Value to move toward the Preset Value 0 in this example by the Increment Value 1 in this example After six bottles have been counted and packed in the case the Counter task counts the seventh bottle But the seventh bottle is defective soit is not packed in the case Therefore the EDI or Math amp Logictask subtracts that bottle from the total count by writing a 1 ON tothe Down Clock element This causes the Current Value to move from 7 down to 6 0 o oc c o 9 SIE FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 165 PROGRAMMABLE COUNTERS TASK DEFINITION Principles of Operation If all counted bottles are defective and thus are not packed the EDI or Math amp Logic task subtracts them from the total count by causing the Current Value to count down until it matches the Preset Value 0 Although the bottle count is now 0 the Output elements ha
389. rror has occurred Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set to FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by F actoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for actoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardware is compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur Non numeric character in a numeric field Cause A non numeric character has been entered in a numeric field Only characters 0 9 and may exist in a numeric field Action Delete the non numeric characters from the field Number of rows rows were not imported due to errors Cause Invalid information has been entered As a result the system did not import the rows that contained errors Action Correct the errors and retry the operation Numeric field is greater than maximum Cause A numeric value has been specified for a field greater than the maximum in the AC Action Specify a value smaller than the maximum Numeric field is less than minimum Cause Thespecified numeric value for a field is less than the minimum in the AC Action Specify a value larger than the minimum 268 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages Open edit sessions exist Cause An attempt
390. rs only the values of elements that have changed since the last time a task scanned the real time database See exception processing exponential Mathematical expression consisting of an optional minus sign constant followed by consecutive digits 0 9 an exponential operator E an optional minus sign and another group of consecutive digits Exponential constants are interchangeable with floating point constants expression Mathematical statement that is resolved to a value Q 9 o o 5 lt FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 439 A DE GHI GLOSSARY FactoryLink See application application FactoryLink kernel See kernel FactoryLink SPC Run Rules JK L MN OP QRS TUVWX Y Z Tests that the SPC Data Monitor process uses to detect patterns of quality level variations over time The following shows the chart zones on which the FactoryLink SPC Run Rules are based le une A Ir daw e Jaw 4 Zum 4 Fone N Tow A Rule 20F 3 40F5 TREND 8 3SIGMA 15CONS IN_C 90 25_IN_C 8CONS OUT C 609625 OUT C 440 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals UL db pper Comre Leni E ooa imei LEL Laser Cenin hil Definition 2 out of 3 points lie on one side of the Center Linein Zone A or beyond 4 out of 5 points lie on one side of the Center Linein Zone B or beyond 7 points in a row are rising or falling 8 points in a row lie on one side of the Center Line one or
391. rt Generator Task Definition 167 Reporting Methodology 168 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 8 Fundamentals Components of a Format File 170 Keywords 170 Sections of Format 170 Placement of Reported Data 172 Location of Objet 172 Format Specifies 172 TrEOger ACELIODS Rowen tad tek Tan E eed EE 173 Report Format Variations 176 Complete Triggers 177 Escape Sequences i oreo ed eke bak eee etn oct MES 178 Scaling and Deadbanding Task Definition 179 Principles of Operation 180 Defining Tags scere IA ELS dat ue ELE 181 Tag Naming Guidelines 182 System Added 5 5 182 Schema Task Definition 183 lt 183 Data Point Logging 184 Database vs Data Point Logging 185
392. rty software or hardware Setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by FactoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for F actoryL ink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardwareis compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up 105 correctly but the error continues to occur Invalid dimension definition Cause screen contains an invalid definition for dimension Action Movethe tothis field and choose Error Help or press the Alt E key sequence to find out the reason for the failure 56 DIE 5 5 ou FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 263 USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages Invalid dimension size Cause Thescreen contains an invalid definition for dimension Action The specified dimension may exceed size limitations A dimension cannot exceed 16 characters Invalid dimension syntax Cause Thescreen contains an invalid definition for dimension Action Movethecursor to this field and choose Error Help or press the Alt E key sequence to find out the reason for the failure Invalid fields Cause Thescreen contains invalid information Actio
393. ryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 110 FactoryLink Lite FactoryLink Lite is designed to run small scale FactoryLink applications that have been created in either a full FactoryLink or a FactoryLink Lite development package This product supports a limited number of F actoryLink tags and offers all of the same features as the full scale run time product Refer to FactoryLink Lite Product Matrix for current platform availability The following requirements and limitations will help you to determine whether this product is suitable for your specific application T o O eA lt 3 zc e FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 419 FACTORYLINK LITE Defining Tags DEFINING TAGS Data stored in the real time database is an element Each element is assigned a logical name called tag This tag is used to reference the element in the real time database Tag Names pump1_tmp pump2 tmp Realtime database pump3 tmp Logically represents 5 an element in database Elements Once an element is defined you can make unlimited references to this element Any FactoryLink task containing a reference to an element can read and write data to and from the element at run time During development F actoryLink stores tag names in the FLAPP directory in the object databasetable This information is updated to the CT files when the run time application is started Some tags are already defined
394. s FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 2 109 Tagname Domain Type Description GENE LPORTO MSG SHARED MESSAGE General Electric logical port 0 error message M GENE READ COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL General Electric block read complete GENE READ DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL General Electric block read disable GENE_READ_STATE SHARED DIGITAL General Electric block read state GENE_READ_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL General Electric block read trigger GENE STATIONO STATUS SHARED ANALOG General Electric logical station 0 status z GENE WRITE COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL General Electric block write complete v GENE WRITE DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL General Electric block write disable GENE WRITE STATE SHARED DIGITAL General Electric block write state GENE_WRITE_TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL General Electric block write trigger GRAPHCONNTY PE USER ANALOG Graph connection and security type GRAPHMBX SHARED MAILBOX Graphics input mailbox GRAPHMBX_U USER MAILBOX Graphics input mailbox H1MP EXCEPTION DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Siemens Sinec H 1 exception write disable H1MP EXCEPTION TRIGGER SHARED DIGITAL Siemens Sinec 1 exception write trigger H1MP LPORTO MSG SHARED Siemens Sinec H1 logical port 0 error message H1MP READ COMPLETE SHARED DIGITAL Siemens Sinec H1 block read complete H1MP READ DISABLE SHARED DIGITAL Siemens Sinec H1 block read disable H1MP R
395. s also referred to as key files found in the fFLINK KEY directory Lower Control Limit For control charts the limit below which the quality of a process is out of control Lower Specification Limit The lowest value of a product dimension or measurement which is acceptable Language used to configure programmable logic controllers industry standard for representing relay logic control systems See Local Area Network Collection of utility functions that primarily interface application and system programs to the FactoryLink kernel Process of associating an object and its animation attributes to elements in the FactoryLink real time database FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 445 o o o z lt A DE F GH GLOSSARY Local Area Network LAN LOCAL file local station log logical operator logical port logical station LONGANA long analog mailbox mask Math amp Logic mathematical function I JK LE MN OP QR STU VW X Y Z n house data communications system connecting a number of microcomputers See node node name ASCII file in which you define a local station name The LOCAL file resides in the F LAPP YNET directory Current station on a network Set of data files error messages or alarms spooled to a printer or archived to disk Symbols in expressions that test operands for TRUE non zero or FALSE zero values and return a result of 1 TRUE or 0 FALSE
396. s failed to stop Cause Action Directory directory name does not exist Cause Action One or more processes could not be started Seethe error messages for the particular process The process may already have stopped Attempt to stop the process manually if it has not stopped Can t the find FLAPP directory specified by the environment variable Set FLAPP toa valid application directory FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 349 108 USING RUN TIME MONITOR Run time Manager Messages Directory directory name is not a valid FactoryLink directory Cause FLAPP does not have a valid subdirectory structure Action 1 Check the FLAPP directory Add the missing subdirectories 2 Set FLAPP to a valid application directory Domain domain name can only have one instance Cause A parent domain has been configured as having more than one instance Acion A parent domain may only have one instance Open the Domain Element List and change the entry in the ANST field to 1 Domain domain name isn t in the domain CT Cause Thespecified domain does not exists in the domain CT Action Thedomain name may have been entered incorrectly or may not exist in the Domain Element List Verify the domain exists in the Domain Element List and has been entered correctly Environment Tag element name has an invalid type Cause The wrong data type was specified for the field Action Enter
397. s recipe files when performing a platform dependent FLSAVE however FactoryLink does not save recipe files when performing a platform independent multiplatform FLSAVE edioeu uojeg FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 63 BATCH RECIPE TASK DEFINITION Creating and Animating a Graphics Display CREATING AND ANIMATING A GRAPHICS DISPLAY You create and animate a graphics display using the Application Editor adhering to the following specifications e Create input fields on the display that allow an operator to select a recipe name and to set or modify values in the recipe e Link these input fields to elements e Define buttons for read and save triggers for the recipe such as Open Recipe and Save Recipe e Link the buttons to digital elements Use the ON action to create the triggers e Define other buttons such as a button or key to open the new display from the Main Menu and a button or key toreturn tothe Main Menu e Link these buttons to digital elements Assign a nametothe display e Enter a window element name and default drawing name Usethe View menu commands to size the window and chooseits location on the screen Refer to the Application Editor Guide for detailed instructions 64 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 86 Database Browser Task Definition The FactoryLink Database Browser task works in conjunction with the FactoryLink Historian task to allow an application to access data i
398. s specific to the user domain FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 35 OVERVIEW FactoryLink Directory Organization FactoryLink Application Directory Files The application directory also contains the following files FLAPP ID mdx cnp exp Application identification file Configuration database files that store information about elements such as name type number of writes specified by the defining task and number of references Index files used by the Main Menu in conjunction with the cdb files Main Menu cut and paste work files Main Menu import export output files FactoryLink System Directory Subdirectories TheFactoryLink system directory contains all FactoryLink program files The default name of this directory depends on your operating system On Windows NT platforms the default directory is FLNT On Windows 95 platforms the default directory is V FLWIN On OS 2 platforms the default directory is FLOS2 On UNIX platforms the default directory is usr flink The program files in this directory are organized under the following subdirectories AC BLANK BIN CML CTGEN DRW EDI Text files that function as attribute catalogs to inform the Main Menu of the format of the configuration tables They also control entry criteria Files used by FactoryLink utilities that manage applications such as 1 f1save flrest and flconv Command scrip
399. s triggers You can use the Math amp Logic task to set triggers of any data type except mailbox to start an operation PREDEFINED ELEMENTS Seethe current FactoryLink Release Notes for a complete listing of the FactoryLink pre defined elements 210 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 105 Using the Configuration Manager The Configuration Manager is the user interface to the development environment You can use the Configuration Manager to perform the following actions e Designate how tasks and elements are used at run time e Specify elements to be used by each task at run time e Review and modify elements during configuration e Review and modify application data The development environment is a series of configuration tables one or more tables exist for each FactoryLink module You enter data in these configuration tables through panels There are two types of panels in FactoryLink e Structured Structured panels contain rows and columns E ach row represents an entry in the table sometimes called a record Each column has a heading and represents a field in a record e Text entry Text entry panels have an open form in which ASCII text can be entered This chapter describes how to open and use the Configuration M anager The discussion in this chapter assumes you know how to use a mouse or other pointing device to e Position the cursor e Choose item Choosea range of text 105 ou
400. sage column of the Run Time Manager screen This element can have the following message values Inactive Starting Active Error Stopping FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 275 106 e 5 o lt o e 3 USING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION The data type for this tag is message Display Status Nameof an element that contains a text version of the status of the process The task status is displayed in the Status column on the Run Time Manager screen The data type for this tag is message Display Name Name of an element that contains the string entered in the Task Name field This task nameis displayed in the Task column on the Run Time Manager screen The data typefor this tag is message Display Name of an element that contains the string entered in the Description Description field on this panel The data type for this tag is message Start Order Enter an alphanumeric string of between 0 to 31 characters to definethe order in which tasks are started at run time The task defined with Start Order O starts first Start Order 1 starts next and soon until Start Order 31 which starts last Tasks with the same start order number will start consecutively The default Start Order for the Run Time Manager task is 0 Usethe following guidelines to determine the Start Order for certain tasks Set the Start To start Order for Historian before L ogger Logger before Trending Math
401. se Thedecompression algorithm could not access enough buffer 1 space due to memory used by the resident software Action Removeany TSRs and try again Contact Customer Support if this problem recurs eo co Unable to open filename for compression decompression Cause Thefilename specified does not exist and cannot be opened for processing Action Verify the correct filename was specified Re enter the command T i lt 7 Unable to open temporary file for compression decompression Cause The directory structure is full and a temporary file for the compression decompressi on operations cannot be created Action Remove unused files from the system Re enter the command FLSAVE The following error messages may occur during an FLSAVE An error occurred while extracting application files FLTOOLS Cause The multiplatform file may be corrupt or the hard disk may be out of space Action Theutility FLTOOLS provides an error message of its own Follow the FLTOOLS onscreen instructions Backup failed Cause FLXCOPY was unable to copy the application files to the destination path Either you entered an invalid application file or the files were corrupted Action Check the usage to see if you have entered an invalid application filename If so re enter the command using the correct filename If you entered a valid application filename manually save all application fi
402. server Database Browser will timeout in 30 seconds regardless of this switch setting Perform the following steps to configure one or more arguments 1 Ensurethe current domain selected is correct in the Configuration Manager Domain Selection box to modify the Database Browser entry in the System Configuration panel 2 Choose System Configuration on the Configuration Manager Main Menu to display the System Configuration Information panel 3 Enter one or more arguments separated by spaces in the Program Arguments field for the DBBROWSE task FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 71 5 e o o 5 o U o z o DATABASE BROWSER TASK DEFINITION Configuring Program Arguments 72 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 87 Database Logging Task Definition FactoryLink stores data it collects and computes as a data element in a real time database Each time data is collected or computed the new data overwrites the element value stored in the real time database lt lt Data be logged to an historical database using Database Logging if data such as reports or information on trend charts is to be preserved for historical purposes Database Logging reads data from the memory based real time database and sends it to a disk based relational database Logging sends data to a relational database via F actoryLink Historian The Historian used for this transfer depends on the
403. ships To avoid potential problems when the parent alarm is hidden child alarms must be hidden as well Filtering is more common on multi user or distributed systems In these architectures all people have the ability to monitor all alarms however certain operators may only be responsible for a subset of these alarms These operators filter out alarms so they manage only those alarms they are responsible for The operator login filters at the application level Global Hide Tag o 3 m o e e 2 The Global Hide tag is used most commonly for redundant systems In this architecture one node is the master and all alarms are active for this node Global Hide tag 0 The slave node or standby node has the Global Hide tag 1 until the slave node is to act as the master Group Hide Tags The Group Hide tags are used to hide equipment maintenance alarms In this case the developer must be sure to group alarms by machine so when a maintenance cycle begins those alarms can be hidden The Group Hide tags are also used to define station functionality This is a special case because a node may have multiple functional requirements F or example a node may function as a simple operator station for only one piece of equipment one day and the next that same node may be the supervisor s station for all of the equipment Groups are hidden based on the node functionality FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 55 ALARM LOGGING TASK
404. signed integer Its value can range between plus or minus 2 1 float Floating point is an IEEE double precision number with 31 places tothe right of the deci mal message A message can be any combination of alphanumeric characters Its length is controlled by its tag definition mailbox Variable length data organized as a queue Choose the domain where this tag should be created This can be one of the following SHARED Choose SHARED if you want the tag to be available from the shared or user environment USER ChooseUSER if you want the tag to be available only from the user environment If this tag will be used to reference an array enter the number of elements to include in the array If you are not defining an array leavethis field blank Do not enter a O in this field as this causes errors Refer to Defining Element Arrays on page 207 for details on defining arrays This field defines the maximum length for message tags If you do not specify a length it is calculated by FactoryLink This field defines the value written tothetag when FactoryLink is started 204 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DEFINING TAGS Tag Naming Guidelines The remaining fields on the Tag Definition dialog are used for defining tag persistence With tag persistence activated the value of the tag is periodically saved to a disk file If a value exists in this file for a tag it is written to the tag when the task is started if the r fla
405. sn t exist Cause An attempt was made to start a USER domain when the SHARED domain did not exist Action Start the SHARED domain Run time Manager errno error number Cause TheRun time Manager was awakened when there was nothing for it to do Internal error Action No action required 312 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MANAGER Run time Manager Messages Run time Manager CT processing failed Cause Oneor more of the elements ARGUMENT COMMAND PASSWORD SHUTDOWN or STARTUP is not defined in the GLOBAL CDB file The file has been damaged or installed incorrectly Action Contact Customer Support Run time Manager failed to start Cause TheRun time Manager must be the first task started The Start Order number for RUNMGR must be 0 no other task may have a zero for a Start Order number Action Check the System Configuration Table to verify the Start Order Run time Manager failed to stop 107 Cause The process may already have stopped Action Attempt to stop the process manually if it has not stopped Run time Manager is already running Cause A copy of the Run time Manager is already running for the DOMAIN and USER name specified Action Change the DOMAIN or USER name Cc e 5 2 JJ ftc ml 3 Software has been enabled Cause An error has occurred with the f1 key file in the opt directory Action 1 Run KEYINST and if an invalid or archaic agreem
406. so written to the file In this example the literal text Temperature is written to the report in front of the element value 2 Q 2 5 e o The event that triggers the repeat can be a periodic sampling a specific time or an event driven trigger like a part meeting a photo eye in a conveyor system You can trigger the repeat section any number of times before ending the report In this example the pump temperature is written to the report twice The first time its value is 10 the next time its value is 14 The literal text in this section is written to the temporary working file when the end section is triggered then the entire report is sent to its configured destination This can bea disk based file a printer or across the network to another node The temporary working file is deleted FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 175 REPORT GENERATOR TASK DEFINITION Report Format Variations REPORT FORMAT VARIATIONS A simple variation on the report used in the previous example can be generated by not specifying an event or trigger for the begin section This is typically used if no header type information is necessary An end section must always be specified Another common format for reports is a snapshot report The purpose of this type of report is to gather information and to generate a printed report by triggering a single event This is done by specifying only an end trigger The begin and repeat
407. statements In general mailboxes are unidirectional that is a task requesting data from the Historian makes the request through a different mailbox than the mailbox Historian uses to return data 2 Historian reads this mailbox and processes any queued data requests It transmits the data request to the relational database server FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 115 HISTORIAN TASK DEFINITION 3 Therelational database returns the requested information to the Historian if the request was to retrieve data 4 Historian returns the requested data to the requesting task Real time Database 9 17 D Logger writes data to an Historian mailbox Supported Relational Databases AT Historian transfers data to the relational database in table 7 format Relational Database You receive dBASE IV Historian with FactoryLink The dBASE IV Historian communicates with a dBASE IV relational database If you use a different relational database in your application you can configure an Historian that communicates with it Each supported relational database has a different FactoryLink Historian FactoryLink supports the following relational databases e dBASE IV Database2 e Informix Orade7 e ODBC Sybase You must add the desired Historian to the system configuration as a task if you want to configure an Historian other than or in addition tothe dBASE IV Historian Review the conside
408. stration below shows a typical strip chart recorder Figure 103 1 Strio Chart Recorder T 1 l Value This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure Trending operations Refer to Configuring Trend Panels on page 409 in the F actoryLink Configuration Guidefor information on procedures to configure this task Use Trending on page 511 in theFactoryLink Reference Guidefor a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 189 TRENDING TASK DEFINITION Trending Methodology TRENDING METHODOLOGY Trending is logically divided into two categories real time historical These categories determine the database from which the trending data is read Real time Only Trending Real time only trending allows you to chart data directly from the real time database As a new value is written to the database the value is displayed on the real time trend chart Data displayed on a real time trend chart is not saved Real time only trending is a function of the run time graphics application therefore refer to the Application Editor Guidefor additional information Following is a sequential list and illustration of events explaining the real time trending operation 1 Thereal time database receives and stores data from various sources such as a remote device user input or computation results from a Factory
409. t files and executable program files for each FactoryLink task Default make file for Compiled Math amp Logic task Configuration database conversion script files System files used by the Graphics task and by the Application E ditor Subdirectory for External Device Interface protocol modules 36 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals OVERVIEW FactoryLink Directory Organization INC C language include files for options such as Compiled Math amp Logic and the Programmer s Access Kit KEY Text files used by the Main Menu to translate text table entries into binary values to be placed in configuration tables LIB Library files and objects MPS Demo application new application and test application files MSG Help files used with the Main Menu and Application Editor and error message files for F actoryLink tasks OPT Files needed to control the FactoryL ink options available with your application SRC External Device Interface Programmer s Access Kit C source files libraries and sample protocol module and sample Programmer s Access Kit source and makefiles Windows NT and Windows 95 Platforms The Windows NT and Windows 95 platforms contain the following subdirectories under the application directory BIN FactoryLink command files bat extension and executable program files for each FactoryLink task exe extension and dynamic link library files dll extension LIB Object image library and object library files
410. t has been entered or the specified element has not been defined Action Change the string to the name of an existing element or define the element when the system requests a definition 270 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages The Tag type is invalid Cause Action Cause Action If you are trying to import a file using the Import function this error can occur if one of the elements being imported has the same name but is of a different data type than one of the elements that already exists in the current application Either delete the element s with the same name from the file to be imported or rename the element Then re import the file Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur If you are not attempting an Import operation either the operating system third party software or hardware setup on your system is incorrect or incompatible or an internal error has occurred Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up to run FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by F actoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have The correct version for F actoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardware is compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up cor
411. t the system prompt mkdir fldemo 2 Changetothe newly created directory by entering the following command at the system prompt cd fldemo 3 Enter the following command to restore multiplatform save file for FLDEMO flrest FLINK mps fldemo mps fldemo loc Restoring FLTEST Perform the following steps to restore FLTEST on a UNIX operating system 1 Create a target directory for the test application by entering the following command at the system prompt mkdir fltest 2 Changetothe newly created directory by entering the following command at the system prompt cd fltest 3 Enter the following command to restore multiplatform save filefor FLTEST flrest FLINK mps fltest mps usr flapps fltest loc 400 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES Module Dependencies MODULE DEPENDENCIES 109 Refer to the following chart to determine the tasks required to run the appropriate applications when installing F actoryLink J O Table 109 3 o lt FLDEMO FLTEST T 5 Alarm Report Alarm Persistence A Supervisor Generator Supervisor Configuration Statistical Configuration Batch Recipe Manager Process Control Manager SPC Run Time Color Statistical Run Time Color Report Graphics Process Graphics Generator Recalculation Database Timer Database SPR Browser Browser Database Logger Counter Database Statistical Loager Process Control i SPC DB4 Historian Trending DB4 Historian
412. tals 447 A DE F GH GLOSSARY NOT np Chart NUMBUFS numeric constant numeric input field object OBJECT database table octal number system Open Software Bus architecture operand operating characteristics curve Operating System 2 OS 2 operator option key OR I JK LE MN OP QR STU VW X Y Z Unary logical operator that yields a value of 1 TRUE if its argument is 0 FALSE and 0 FALSE if its argument is TRUE nonzero For attribute data a control chart of the number of defective units in the subgroups with fixed subgroup sizes Number of data buffers in which data can be queued In networking Integer or floating point or exponential constant Area on a graphics display defined in the Application Editor to accept operator input in the form of a number See input text field input object See animation object Configuration M anager maintained database table that stores the real time database definition and other related information Numeric system with a base of 8 used in computers FactoryLink operating principle whereby modular software programs run concurrently and communicate through a global real time database See argument For acceptance sampling curve showing the percent defectivein a lot vs the probability that the lot will be rejected for a specified lot size and sampling plan Prioritized multitasking environment that manages system resources such as me
413. tals for this discussion Thereis limit except the amount of available memory to the number of event and interval timers that can be defined This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure E vent and Interval Timer operations Refer to Event and Interval Timer on page 37 in the FactoryLink Configuration Guidefor information on procedures to configure this task Use Event and Interval Timer on page 155 in the FactoryLink Reference Guidefor a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages pue 1 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 109 EVENT AND INTERVAL TIMER TASK DEFINITION Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The Event and Interval Timer task operates in synchronization with the system clock You must create a digital element in the real time database for each defined interval or event When the system clock matches the specified event or interval the task forces the value of this digital element to 1 ON The Event and Interval Timer task also updates global information used by FactoryLink such as the current ti me the day of the week and the month Such global information is stored in predefined FactoryLink real time database elements known as reserved elements Each is one of the following data types analog long analog or message Thefollowing table lists reserved elements the Event and Interval Timer task updates while
414. teger data ANALOG analog small integer data LOGDATA general log data TRENDATA data that will be used for trend analysis Each preconfigured data point logging table uses the Database Alias Name DATALOG which references the relational database where Historian sends the data from Data Point Logging In addition each default table refers to the Historian Mailbox mailbox tag entry DBAHISTMBX Data Point Logging allows you to define your own data point logging tables if you need one other than the pre defined tables For details see Data Point Logging Table Schema Configuration on page 384 92 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals DATA POINT LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Data Point Logging Function Preconfigured Data Point Logging Table Schemas Data Point Logging provides four default data point logging table schemas each accepting a different logged data type Table 88 2 Default Data Point Logging Table Schemas Schema Name Data Type lt lt SMALLINT smallint analog data LARGEINT integer longana analog data FLOATVAL float float longana analog data The maximum records allowed in a dBASE IV database table governed by any of the four default Data Point Logging table schemas is 1 000 000 Each default schema also specifies a maximum tagname column width of 48 You must specify a schema for thetablein the Data Point Schema Control panel if you define your own Data Point Logging table Refe
415. the correct data type for this field FactoryLink initialization failed Cause FactoryLink system failed to initialize Action Ensurethe master key is present and properly connected Run KEYINST and FLKEYVAL FactoryLink system monitoring failed Cause system was unable to start the monitor task The system may not contain sufficient memory Action Stop unnecessary processes 350 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Run time Manager Messages Grace period has expired Software must be registered Cause FactoryLink was installed without registering it within the 10 day grace period Action Run FLKEYVAL and follow the instructions for registration Kernel initialization failed Cause FactoryLink was already initialized FactoryLink was already running when start up was attempted Action Noaction required Monitor tag array definition failed Cause A System Configuration Table monitor element Start Trigger Task Status or Task M essage may be undefined or defined incorrectly for one of the tasks being started Action Open the System Configuration Table and define the elements correctly Number of defined proc process number more than max maximum number Cause Morethan 31 processes were started Action Start fewer processes Out of RAM Cause No memory is available Action Close any unnecessary windows or programs Add more memory to the system if this error occurs oft
416. the file Bad index in file filename Cause Unabletoread the index of the FLAPP CT TYPE CT file Action Deletethe file and re start the application to rebuild the file Can t convert subgroup table name Cause Tried to convert an older SPC application Action Seethe conversions instructions in the Release Notes Can t create appl filename error error number Cause Tried tostart an application already started Action Noadion required 308 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MANAGER Run time Manager Messages Can t open file filename Cause Thedisk may be full or this may bea log file opened by another process Action Delete unnecessary files If this error occurs often additional disk space may be required Can t read options file FL OPT Cause FL OPT has been damaged Action Verify the contents of FL OPT by running UK EY Copy flnew opt to fl opt Can t start process process name Cause The binary file may not exist may not be executable or the 107 filename in the EXECUTABLE FILE field in the System Configuration Table may be incorrect Under some system platforms this may indicate an insufficient number of processes Action Verify thecorrect filenamein the System Configuration Table or see the Fundamentals manual Can t stop process process name Cause The process may already have stopped Action Attempt to stop the process manually if it has not stopped Cc e 5 2 JJ ftc
417. the following data is deleted from the relational database table All subgroups without a groupname association All nongrouped records sequenced by an integer Use multiple tables to store the data if you do not want this to happen FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 85 DATABASE LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Database Logging Methods DATABASE LOGGING METHODS After considering the available database logging methods choose the one best suited to your application Nongrouped Nonsequenced Method Use this method if you want to log data without a group association in no particular order Consider the following benefits and restrictions before selecting this method Thenumber of records in a table are controlled using record rollover if you are logging to a FactoryLink dBASE IV table e Data logging is faster than other methods e Data is only used by a FactoryLink task or third party software that does not require an index based on a sequence number e Data retrieval is slow compared to other methods Nongrouped Sequenced Method Use this method if you want to log data without a group association and a specific order Time stamping or integer reflect the order This time stamping or integer can be used as a unique index Consider the following benefits and restrictions before selecting this method Thenumber of records in a table can be controlled using record rollover if you are log
418. the new alarm status All nodes receiving information on the alarm are updated The distribution is achieved by assigning every node on the network a unique distributed alarm LAN identification number Distributed Alarm Logging uses this number to identify which nodes receive which alarms The data exchange then takes place through the use of mail boxes one send mailbox and one receive mailbox are defined and then the different types of messages between the different nodes are all sent through these two mailboxes gt o 3 m o e e 2 The different alarm nodes on the network are updated using the broadcast principle of the F actoryLink Local Area Network application This is achieved by putting all nodes in one FactoryLink LAN group Distribution is logically divided into two categories that determine how the alarms are configured at each node Server The server is the node originating the alarms e Client The client is the node displaying the alarms Alarms are acknowledged and logbook messages are created from the client Each node is used as a server and a client or one node can be used as the server of all alarms and the other nodes as clients Distributed Alarm Logging identifies the node based on the Distributed Alarm Logging LAN ID and matches it with the information on the particular alarm to determine which nodes are performing which duties The drawing below represents the link between the nodes using the
419. this system need to complete their applications The following guidelines help focus our purpose and goals to meet customer requirements e Accuracy is paramount This FactoryLink documentation must provide accurate and reliable information and procedures Timeis valuable This FactoryLink documentation must guidethe programmer through what he needs to know quickly and efficiently AUDIENCE The major audience of this manual is programmers who design and construct programs to configure tasks that facilitate functions performed by standard FactoryLink tasks n addition FactoryLink Customer Support Services personnel use the procedures and examples induded here to help you develop and troubleshoot your applications THE FACTORYLINK DOCUMENTATION SET TheFactoryLink Documentation Set is divided in a Complete set of manuals and a Basic set of manuals Included in the Complete set are e Installation Guide e Release Notes e Tutorial e Fundamentals e Application Editor e Device Interface Guide e Reference Guide e Configuration Guide Power SPC Configuration Guide FactoryLink ECS 6 5 0 15 PREFACE Structure of Fundamentals e PowerVB Language Reference Guide e Programmer s Access Kit e Comprehensive Index e Product Matrix The Basic set of manuals includes only the first seven manuals listed along with a Master Index that includes entries for Fundamentals Application Editor and the Reference Guide only
420. tion Alphabetical or numeric an alphanumeric symbol is upper or lower cas letters or a digit 0 9 1 Data type supported by F actoryLink an analog element may assume any integer value from 32768 to 32767 2 Signal of continuously variab voltage used as a measurement of some infinitely variable quantity suc as temperature water salinity blood pressure Binary logical operator that yields a value of 1 TRUE if both of its arguments are non zero and 0 FALSE otherwise To define a graphics object soit changes color and or shape or displays numeric values or text messages Graphically displayed input field output field or symbol created using FactoryLink Application Editor An animation object may be defined to change color or shape accept various types of operator inputs or display alphanumeric data See Application Editor display object and input object Feature in FactoryLink that enables testing each animation component i a drawing within the Application Editor and provides validation of complex animation types Set of utilities and or procedures that allow an application level progran to access application level functions Collection of information from configuration tables generated from the configuration databases and graphics for a set of FactoryL ink tasks Creating a file of data records by logging information to a specified archi device such as a disk drive Numeric or string expression operan
421. tion USING POWERNET WITH THE FLDEMO APPLICATION The following entries must be made in the External Domain Definition panel in the Configuration Manager to use PowerNet with the FLDEMO application provided with F actoryLink Network Mode Hamet Service Type Lpdsse Arie Name ar TAG Same oo TAG nr T S meds PERMET T EXCEPTIIN In the FLDEMO application the PowerNet task is not automatically started Start PowerNet from the Run Manager screen or add the R flag to the task in the System Configuration panel See System Configuration Information Panel the FactoryLink Configuration Guidefor information about adding the R flag 150 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals POWERNET TASK DEFINITION Definitions DEFINITIONS Client server refers to a distributed processing model where the client object initiates connections to and requests data from or actions of the server object The server object in turn accepts or rejects such requests A single PowerNet task can act as a client a server or both Client application refers to a FactoryLink application that references tags in a different FactoryLink application Server application is a FactoryL ink application that sends data to a requesting dient application Exception or unsolicited data refers to one or more FactoryLink data objects processed only when their data attributes indicates a changed state the data value s may or
422. to 31 tasks areavailablein both the shared and user domain If you arein the shared domain this area is titled Shared Task If you arein the user domain this area is titled User Task Indicates current User Task domain X77 107 Task control X DBBROWSE button c o 5 oe 2 JJ fc 5 zu 3 The contents of the button to the left of the task indicates the status of the task This can be one of the following Empty Task is not running If you choose this button when the task is not running the task starts Green check mark Task is running If you choose this button when the task is running the task stops Yellow question Task is stopping mark Blue question mark Task is starting Red X Task has reported an error FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 305 USING RUN TIME MANAGER e Run Time Manager User Interface Screen Application Controls The application control area provides information about the application running and provides the ability to stop the application or the user instance ss i ECC i 2222 p adi ee e Stop Application flapp1 amp Stop User Name fluser1 FactoryLink Directory Application Directory C FLAPP I fos 1 Indicates current user Stop Application Stops the application Always choose this button if you are running in a sing
423. trend chart Note Werecommend you configure no morethan eight pens to a chart for good readability FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 197 TRENDING TASK DEFINITION Value Cursor VALUE CURSOR A value cursor allows you to display the value associated with a point on a trend chart When you click anywhere in the chart at run time the value cursor which looks like a vertical bar is displayed The system displays the values for the points where the value cursor intersects the trend lines Refer to the following example for a representative value cursor Figure 103 7 The value cursor indicates the selected point as it intersects the trend lines Move the value cursor back and forth to see the 20 15 Value Cursor MET LEN o0 m IE ee TM M ee 11 17 96 12 43 00 8 Cursor 11 17 96 10 43 00 Cursor We Trend 1 Trend 2 value at different points along the trend lines Trend 3 The values of the trend lines at the cursor are displayed in output text fields Trend 1 Trend 2 Trend 3 You can determine the time an event on an event trend chart was logged as well as its value using a value cursor 198 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals TRENDING TASK DEFINITION Configuring Program Arguments CONFIGURING PROGRAM ARGUMENTS You can configure the following system configuration program arguments to affect Trend funct
424. tside the range of available messages the QUERY MBX function returns this message F or example if a task requests to view the third message waiting in the queue and only two messages are in the queue then the task is requesting to view a message outside the range of available messages Action Noadion required 318 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 37 FLE_ACCESS_DENIED If a task tries to read a mailbox element that it is not allowed to read the real time database returns this error If the task is a custom task developed using PAK the programmer may not have set up ownership of the mailbox element by the task Cause Action Cause Action requesting to read from it USING RUN TIME MANAGER Run time Manager Messages Usethe PAK function FL SET OWNER MBX toestablish the task as owner of the mailbox element Internal error See Correcting Internal Errors at the end of this section 41 FLE_APP_EXISTS A real time database with the same FLNAME but a different number of users or elements already exists Cause Action Either shut down the running real time database or set FLNAME with a different name 42 FLE NO FLINK RTDB Cause Action A user domain was started for a real time database for which the shared domain has not been started Start the shared domain first FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 319 107 Cc m 5 9e 2 JJ ftc ml 3 USING RUN TIME MANAGER
425. turns to normal Ifthe alarm does not require an acknowledgment it is removed immediately from the list Ifthe alarm required an acknowledgment and has been acknowledged it is removed from the list e Ifthe alarm requires an acknowledgment and has not been acknowledged it remains on the list until acknowledged and then is removed The removal of an alarm from the list causes the Distributed Alarm Logger to log the message to the relational database providing the configuration is set to log alarms lt lt FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 49 ALARM LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Alarm Grouping ALARM GROUPING Alarms can be grouped to facilitate administration or analysis The following three grouping properties are related to alarms e Group Name The group name is assigned to a class of alarms Use uppercase alphanumeric string of 16 characters to define the name Group names can be identifiers of the severity of the alarm can group like types such as pressure gauges or can combine any other characteristics you want e Area Thearea is assigned to each alarm individually Use an alphanumeric string of 16 characters to specify the area name More than one alarm can reside in an area and alarms from different groups can alsoreside together An area can reflect a physical location such as the boiler room or an area responsibility such as maintenance Priority T
426. un Time M anager screen Application size exceeded by number tags for FLS Lite Cause This error appears during development and can have either of the following causes Theapplication has more than the allowable number of elements configured this exceeds the Lite development system limit Cause Theapplication already has the maximum number of elements defined and you tried to define another one Action Either do not edit or run the application on a Lite system or using a non Lite development system remove at least number elements from the application Refer to Configuration Guidelines on page 424 for instructions for deleting elements None but do not attempt to define more elements unless you delete some Point count total exceeded Cause You have defined more than the maxiumum number of I O total elements for the combined tasks Action Delete some of the I O elements Refer to Configuration Guidelines on page 424 for instructions for deleting elements Lite Tag limit exceeded by number tags Cause This error appears at run time You have defined more than the maximum number of elements Action Delete some of the elements Refer to Configuration Manager Main Menu for instructions for deleting elements Cause Ifthe Configuration Manager and Application Editor indicate you have defined more elements than the Run Time M anager indicates at run time then some of the elements you have defined are not
427. uring Batch Recipe on page 577 in theFactoryLink Configuration Guidefor information on procedures to configure this task Use Batch Recipe on page 17 in the FactoryLink Reference Guidefor a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages edioeu yojeg FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 61 BATCH RECIPE TASK DEFINITION Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION In the real time database a F actoryLink batch recipe is a collection of elements grouped together for some purpose These elements can contain internally generated or operator entered values You can perform the following functions with Batch Recipe Define up to 8000 different recipe templates each associated with a virtually unlimited number of files Store batch recipes in disk files so the total number of different recipes stored on a system is limited only by available disk space Store each batch recipe file under a standard file name Specify up to 8000 elements for one batch recipe template Use with any of the five F actoryLink data types digital analog long analog floating point and message You can configure Batch Recipe for use in many diverse applications For example a program can use a graphic display for the entry of application values and write these values to an external device using the FactoryLink E DI task Batch Recipe can save these element values in a recipe file so the program can then read the
428. urn Ox0A t Send horizontal tab 0x09 XX Send OxXX or any two uppercase hex digits V 9F Z Send Z where Z is any character not previously listed Send necessary to start a Report Fileline with a period M Send M Send Send a single 178 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 101 Scaling and Deadbanding Task mm Definition The Scaling and Deadbanding task SCALE E XE is used to convert or scale incoming raw data to a different valuerange and to indicate a dead or non recalculating band around a scaled value lt lt The linear scaling feature of the task is used to convert or scale the incoming raw data toa different value range Many values read from a programmable logic controller PLC are in units other than those the user wishes to display manipulate and or archive Use of the scaling task eliminates the need to process data through an intermediate routing mechanism and the need to write code to perform the scaling function when the scaling is linear The scaling task if given ranges for the incoming and desired data values can derive the necessary conversion factor and or offset and perform the linear scaling calculations automatically using the formula mx b y where x is the raw value mis the multiplier bis a constant and y is the result The Deadbanding task is used to indicate a band or area around a value small enough to be considered insignifica
429. urred Action Verify the following 1 The operating system is set up torun FactoryLink tuning parameters resources etc 2 All third party software needed by F actoryLink such as X Windows has been installed and set up correctly and you have the correct version for F actoryLink 3 All hardware is correctly set up and all of the hardware is compatible Contact Customer Support if everything is compatible and set up correctly but the error continues to occur Can t open AC file Cause Thespecified AC file does not exist or cannot be opened If it does not exist FactoryLink installation may not have completed normally If the file cannot be opened it may be opened by another process Action Rerun theFactoryLink installation if the file does not exist 254 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Can t open file Cause Action USING THE CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuration Manager Messages The system cannot open an output file The disk may be full or the path may not exist Delete any unnecessary files if the disk is full Create the path if it does not exist Can t open FL OPT file Cause Action The FL OPT file has become corrupt or been deleted Or the FLINK environment variable is not set Check the value of the FLINK environment variable Also verify the FL OPT fileexists in the directory FLINK OPT Can t paste paste buffer is empty Cause Action An attempt has been made to perform a
430. use of a time stamping to order the data Seq Time Lastname Firstname Start date order collected 486552605 11 6 95 FactoryLink time stamping is tied to time maintained by an internal clock based on the global tag SECTIME This tracks time from the starting point at midnight J anuary 1 1980 in intervals of one second FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 79 DATABASE LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Indexing INDEXING Records are displayed in a relational database table in the order they are added This is known as the natural or physical order The field or fields selected for indexing are called the index key When a tableis indexed an index fileis created that contains the indexed order The actual record order in the database file remains unchanged Accessing indexed records is faster than accessing non indexed records n some cases you may want to retrieve the records in a different order such as alphabetical order This is achieved by creating an index for the table An index reorganizes the records in a database file by the values in one or more of the fields Index the records by the Lastname field to reorganize the records in the example table in alphabetical order Location Lastname Firstname Start date Dallas J ohnson 2 14 95 Index by last name index key You can index on more than one column Records are sorted on the first column specified then the next then the next Ind
431. used by any task Delete these unused elements 426 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK LITE FactoryLink Lite Error Messages Cause Todelete unused elements 1 Open the Configuration M anager 2 Open the RTDB Element List panel 3 Tab over to the Segment and Offset fields 4 Scan the entries in these columns for blanks These fields will be blank for unused elements 5 Use Delete from the Edit menu to delete all elements whose Segment and Offset fields are blank 6 Clock on Enter to save the information When you re start the application the Run Time Manager will display the same number of defined elements as the Configuration Manager and Application E ditor T o O eA lt 3 zc e FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 427 FACTORYLINK LITE FactoryLink Lite Error Messages 428 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 111 Glossary AC file alarm group Alarm Summary screen Alarm Supervisor alphanumeric analog AND animate animation object animation testing API Application Programmer s Interface application archiving argument ASCII American ea a um Los See attribute catalog Set of alarm conditions having similar characteristics that you configure in the Alarm Groups table On line display of alarm information FactoryLink task that identifies alarm conditions and records events th occur during run time FactoryLink opera
432. value are added to the watch list display Bec Mordor ei adr Lori Tag name ae ali Tag value 3 Repeat step 2 for each element you want to monitor If you list an element name more than once or on more than one watch list panel only the first entry is updated 4 Choose Cancel from the dialog to dose when you are finished adding elements to 108 the watch list fe w L uny FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 325 USING RUN TIME MONITOR e Viewing the Current Value of Elements Deleting Elements from a Watch List 1 Choose Delete Watch from the watch list Options pulldown menu The following dialog is displayed Enter hq tag name lt lt TT Enter tag name 2 Enter the name of the tag you want to delete and click on Enter Its name and current value are deleted from the watch list display 3 Choose Cancel from the dialog to close it when you are finished deleting elements from the watch list Finding Elements in a Watch List 1 ChooseFind Watch from the watch list Options pulldown menu The following dialog is displayed Ender ing same 7 coat Enter tag name 2 Enter the name of the tag you want to find and choose the Enter button The first occurrence of the element is found in the watch list 3 Choose Cancel from the dialog to close it after you have finished finding elements in the watch list 326 FactoryL
433. values from the batch recipe file Sample applications each using a single batch recipe template are Producing a particular line of paint You can use multiple files using the same recipe template to set various hues or colors of the paint being produced Setting up various external devices with different files for days of the week end of the month and other schedules Setting up an environment for a testing procedure with various files to establish different sets of testing parameters Refer to Sample Batch Recipe in the FactoryLink Configuration Guide for more information You can use batch recipes in conjunction with any FactoryLink task because each FactoryLink task communicates with other tasks through the real time database Batch Recipe executes as a background task The task does not require operator intervention at run time unless you design the application to require it 62 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals BATCH RECIPE TASK DEFINITION Principles of Operation You can configure Batch Recipe to be triggered by events timers or operator commands such as An external device read operation A Math amp Logic calculation either Interpreted or Compiled An activity from another station on a network e Input from the operator using a keyboard or pointing device Monitor the Run Time M anager screen to determine the status of Batch Recipe at run time lt lt FactoryLink save
434. ve not been affected and the current counting operation continues until the case contains 20 bottles 166 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 100 Report Generator Task Definition Data F actoryLink collects or computes is stored as data elements in a real time database Each time data is collected or computed the value stored in the real time database for an element is overwritten by the new data lt lt If you want to report the data you can write the data to a report file as it is received using Report Generator Report Generator is a flexible reporting tool that lets you define custom reports The data included on the report can be generated as a disk file a printed report or exchanged with other programs that accept ASCII files Some typical uses for generating report data indudethe following e Predicting potential problems based on data patterns e Reporting on productivity of shifts Generating hardcopy reports for management or specific agencies This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure Report Generator operations Refer to Defining the Report Format on page 553 in the F actoryLink Configuration Guidefor information on procedures to configure this task Use Report Generator on page 467 in the FactoryLink Reference Guidefor a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages 104 Woday FactoryLink 6 5 0
435. view 143 Principles of 145 Resolving Configuration Changes 147 15 POW ERIN Ce Task Definition 149 Using PowerNet with the FLDEMO Application 150 Definitions i pedals rens Peet deg 151 PowerNet Methodology 152 Method of Data Transfer 155 Startup tcr ER EUM e n ID na 155 Server to Client Data Transfer 155 Client to Server Data Transfer 156 Defining Tags wieso see to RR cer RR RR en air e EUR eS eee 157 Tag oad 157 Tag Naming Guidelines e 158 System Added 510 5 158 Tag Type Conversion 159 16 Print Spooler Task Definition 161 17 Programmable Counters Task Definition 163 Principles of 164 A Oe eA eee 164 Digital and Analog Values 164 165 Example BWO ere Recette 165 18 Repo
436. vironment variable contains the correct directory name If so obtain a copy of the file from the FactoryLink IV disk set Multi platform application file file not found Cause Thesystem could not find the source file Action Verify the filename of the first parameter is correct Correct it if it is incorrect FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 417 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES Utility Messages Restore failed Cause Action Either a problem exists in the source or destination drive or the FLCONFIG list for FLXCOPY was lost Check the usage to make sure the source and destination drives for the FLREST are correct If either is incorrect retry the FLREST using the correct source and destination drives If both are correct check that FLCONFIG exists in the FLAPP directory If that file does not exist copy it tothe FLAPP directory Then manually X COPY all application files to the FLAPP directory FLREST need not be re run Unable to copy application save file from remote node Cause Action FactoryLink is unable to remote copy the source file Verify rcp remote copying program provided with TCP IP software be run with the designated host and the source file exists Unknown third parameter Cause Action You have chosen an invalid third parameter Reenter the command using one of the following valid parameters RCP to saveto a remote node LOC tosavetoa local drive 418 Facto
437. visor Control Scroll up ALD_ACTCNT SHARED ANALOG Current Alarm Supervisor active alarm count ALD_AUDCNT SHARED ANALOG Current Alarm Supervisor audible alarm count ALD_BANNER SHARED MESSAGE Alarm Supervisor banner mode ALD_GROUP USER MESSAGE Current Alarm Supervisor group ALD_LOG_TEXT USER MESSAGE Alarm logbook text field ALD_PRINTER SHARED MESSAGE Current Alarm Supervisor print mode FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 363 e o O mp lt o FACTORYLINK UTILITIES FLNEW Table 109 1 Tagname Domain Type Description ALD_ROW USER ANALOG Alarm Supervisor selected row tag ALD_SORT USER MESSAGE Current Alarm Supervisor sort mode ALM BANNER USER MESSAGE Alarm Supervisor banner message ALM BANR BG USER ANALOG ALOG banner background color ALM BANR BL USER ANALOG ALOG banner line blink attribute ALM BANR FG USER ANALOG ALOG banner foreground color ALOGBCOLOR USER ANALOG Alarm Supervisor Text Background Color ALOGBLINK USER ANALOG Alarm Supervisor Text Blink Attribute ALOGFCOLOR USER ANALOG Alarm Supervisor Text F oreground Color ALOGMBX S SHARED MAILBOX Alarm Supervisor Mailbox Tags ALOGRFSH S SHARED DIGITAL Alarm Supervisor Viewer Screen Refresh Triggers ALOGSHMEM_S SHARED LONGANA Alarm Supervisor Shared Memory Sizes ALOGTE XT USER MESSAGE Alarm Supervisor Screen Text ALOGVER_S SHARED AN
438. what sets off the alarm In the example the condition is exceeds or greater than Deadband The deadband is a range above or below the limit the alarm stays active in The example uses a deadband of 100 900 100 800 The limit and the deadband can both be set with a constant value or the value from another data el ement The conditions a referenced element can generate an alarm under are o 3 m o e e 2 ON Analarmis triggered when the value of the element referenced is ON 1 OFF Analarmis triggered when the value of the element referenced is OFF 0 TGL alarm is triggered when the value of the element referenced changes from ON 1 to OFF 0 or from OFF 0 to ON 1 HI GT or gt An alarm is triggered when the value of an analog or floating point element is greater than the value specified by the Limit LOLTLOLOor An alarm is triggered when the value of an analog or floating point element is less than the value specified by the Limit FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 45 ALARM LOGGING TASK DEFINITION Establishing the Alarm Criteria GE or gt LE or lt EQ lt gt An alarm is triggered when the value of an analog or floating point element is greater than or equal to the value specified by the Limit An alarm is triggered when the value of an analog or floating point element is less than or equal to the value specified by the Limit An alarm is trigger
439. when you have completed loading all watch lists 328 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals USING RUN TIME MONITOR Reading and Writing a Real Time Database Element READING AND WRITING A REAL TIME DATABASE ELEMENT 1 Choose Options from the Run Time Monitor panel FactoryLink Run Time Monitor m x Options H 2 Poll Rate 1 000 The following pulldown menu is displayed Watch Process Tag Input Command Input Global Info Shutdown All Exit 2 Choose Tag Input from the Options pulldown menu The Tag Input dialog is displayed Taq You can display multiple tag input panels Each time you choose Tag Input a new panel is displayed 3 Providethe following information Tag Name Enter the logical name assigned to the real time database element you want to read or write When you enter a name the location of the element in the real time database referenced by thetagis displayed in the Tag Number field Value Enter the value you want written to the element if you want to write a value to the element 4 Choose the command button that represents the operation you want to perform This can be one of the following FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 329 108 w L uny USING RUN TIME MONITOR Reading and Writing a Real Time Database Element Read Reads the element The current value of the element is displayed to the right of the Value field
440. wing 1 provides only record number messages 2 provides text messages checks the entire application This means all AC files listed in titlefileplus OBJ ECT AC XREF AC DOMAIN AC and TYPE AC are checked is the name of the AC file or list of files to check You can specify up to 200 AC files Each name must be on a separate line redirects the output to filenameout where filenameout is the name of the fileto receive the output If a FactoryLink system file not an application file becomes corrupt and must be replaced on the hard drive from the installation media usethe explode utility to decompress individual files before replacing them This is only necessary for Windows NT Windows 95 and OS 2 platforms This is necessary because the Installation and System Software media contain compressed files The syntax is explode infileoutfile where infile outfile isthe full path of the file you want to copy from the installation disk including the name of the drive wherethe installation disk is mounted isthedrive and full path name of the directory where you want to writethe file 408 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES keyinst KEYINST eo co This is a protection utility usually run during installation however you can run it at any time It is used to create a key without having to go through the entire install process By entering the serial number followed by the sequence you op
441. with a remote node at run time theFLFM SERVER task must be running in the SHARED domain on the node that does not initiate the FLFM command Either start the FLFM SERVER task manually from the Run Time Manager screen at startup or configure FactoryLink to start the FLFM SERVER task automatically at system startup Complete the following steps to do this 1 Open the System Configuration Information panel in the SHARED domain from the Main Menu on the remote node Locate the row containing the entry FLFM SERVER in the Task field Placethe cursor over FLFM SERVER Tab tothe Flags field a A Mw Enter an R in the Flags field This configures the FLFM SERVER task on the remote node to start up automatically whenever FactoryLink is started This chapter introduces the operational concepts to configure File Manager operations Refer to File Manager on page 53 in the FactoryL ink Configuration Guidefor information on procedures to configurethis task Use File Manager on page 167 in the FactoryLink Reference Guidefor a quick description of this task s panels its entries and its associated error messages 114 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals Chapter 92 Historian Task Definition TheHistorian task is theinterface between F actoryLink and a relational database It processes data requests from other F actoryL ink tasks and sends them totherelational database Data requests can store data in the relational database for Databas
442. ws or programs Add more memory to the system if this error occurs often Output tag array definition failed Cause A System Configuration Table output element Display Status Display Name or Display Description may be undefined or defined incorrectly for one of the tasks being started Action Open the System Configuration Table and define the elements correctly FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 311 USING RUN TIME MANAGER Run time Manager Messages Process process name may not have started Cause Theprocess failed to be come active It may not have been ableto register with F actoryLink Action Verify the filenamein the EXECUTABLE FILE field in the System Configuration Table Verify the process compatibility with FactoryLink Process process name may not have stopped Cause The process may already have stopped Action Attempt to stop the process manually if it has not stopped Read failed on file filename Cause Areadoperation on the named file failed Action Verify configuration table entries communication parameters hardware identification information and electrical connections Read header failed on file filename Cause The CT file may be damaged Action Deletethe CT filein the FLINK ct directory and restart the application to rebuild the file Real time database isn t initialized Cause FactoryLink is starting or shutting down Action Start FactoryLink again Real time database for application doe
443. y is available Action Close any unnecessary windows or programs Add more memory to the system if this error occurs often FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 413 FACTORYLINK UTILITIES Utility Messages FLNEW The following error messages may occur during an FLNEW ERROR FLINK environment variable is not set ERROR Unable to find FactoryLink directory tree Cause Either you have not set the FLINK environment variable or you have to set the FLINK environment variable to an invalid directory structure Action Set theFLINK environment variable to a valid directory structure FLNEW aborted Cause TheFLNEW utility has stopped at your request Action Noaction required The specified path path does not exist Cause The path you specified for the starter application does not exist or is invalid Action Create a directory for the starter application and or rerun FLNEW using the correct path EXPLODE The following error messages may occur during an EXPLODE Error number in compressed file filename Cause Anerror was encountered during the file decompression process The number in the message specified a particular system call to the compression library Action This type of error is unrecoverable by the user Contact Customer Support and provide the error message and number 414 FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals FACTORYLINK UTILITIES Utility Messages No RAM Remove resident software and try again Cau
444. ypically used with Report Generator Report Value of Sample Archive File Archive Archive File Tag File Tag CA USCO REPORT 03d C USCO REPORT 033 Actual Archive File Path Generated lt s D CA USCO s RPT shift FIRST C USCO FIRST RPT USCO PUMP d pump no 1 USCO PUMP1 RPT RPT RPT RPT TRIGGER ACTIONS When a BEGIN REPEAT or END trigger executes the associated section of the format file is processed and written to a temporary working file The following figure illustrates what occurs when each keyword is triggered 104 Oday FactoryLink 6 5 0 Fundamentals 173 REPORT GENERATOR TASK DEFINITION Trigger Actions Figure 100 3 Starting format file Triggering action Results in temporary working file Format file Get pump temperature BEGIN Get pump temperature Begin triggered REPEAT Header is written to file Temperature temp END all done reporting Format file Get pump temperature BEGIN Get pump temperature Temperature 10 Repeat triggered REPEAT Temperature of temp is Temperature temp written to report END all done reporting Format file Get pump temperature BEGIN Get pump temperature Repeat triggered Temperature 10 Temperature of temp is REPEAT winter to report Temperature mug Temperature temp END all done reporting

FactoryLink 6.5.0 Fundamentals

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents